Home

hp LaserJet 9055mfp/9065mfp service manual

1. ENWW Center cross sectional drawing 3 HCI overview Drive system drawing Paper feed drive section Feed roller LT First paper feed SD SD100 Pick roller LT paper feed motor M101 LT First paper feed MC MC 102 N Conveyance roller LT feed drive MC MC101 po Separation roller Pick roller Feed roller 4 HCl overview ENWW Stacked paper up down wire drive section Q3637A Up down plate LT up down motor M100 ENWW Drive system drawing 5 HCI overview 03638A Up down plate i i ger TI ki LT up down moto x M100 a lt P lt gt gt N 6 HCl overview HCI unit explanation Paper feed Section csere ir AA 8 COMPOSITION maaga NG aran its NAN NA PAA AGA Renee 8 Meghanism8 unan ira ade cae adele kka AN 8 First paper feed control ooocccccccoo eee 10 Up down plate drive control 00 000 cece eee 12 Remaining paper detection no paper detection control 13 ENWW 7 HCI unit explanation Paper feed section Composition Note LT feed MC MC101 LT paper LT first paper feed MC MC102 feed motor M101 S N A Up down wire LT up down motor NG Remaining paper detection gear M100 Mechanisms Mechanism Method Paper lifting 1 Wire drive Paper feed Pick roller No paper detection Pho
2. otherwise you may be Use care after opening the injured paper exit outlet DO NOT put your hand into it otherwise you may be injured CAUTION You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to avoid CAUTION Do not remove caution labels If any caution label has come off or is soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read contact our service office 20 Safety ENWW Scanner section gt PS lt ZNWARNING Unplug the machine before removing platen glass NDANGER Debrancher le copieur avant de retirer la vitre d exposition A WARNUNG Vor Entfernen des Vorlagenglases Netzstecker ziehen ADVERTENCIA Desenchufe la m quina antes de quitar el vidrio A AVVERTIMENTO Estrarre la spina dalla presa prima di rimuovere il vetro di esposizione R INISIELE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM jo x HT HALE 92 UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG Buch EAN AGDECKUNG GEO MINT DEM STRAHLAUSSETZ O DANGER ER TIRMSEL FNHERT PE Mit TORS DE Some od Laurer LexP s rion pIRECTE CRUECTERU A WARNING E the machine before removing ES ADANGER Dobra avant de retirer les AN A WARNUNG Vor Abnahme dat Schutzverkleidung A ADVERTENCIA Hrn la m quina antes de quitar NAVVERTIMENTO FH
3. Punch scraps box Punch scraps box set PS PS804 Mechanisms Mechanism Method Alarm clear 1 Punch waste box 4 Alarm clear Punch waste are collected in the punch waste box When the punch waste box is full or it is removed the related message appears on the control panel of the MFP To remove the punch waste box open the front door of the finisher and pull forward Punch scraps box 16 Punch kit unit explanation ENWW Punch waste conveyance control PS802 5V PS802 IN P gt 9802 PS802 SG PS804 IN PS804 SG I 1 i PS804 5V Li I 1 l Punch waste are collected in the punch waste box Related signals are PS802 punch waste full and PS804 punch waste box set 1 Operation a Punch waste full detection PS802 punch waste full detects whether the punch waste box is full When the punch waste box becomes full PS802 turns on to send the punch waste full signal to the MFP Upon receipt of this signal the MFP displays a related message on the control panel b Punch waste box detection PS804 punch waste box set detects whether the punch waste box is attached If the punch waste box is not attached PS804 turns off to send the punch waste box not attached signal to the MFP Upon receipt of this signal the MFP displays a related message on the
4. 3 Remove the hinge mounting plate rear side from the scanner unit 12 screws 4 Remove four screws from the scanner motor M11 then remove the scanner belt and the scanner motor 5 Install the scanner motor M11 and the scanner belt Tighten the scanner motor loosely with four screws 148 MFP disassembly assembly Pulley ENWW 6 Hook the spring scale on the upper hole of 8 Insert the connector to the scanner motor the scanner motor M11 M11 Spring scale 9 Follow the disassembly procedures in reverse order to install Upper hole 7 Pull the spring scale upward until a tension of 2 0 2 kg is indicated Tighten the four screws CAUTION Make sure that the scanner motor moves up and down when confirming the tension pressure Spring scale Scanner motor M11 Screws ENWW Scanner section 149 MFP disassembly assembly Laser scanner unit Removing and reinstalling the laser scanner assembly CAUTION Each inline connector consists of two male sides WARNING Do not energize the and one female side Be sure to remove only the male side shown below of the CN338 connector laser scanner assembly when itis not in the correct position Never remove the laser scanner assembly cover and the polygon unit cover Never look directly into the laser beam It can cause blindness Never remove the laser scanner asse
5. lu TN u ADU stand drawing lever 4 Toreinstallthe ADU stand push in the ADU stand and then turn the ADU stand pulling lever upright Cleaning the paper dust removing brush CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull out the ADU stand from the MFP 2 Release the left and right lock levers lift the brush handles by the handles to remove the paper dust removing brush ENWW Cleaning the paper mis centering Brush handles PS PS70 leading edge PS PS43 Lock lever WARNING The interlock which is turned off when the front right or left door opens or closes should never be turned on forcibly with the Projections ADU stand pulled out Lock lever De Sean parta U paporaust CAUTION Besuretneponercordhas oo wall outlet ZB FA Procedure 1 Pull out the ADU stand from the MFP 2 Open the pre transfer jam handler Clean Positioning holes the sensor of the paper mis centering PS PS70 and leading edge PS PS43 at the rear of the pre transfer jam handler using a drum cleaner or cleaning pad 3 Using a blower brush clean the paper dust removing brush Paper dust removing brush PS PS43 Paper mis centering PS PS70 Cleaning area 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse Pre transfer jam handler CAUTION When installing align the projection on th
6. 00000 e eee eee eee BA AA APA Removing and reinstalling the drum unit Installing the coupling cece eee eee Removing cleaning and reinstalling the drum Removing and reinstalling the separation claws and separation claw solenoid aa pl ee ng nenn Removing and reinstalling the toner control sensor board Corona Ulloa id an eawene ate Screws that must not be removed a Removing and reinstalling the charging corona unit Removing and reinstalling the charge control plate Replacing the charging wires arauan Removing and reinstalling the charging wire cleaning unit Removing and reinstalling the PCL 2 2 c2eeeenen Cleaning the charging corona unit PCL 2 05 Removing and reinstalling the transfer separation corona unit Removing and reinstalling the plunger prevention plate Replacing the transfer separation wires and transfer separation wire cleaning block 000 cee eee eee eee Removing and reinstalling the TSL unit 129 MFP disassembly assembly 130 Developing unit a eb oe AR ea ea a Pesce ese AD Le Ae 166 Screws that must not be removed 0 000000 e eee 166 Removing and reinstalling the developing unit 166 Replacing the developer cee eee ee eee eae 167 Cleaning the develo
7. 67 Dot diameter correction control 68 Toner density control 69 FM4 developing suction control 69 Toner supply unit n seen 70 Composition 2 22 22 70 Mechanisms 00005 70 Toner level detection control 71 M12 toner supply control 72 Cleaning toner recycle unit 73 Composition a 73 Mechanisms a 73 Toner guide roller TGR control 74 Other control 74 Tray 2 3 paper feed unit 15 Composition 00005 75 Mechanisms 00 00005 75 First paper feed control 77 Paper up drive control 79 Paper size detection control 80 No paper detection control 81 Tray 4 paper feed unit 82 Composition 2 22 22 82 Mechanisms 00005 82 First paper feed control 84 Paper up drive control 86 Paper size detection control 87 No paper detection control 87 Tray 1 bypass tray 89 Composition 2 2 2222 89 Mechanisms 0 00005 89 First paper feed control 90 Paper up down control 90 Paper size detection control 91 No paper detection control 92 Vertical conveyance section 93 Composition 2 22 22 93 Mechanis
8. HCI overview Q3637A Q3638A product specifications Type Side mount type large volume paper feed tray Functions Standard size paper Q3637A e Metric area A4 B5 letter Wide paper 314 mm by 223 mm maximum Inch area letter A4 Wide paper 314 mm by 223 mm maximum Q3638A Metric area A3 B4 A4 A4R F4 Wide paper 314 mm by 459 mm maximum Inch area ledger legal letter letter R Wide paper 314 mm by 459 mm maximum Maximum quantity 4000 sheets 80 g m or 20 Ib Machine data Power source 24V DC 5V supplied from the MFP AC27 3V Maximum power consumption Q3637A maximum 82 W Q3638A maximum 100 W Weight Q3637A approximately 30 kg Q3638A approximately 42 kg 2 HCl overview Machine dimensions Q3637A 430 W by 639 D by 690 H mm Q3638A 670 W by 639 D by 695 H mm Maintenance Maintenance Same as the MFP Machine life Same as the MFP Operating environment Temperature 10 C to 30 C 50 F to 86 F Humidity 10 percent to 80 percent RH Note The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice ENWW Center cross sectional drawing Note In the following drawings LT refers to the high capacity input HCI Feed roller Conveyance roller Pick roller Top cover Up down wire the other side wire as well Separation rollers Up down plate
9. Separation roller Tray 2 3 e Drive belt O Nor Vertical conveyance MC 1 MC11 Vertical conveyance roller upper Vertical conveyance MC 2 MC 12 Vertical conveyance roller middle Paper feed motor M1 oy Up down plate Tray up drive motor 1 M16 Tray up drive motor 2 M17 Tray up drive motor 3 M18 30 MFP overview ENWW Tray 1 paper feed automatic duplex unit ADU pre registration drive section Pick roller Feed roller Loop roller ADU pre registration roller Loop roller motor M6 Up down motor BP M20 ENWW Paper up down plate Drive system diagram 31 MFP overview Charging and transfer separation wire cleaning drive section Charging corona unit amp O Charging cleaning motor M14 Transfer and separation corona unit E gt os on Transfer separation cleaning motor M10 32 MFP overview ENWW Automatic Duplex Unit ADU conveyance drive section Registration roller Pre transfer roller AR ADU conveyance roller 4 l pi k j E Registration roller knob ADU reverse roller ADU conveyance MC MC13 ADU reverse motor M9 Reverse exit motor M8 FRONT Reverse exit roller knob E
10. hp LaserJet 9055 mfp hp LaserJet 9065 mfp hp LaserJet 9055mfp Q3631A hp LaserJet 9065mfp Q3632A service manual Copyright Information 2003 Copyright Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein Part number Q3631 90908 Edition 1 11 2003 Trademark Credits Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Contents 1 How to use this manual Manual contents 222222 2 Manual organization 2 2 Safety Safety and important warning items 4 Important notices 4 Description items for Warning Caution and Note cc deme ees sees 4 Safety warnings a 5 Modifications not authorized by hp 5 Power supply nennen 7 Installation requirements 10 Measures to take in case of an accident 15 Eoncl sion isses bas Soke et dos 15 Regulatory statements
11. 182 Wire lengths 22 222222 183 Installing wires 184 ayaan farts A er 185 Removing and reinstalling Tray 1 185 Replacing the paper pick roller paper pick roller rubber 185 Replacing the separation roller rubber 186 Vertical conveyance section 187 Removing and reinstalling the vertical conveyance section 187 Removing and reinstalling the vertical conveyance MC MC11 MC12 187 ADF UNII ak ee 188 Pulling out and reinstalling the ADU Cleaning the paper mis centering PS PS70 leading edge PS PS43 189 Removing and reinstalling the registration MC MC1 190 Removing and reinstalling the second paper feed unit registration assembly 191 Cleaning the registration PS PS44 192 Removing and reinstalling the registration roller 193 Removing and reinstalling the pre transfer roller 194 Cleaning the automatic document feeder paper reverse PS PS45 Reverse Exit PS PS46 195 Removing and reinstalling the ADF reverse roller 198 Removing and reinstalling the ADU standi us enge 199 Removing and reinstalling the pre registration roller 201 Removing and reinstalling the ADU conveyance roller 3 and4 202 Removing and reinstalling the ADU conveyance roller 1 and2 205 Removing and reinstalling the paper reverse exit
12. 3 Remove the front and rear wires according to steps 1 to 7 below 176 MFP disassembly assembly ENWW 2 4 Remove the E ring to detach the wire restraining cover and pulley Wire restraining cover 5 Remove wire Up down plate Wire B white T Repeat steps 2 to 5 to remove wire A and wire B ENWW 1 Remove the E ring to slide out the drive pulley Wire D Wire C Y white black Drive pulley 12 Wire D Wire C white Na Y black a 6 Remove drive pulley holder and E ring and pull out the drive pulley Wire B Wire A white black x Orte pulley holder Wire A black S SO E ring Drive pulley Paper feed units of Trays2 and3 177 MFP disassembly assembly Wire lengths 182 841 mm Tray 1 2 Wire A C i 473 141 mm Tray 1 2 gt Wire B D Installing wires 4 install the pulley pass 2 Install the pulley pass 5 install the wires C and D from wire D through the pulley wires C and D and install inside the drive shaft hole push in and install the wire the Wire restraining Cover the drive pulley and secure with restraining cover and and retaining ring Wire D E ring E ring must be inside Wires must not cross Wire restraining cover Wire D q white Wire C L Ng black aCe Wire D un N A white N Pi black 3 Pass wire C through the up down plate Install the wi
13. 4 Jam removal When a jam occurs in the conveyance section open the front door turn the conveyance roller open the guide plates and remove the jammed paper When a jam occurs in the stacker section open the front door draw out the stacker section rotate the folding roller open the guide plates and remove the jammed paper 22 Finisher unit explanation Top cover 1 PA Top cover 2 PB wa Side cover iA Front door ENWW ENWW External section 23 nit explanation nisher u Conveyance section Composition Paper exit opening unit Main tray paper exit PS NT Main tray paper exit roller Mechanism Shift roller Upper tray full PS P5719 Shift unit Upper tray paper exit PS PS701 Mechanism Method Gate switching 1 Driven by the stepping motor cam bypass gate 2 Solenoids Shift mechanism of the shift unit 3 Crank mechanism Open close of paper exit opening 4 Crank mechanism paper exit opening nip 5 Pressure rollers driven by solenoid 24 Finisher unit explanation 4 PI conveyance roller Gate Entrance roller N FNS entrance PS 1 Ps7oa Gi SS Conveyance roller A Conveyance roller B By pass gate Intermediate conveyance roller Conveyance section Gate switching The two gat
14. 8 Post insertion unit explanation ENWW Paper feed unit Composition Feed roller Sheet feed SD U SD201 Conveyance MC U MC201 Pick roller Width regulation plate Up down plate U Separation roller PA Tray up down motor U Vi O a 7 M201 LO Width regulation plate Conveyance roller n o Conveyance MC L N MC202 Te OY i se Registration MC MC203 Feed roller A AD K Up down plate L Conveyance roller Lao PL conveyance motor M203 Tray up down motor L M202 Separation roller Sheet feed SD L SD202 Feed roller Sheet feed SD U L SD201 SD202 Pick roller Mechanisms Mechanism Method Pickup section Upward feeding method Oscillated pick roller paper pick roller Sheet feed section Reverse torque limiter method Separation roller Torque limiter Loop formation Thrust method Conveyance rollers U L ENWW Paper feed unit 9 Post insertion unit explanation Feed control MPI_DRV_SEL ___ MP M CONT MPIMFR u MPI SD CONT MPI MC CONT pj M203 P S gt M203 CLK gt gt M203 LD M203 F R MPI_S_IN1_1 e MPI_S_IN2_1 e MPI_S_IN2_2 tr MPI_S_OUT1 1 e MPI_S_OUT4_2 e MPI_S OUT2_1 Tj MP S OUT22 ry PS201 IN e PS206 IN me VR201 IN Le VR202 IN bg M203 P S M203 CLK M203 F R M201 DRV1 M201 DRV2 MC201 24V MC201 DRV MPI_DRV_SEL MPI_M_CONT MPI_M_F R MPI_SD_CONT MPI_MC_CONT M203 P S
15. 10 Loosen the two screws securing the front wire bracket Adjust the height of the front wire bracket to level the up down stay Tighten the four mounting screws on the wire brackets front and rear CAUTION Make sure the up down stay is level Ifthe stay is not level an unnecessary load is put on the tray up down motor or gear which can resultin damage to these components Mounting screws NG Wire bracket a ne Up down stay Nga 11 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Main tray section 73 Finisher disassembly assembly Stacker section Removing and reinstalling the stacker unit cover CAUTION Make sure that the power cord of the MFP is unplugged from the power outlet Procedure 1 Open the front door 2 Remove five screws to detach the stacker unit cover LI tacker unit Fa C YN Y NG Y Screws 3 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse 74 Finisher disassembly assembly Removing and reinstalling the stacker unit WARNING HP recommends that at least two people perform this service CAUTION Make sure that the power cord of the MFP is unplugged from the power outlet WARNING Be careful when detaching the stacker unit If you remove the stopper and in succession pull out the stacker u
16. 12 ADF unit explanation Original feed conveyance scan control Ey poka er poka MS301 FM CONT SIG DF M1 CLK PG DF M1 F R DF_M1_RETURN DF_M2_CLK DF_M2_F R DF_M2_MOI DF_M2_RETURN DF_FAN_CONT DF_FAN_SC_SIG DF_CL_CONT PS301_SIG PS302_SIG PS303_SIG PS304_SIG PS305_SIG PS306_SIG PS307_SIG PS308_SIG PS311_SIG DF_M_RESET 3 3V S G PRCB Original feed is performed by the pick roller and feed roller driven by M301 original feed Original conveyance is performed by the original conveyance roller driven by M302 Original is fed when MS301 cover open close MS and PS311 ADF open close PS are turned on ENWW Each of these features is controlled by PRCB printer control board and driven by SCDB scanner drive board 1 Operation a Pressing original against roller and pre feeding original 1 Pre feeding the first sheet of original By pressing the START button M301 original feed rotates backwards at high speed MC301 original feed MC is on to raise the original pressing plate Since M301 rotates backward at high speed the original feed starts by the action of the pick roller and the feed roller M301 stops when a specified time has passed after the original has turned PS304 original registration PS 1 on 2 Pre feeding the second and subsequent originals When the currently scanned original is conveyed and PS304 original registration 1 turns off during the single
17. ENWW Scanner section Screws that must not be removed 14 screws securing the CCD unit Screws that must not be removed Screws that must not be removed Screws that must not be removed Read position adjusting plate screw 1 each Read position adjusting plate left rear Screws that must not be removed Screws that must not be removed A lt Read position adjusting plate right rear Screws that must not be removed Read position adjusting plate left front ENWW Removing and reinstalling the CCD unit CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Be sure to adjust the image after installing the CCD unit When disconnecting or reconnecting connectors from to the AD converter board be careful not to place any stress on the board Procedure 1 Remove the right side cover top left side cover original stopper plates left and rear scanner glass and top cover right left front center and rear center See External section on page 132 2 Remove eleven screws to remove the lens light blocking cover Screws 11 IT ens light blocking cover Scanner section 141 MFP disassembly assembly 3 Remove the connector CN170 from the A D converter board ADB Connector CN170 A D converter board ADB 4 Remove two screws to remove
18. Separation AC DC corona discharge Discharging wire Oxide film tungsten 0 06 mm dia with automatic wire cleaner 58 MFP unit explanation lt Transfer and separation corona unit Transfer entrance Guide rollers uide plate Transfer corona wire Separation corona wire Plunging prevention plate front Charging control C CONT EM C SIG CHARGING The current output to the charging wire and the voltage applied to the grid are supplied from HV high voltage unit and they are controlled by PRCB printer control board The levels of outputs to these are transmitted using 8 bit serial data This serial data includes the level information for all outputs driven by HV excluding the ON OFF control signal Accordingly a separate signal line is provided to turn on off only the charging wire output and the grid output at the same time ENWW 1 Operation a Charging A Scorotron charging method is used 24 VDC supplied from DCPS is raised to a negative DC voltage which is then discharged after being applied to the charging wire Charge output range 600 uA to 1200 uA b Grid voltage The grid voltage is output from HV to the charging plate Grid voltage output range 500 V to 1000 V 2 Signals a Input signal 1 EM C SIG HV to PRCB This signal indicates the leak or short state of the charging corona unit L Normal H Abnormal b Output signals 1 C CON
19. 1 When the PI control panel s START button turns on M202 tray up down L is driven in forward which lifts the up down plate L until PS209 tray upper limit L is activated 2 Concurrently while M203 PI conveyance is driven at low speed SD202 sheet feed L and MC202 conveyance L comes on and all sheets set in the up down plate L fed into the finisher stacker 3 The finisher carries out the required finishing processes stapling tri folding etc 4 PS207 no sheet L comes off M202 tray up down L is driven in reverse which lowers the sheet tray until PS210 tray lower limit L is activated Paper feed unit 11 Post insertion unit explanation MC202 PS210 conveyance L tray lower limit L M203 PI conveyance PS207 no sheet L Up down plate L M202 tray up down L sheet feed L PS209 tray upper limit L c Sheet conveyance When the sheet fed from the paper feed unit at low speed turns PS201 PS206 PI passage U L on M203 PI conveyance changes its rotating speed to high speed At this time as MC203 registration turns off the sheet is pressed against the conveyance rollers U L to form a loop MC203 turns on when a specified time has passed since PS201 PS206 turned on and the drive force of M203 is transmitted to the conveyance rollers U L This causes the sheet whose bend is corrected by loop formation to be conveyed into finisher When the sheet turns PS206 off MC203
20. 2 position flat Scan server SD solenoid Send store SL solenoid Semiconductor laser Laser diode Shaft holder Bushing Slit glass ADF glass Start copy print Start Stitch and fold Staple and fold Stop ring Snap ring Stop Scan Stop Sub switch SW2 Secondary power switch SW2 Sub tray Paper exit tray Three fold Tri fold To and fro Back and forth Toner cartridge Toner bottle Total counter odometer mechanical counter or paper exit counter Touch screen Touch display Transparent film Transparency OHT 230 Terminology cross reference ENWW Copy industry terminology HP terminology Upper bin Paper exit tray Upper unit release lever post insertion kit Release lever Worktable Shelf Write unit Laser scanner assembly IF or R Front or Rear JU or IL Upper or Lower ENWW Terminology cross reference for the MFP 231 Terminology cross reference 232 Terminology cross reference ENWW Index A accidents handling 15 ADF glass 147 ADF paper conveyance control 108 ADF paper feed control 108 ADF paper reverse PS PS45 195 ADF reverse roller 198 ADF Reverse Exit PS PS46 195 ADF unit 188 ADU conveyance drive section diagram 33 ADU conveyance roller 1 and 2 205 ADU conveyance roller 3 and 4 202 ADU pre registration drive section diagram 31 ADU stand 188 199 ADU unit 95 AE contro
21. 24 HCI disassembly assembly Up down plate 1 Insert wire A in 6 the up down shaft attach pulleys then pull the wire from under the pulleys Insert wire B in the up down shaft attach a pulley and secure the pulley with E rings Pull wire B from under the pulleys 20 Insert wire B in the pulleys then attach a metal ball 2 Insert wire A in the pulleys then attach a metal ball 17 Insert wire D in the pulleys then attach a metal ball 5 Insert wire B in the pulleys then attach a metal ball 18 Insert wire C in the up down shaft attach a pulley and secure the pulley with an E ring Wind wire C around the pulley by 6 turns in such a manner that the wire can be pulled from over the pulley SL at urns Insert wire D in the up down shaft attach a pulley and wind wire D around the pulley by six turns in such a manner that the wire can be pulled from over the pulley SL eis ENWW 12 After installing the up down wires make sure the up down wires are passed in the grooves in the pulleys properly and wires do not run on the sides of the pulleys Also make sure the up down plate can be moved up and down smoothly by hand CAUTION If the up down plate does not move up and down smoothly reinstall the up down wires 13 Install the up down wire drive motor assembly up down gear and relay connectors following the remov
22. ENWW Cleaning the cleaning pad CAUTION Make sure the power cord of the main unit has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Open the jam access cover 2 Remove one screw to detach the cleaning pad 3 Using a blower brush clean the cleaning pad Cleaning pad Registration idler roller 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Replacing the separation roller separation roller rubber CAUTION Make sure the power cord of the main unit has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Open the jam access cover 2 Open the retaining clip and remove the separation roller 3 Remove the separation roller rubber from the separation roller Jam access cover Separation roller rubber Separation roller N 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal procedure in reverse CAUTION Make sure that the separation roller is installed in the correct direction Original feed conveyance exit section 27 ADF disassembly assembly 28 ADF disassembly assembly ENWW Index A ADF reinstalling 24 removing 22 Cc center cross sectional drawing 4 cleaning pad 27 conveyance roller rubber 26 curling originals 2 D dimensions machine 3 double side original copy mode 7 drive system diagram 5 E environment operating 3 external section removing and reinstalling 22 theory of operation 10 F feed layout originals 2 H humidity 3
23. Paper feed drive section Stacked paper up down wire drive SECOM ee anaiai d aian aa i 2 HCI unit explanation Paper feed section 5 Composition ooooooo oo o Mechanisms a First paper feed control Up down plate drive control Remaining paper detection no paper detection control 3 HCI disassembly assembly Explanation eee eee Paper feed section Cleaning the paper dust removing eli APA Cleaning the HCI feed PS PS106 HCI first paper feed PS PS107 Removing and reinstalling the pick roller unit 2222 22222222 Replacing the pick roller rubber feed roller rubber Replacing the separation roller rubber Replacing the HCI feed MC MC101 HCI first paper feed MC MC102 Replacing the Q3637A up down wires Replacing the Q3638A up down wires Index ENWW 17 17 18 19 20 21 25 Contents iv Contents ENWW ENWW HCI overview Q3637A Q3638A product specifications oooooooooooooooo FUNCIONS aia ero diia Machine data Ta ocio it eo ta eh M inten nce saie ie anne A AG NG ne es Operating environment e eee Center cross sectional drawing eee Drive system drawing 000 eee eee Paper feed drive section cee eee tee Stacked paper up down wire drive section
24. Removing and reinstalling Tray 1 CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Remove the developing suction filter cover and right side cover upper See External section on page 132 2 Remove connector CN214 3 Remove four screws to remove Tray 1 Screws 2 By pass feed tray Connector CN214 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse Replacing the paper pick roller paper pick roller rubber Procedure 1 Remove Tray 1 2 Remove the snap ring and bearing and pull out the shaft from the paper pick roller ENWW 3 Remove the two bearings and one gear and remove the paper pick roller rubber from the paper pick roller Paint mark Shaft Feed roller rubber Feed roller f cp Gear Va Bearing Feed roller assembly Snap ring Bearing 4 Remove the snap ring from the paper pick roller assembly to pull out the shaft and remove the paper pick roller rubber from the paper pick roller Shaft Pick roller A O 2 Pick roller rubber Tray 1 185 MFP disassembly assembly 5 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION Check that the orientation of the roller is correct when installing Check that no grease or the like remains on the roller Replacing the separation roller rubber Procedure 1 Remove Tray 1 and place the tray upside down 2 Remove
25. b LCD indicator board control 1 LCD indicator board display operation The LCD image control board displays various information according to the 4 bit parallel data from ICB image control board via OB1 operation board 1 2 Backlight ON operation The LCD indicator board has a backlight cold cathode tube to facilitate viewing The backlight is driven by OB INVB OB inverter and controlled by the OB1 operation board 1 3 PAKB panel key board control The LCD indicator board has PAKB panel key board to allow you to select an item displayed on the LCD directly PAKB is controlled by OB1 operation board 1 2 Signals a Input signals 1 S_IN2 OB1 to ICB Serial data which informs ICB image control board of the operation state of OB1 operation board 1 2 CTS2 OB1 to ICB Signal which indicates that data can be sent from OB1 operation board 1 to ICB image control board When this signal is at the high level H ICB stops sending the S_OUT2 signal 3 DSR2 OB1 to ICB Acknowledgment signal which is returned each time OB1 operation board 1 receives one byte data from ICB image control board ENWW b Output signals 1S OUT2 ICB to OB1 Serial data which informs OB1 operation board 1 of the machine status that is known to ICB image control board 2 RTS2 ICB to OB1 Signal which indicates that data can be sent from ICB image control board to OB1 opera
26. 12 Release the metal ball to remove wire B 6 Remove the E ring 8 Remove the pulley 10 Remove the pulley 11 Remove the E ring then remove the pulley to release wire B 13 Remove the pulley to release wire A ENWW So QU SF Up down shaft N y lt y 2 Release the metal ball to remove wire C 18 Release the metal ball to remove wire A 4 Release the metal ball to remove wire D 16 Release the metal ball to remove wire Wire C bs 1 Remove the E ring 3 Remove the pulley 5 Remove the pulley 15 Remove the E ring then remove the pulley to release wire B 17 Remove the pulley to release wire A Paper feed section 23 HCI disassembly assembly Installing the up down wires 7 Insert wire A in the pulleys then attach a metal ball Insert wire C in the pulleys then attach a metal ball Insert wire D in the pulleys then attach a metal ball Insert wire B in the pulleys then attach a metal ball Insert wire C in the up down shaft attach a pulley and secure the pulley with an E ring Wind wire C around the pulley by 6 turns in such a manner that the wire can be pulled from over the pulley sk D DA Insert wire D in the up down shaft attach a pulley and wind wire D around the pulley by six turns in such a manner that the wire can be pulled from over the pulley K YE
27. Stapler F i i Ground Connector Screw securing the ground cable CN181 5 Remove two screws holding the sensor cover of the stapler R Remove the screw securing the ground cable Detach the connector CN182 of the stapler rotation hp PS PS713 Stapler R TU Connector O VTA CN 182 Ground Screw securing the Stapler rotation ground terminal HP PS PS713 Screw ENWW 6 Remove four screws Detach the stapler R and the connector CN180 CAUTION Take care not to damage the stapler rotation hp PS PS713 when removing the stapler R Connector CN180 Stapler rotation HP PS PS713 Screw 7 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION When installing the sensor cover of the stapler R take care thatthe bundled cable does not disturb the stapler rotation HPPS PS713 and is not nipped by the gears Stapler section 79 Finisher disassembly assembly 80 Finisher disassembly assembly ENWW Index A alignment L M716 control 43 alignment U M705 control 42 B booklet mode paper stacking capacity 3 specifications 4 theory of operation 18 booklet paper exit opening cover 66 booklet tray 62 bypass gate SD705 control 29 C clincher 77 conveyance section removing and reinstalling 67 theory of operation 24 cross section diagram 6 curling paper 3 D dimensions machine 4 drive system diagram 7 E environment operating
28. 2 Maintenance 0 0000 3 Operating environment 3 Center cross section 3 Drive system diagram 222222220 4 Feeding process 22222222 een 5 Automatic sheet feeding online operation 20005 5 Manual sheet feeding offline operation 5 2 Post insertion unit explanation External section 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 cee eee 8 Mechanisms 2 eee 8 Interlock CONtrol 8 Paper feed unit 20 0000005 9 Composition 22 222er nen 9 Mechanisms 2 2 a 9 Feed Control si iced cae use 10 3 Post insertion disassembly assembly External section 2 2222222 18 Removing reinstalling the external COVETS cier a Ba aa ieee ater or 18 Paper feed unit aana 19 Replacing the paper pick roller and ere APA 19 Replacing the double feed prevent roller and torque limiter 20 Index ENWW Contents ENWW ENWW Post insertion Overview Post insertion kit Q3636A product specifications Type Functions Copy paper Power weight dimensions Maintenance Operating environment 00 c eee Center cross section Drive system diagram Feeding process Automatic sheet feeding online operation Manual sheet feeding offline operation Post insertion overview Post
29. 4 SCAN CUR1 to 3 PRCB to SCDB 2 Operation without AE M11 scanner energize current PS61 Platen APS switchover signals read position Exposure scanning i i Home position search c SCDB output signals Y 1 U V W SCDB to M11 TN a correction M11 scanner drive control signals econ white correction These signals are used to control rotation of M11 scanner By supplying and stopping clock pulses the motor is turned on off and the rotational direction is switched Exposure scanning Home position search 2 Signals a Input signals 1 SIG SCANHP PS PS61 to SCDB to PRCB Scanner home position detection signal The reference position of the home position of the exposure unit is detected L The exposure unit is detected H The exposure unit is not detected ENWW Scanner section 47 MFP unit explanation Exposure control EXP_CONT E L1 INVB L1 exposure lamp is driven by L1 INVB L1 inverter and is controlled by PRCB printer control board via SCDB scanner drive board 1 Operation L1 exposure lamp is a xenon lamp driven by the inverter circuit The xenon lamp can emit a constant light intensity and generates less heat than other lamps so it does not require the light intensity control circuit that has been used in the existing machines requiring no thermal protector circuit However since L1 is held lit when the exposure unit is stationary in t
30. Automatic document bottom plate assembly feeder guide cover 11 Clean the ADU paper reverse PS PS45 and reverse exit PS PS46 with a blower brush Reverse exit PS PS46 Automatic document feeder paper reverse PS PS45 12 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ADF unit 197 MFP disassembly assembly Removing and reinstalling the ADF reverse roller WARNING The interlock which is turned off when the front right or left door opens or closes should never be turned on forcibly with the ADU stand pulled out CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull out the ADU stand from the MFP 2 Remove the fuser See Fuser on page 208 3 Remove the ADU cover 4 Remove the ADU guide cover 5 Remove the screw to remove two wiring harnesses 6 Remove E ring 1 to remove the paper eject reverse gear 1 and pin 7 Remove E ring 2 to remove the rear side bearing 8 Remove E ring 3 to remove the front side bearing 198 MFP disassembly assembly 9 Slide the ADU reverse roller to the upper side and then to the lower side to slide it out Paper exit reverse gear 1 Wiring harnesses 0000 Do Automatic document 5 feeder reverse roller w T Bearing 10 Reinstall the above part
31. FM4 Developing suction fan GG Duct Lower side of developing unit TINGING FM5 Cleaner cooling fan FM3 Conveyance suction fan a ja lt FRONT 5 FIXFAN2_EM FM7 to PRCB FM7 paper exit R abnormality detection signal L FM7 is normal H FM7 is abnormal 6 FIXFAN1_EM FM8 to PRCB FM8 main cooling 2 abnormality detection signal L FM8 is normal H FM8 is abnormal 7 EM FM9 to SCDB FM9 scanner cooling abnormality detection signal L FM9 is normal H FM9 is abnormal 8 ADUFAN_EM 1 FM10 to PRCB FM10 ADU reverse motor cooling abnormality detection signal L FM10 is normal H FM10 is abnormal ENWW 9 FAN2 FM13 to PRCB FM13 power supply cooling abnormality detection signal L FM13 is normal H FM13 is abnormal 10SCANFAN_EM SCDB to PRCB FM9 scanner cooling abnormality detection signal L FM9 is normal H FM9 is abnormal b Output signals 1 MAINFAN_D PRCB to FM1 FM1 MFP cooling 1 ON OFF control signal L FM1 on H FM1 off 2 MAINFAN_HL_20 PRCB to FM1 FM1 MFP cooling 1 rotational speed control signal L Low speed H High speed 3 WRFAN1 D PRCB to FM2 FM2 writing section cooling ON OFF control signal L FM2 on H FM2 off 4 WRFAN1 HL PRCB to FM2 FM2 laser scanner unit cooling rotational speed control signal L Low speed H High speed 5 CLNFAN D PRCB to FM5 FM5 cleaner cooling ON OFF control signal
32. High pressure is applied to the toner guide roller TGR to enhance the toner cleaning ability Toner recycle When the drum performs preliminary rotation as warm up toner recycle MC Toner guide roller TGR MC14 is turned off stopping the drive ENWW Cleaning toner recycle unit 73 MFP unit explanation Toner guide roller TGR control TGR MS1 MS2 OO To enhance the toner cleaning ability voltage is applied to the TGR toner guide roller This voltage is applied by HV high voltage unit under the control of PRCB printer control board The output level of the applied voltage is transmitted using 8 bit serial data This serial data includes the level information for all outputs driven by the HV unit excluding the ON OFF control signal Accordingly a separate signal line is provided to turn on off only the TGR 1 Operation a ON OFF timing The TGR is turned on off in sync with M2 drum b TGR toner guide roller output range 0 to 50 uA 2 Signals a Output signal 1 TGR CONT PRCB to HV TGR toner guide roller voltage ON OFF control signal L Voltage is applied H Voltage is not applied 74 MEP unit explanation Other control To improve durability of the cleaning blade the following control is performed 1 Blade setting mode A blade setting mode is available in the 36 mode This mode will perform a task that is required after blade replacement during maintenance and so forth Whe
33. L CCW H CW ENWW 4 M718 CONT finisher CB to RB Signal to activate or deactivate the M718 L M718 on H M718 off c RB output signals 1 M718 DRV A A RB to M718 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase A of M718 2 M718 DRV B B RB to M718 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase B of M718 Stacker section 45 Finisher unit explanation M713 stacker entrance control 24V Pe ZT M713 CLK M713 RESET M713 CONT MAIN BODY ENS CB M713 stacker entrance drives the stacker entrance roller and the swing belt These components are responsible for conveying the paper to the stacker aligning the paper rear end and controlling the timing for stapling The finisher CB finisher control board controls the operation of M713 through the RB relay board The related signals are PS704 finisher entrance PS705 stacker entrance and PS725 folding paper exit 1 Operation a Staple mode for sheets of all paper sizes except A4 B5 and 8 5 by 11 without bypass feature The finisher operation signal from the MFP lets M713 stacker entrance start to rotate at a high speed When PS705 stacker entrance has detected the rear end of the paper the rotation speed of M713 changes to low conveying the paper slowly to the stacker Then after a predefined time 46 Finisher unit explanation PS705 IN PS725 IN PS704 IN GND M713 DRVA M713 DRVA M713 DRV B M713 DRV B 5V PS7
34. M15 polygon control ooo 53 Image write control 1 2 0 0 00 0c 53 OGRA ase tte nG sche nea nee ag Nana 56 COMPOSITION 2 on Sider aw het ala ted ed 56 Mechans MS seneni 4398er 56 Separation claw control 0 0000 e eee tee 57 Paper guide plate control n anana 0000 e eee eee 57 Corona unit section saa ea ris k eae aa aSa eee 58 Gomposition ma a ka ag ar a KG ede a 58 Mech nismS coros nda near ae 58 Charging Controls sise asse as a 2a ehe 58 Transfer separation control 0c eee eee 59 M14 charger cleaning control seen nn 60 M10 transfer separation cleaning control 61 PGLFTSE CONTIOI ovas Kna AG alee nett ky eel BELA 62 37 MFP unit explanation 38 Bevel pingiunit 2m aaa ae ace ae ea 63 Composition s Taai ee deve rest 63 Mech nisms u ee halen patie ed ale ehe pe nee 63 M3 developing control 0 0000 cee 63 Developing bias control 0 0000 ccs 64 Dmax maximum contrast control 22 2222er 65 Gradation correction control cece eee ee 67 Dot diameter correction control 0 00 00 eee eee 68 Toner density control 00 cece 69 FM4 developing suction control 0 cee eee eee 69 Toner SUPPLY UNIE aan nee a apart oer an Dane aes Alan 70 COMPOSITION ns kakaalam ersehen dae ees 70 Mechanisms oradada cvs wen ah eee 70 Toner level detection control 2 0 0 0 00 71 M12 toner supp
35. M203 CLK M203 LD M203 F R SD201 24V SD201 DRV PS201 5V PS201 IN PS201 SG PS202 5V PS202 IN PS202 SG MPLS IN1 1 MPLS IN2 1 MPI_S_IN2_2 MPI_S_OUT1_1 MPI_S_OUT1_2 MPI_S_OUT2_1 MPI_S_OUT2_2 PS201 IN PS206 IN VR201 IN VR202 IN PS203 5V PS203 IN PS203 SG PS204 5V PS204 IN PS204 SG MC203 MC203 24V gt MC203 DRV 10 Post insertion unit explanation PS205 5V PS205 IN PS205 SG VR201 5V VR201 IN VR201 SG M202 DRV1 M202 DRV2 MC202 24V MC202 DRV SD202 24V SD202 DRV PS206 5V PS206 IN PS206 SG PS209 5V PS209 IN PS209 SG PS210 5V PS210 IN PS210 SG PS207 5V PS207 IN PS207 SG PS208 5V PS208 IN PS208 SG PS212 5V PS212 IN PS212 SG VR202 5V VR202 IN VR202 SG l I I 1 I I I IT ers l I aai I I I Hat APS210 I l I A I I l I l 1 I I T Upper tray MC202 SD202 PS206 PS209 Lower tray PS207 PS208 PS212 ENWW M201 M202 tray up down U L raises the up down plate U L When SD201 SD202 sheet feed U L and MC201 MC202 conveyance U L comes on the drive of M203 PI conveyance is transmitted and the sheets are fed one by one by pick feed and separation rollers MC203 registration controls the drive force transmitted to the conveyance rollers U L which forms a loop for the fed sheet The related signals are PS201 PS206 PI
36. MPC Image control board ICB informs LDB laser driver board of the maximum output value and sets that value for the laser beam emission LDB store this value and maintain the laser beam level using the APC Auto Power Control lt MPC timing gt When SW2 sub power switch is turned on 2 Automatic power control APC After MPC is set the ICB image control board outputs an APC start instruction to LDB laser driver board at the following timing APC timing LDB laser driver board automatically monitor the laser drive current one line at a time and controls it so that the light intensity remains the MPC value 3 Write timing a Main scanning direction Using INDEX signal IND from INDXSB index sensor board the laser write reference position is determined for each scan in the drum rotation direction and the image is written onto the copy paper according to the copy paper position detected by PS70 paper mis centering ENWW b Sub scanning direction Specified interval after PS44 registration detects the leading edge of the copy paper 2 Signals a Input signals 1 IND INDXSB to ICB This is an index signal used to detect deviation of main scanning 2 INDPR INDXSB to ICB This signal monitors the INDXSB index sensor board power supply H Abnormal L Normal 3 ALM1 LDB to ICB This signal indicates the state of the laser 1 drive current H Normal L Abnormal 4
37. Mechanism Method Clincher rotation motor M706 Stapler horizontal Interlocked mechanism by movement 1 stapler and clincher with belt Stapler clincher rotational Stepping motor Ball AX movement 2 locking mechanism a N Stapling 3 Flat clinch Nai gt IR SY 1 Stapler horizontal movement 2 The stapler movement motor M711 drives the timing belts The stapler R is attached to the upper part of one timing belt Also the clincher R is attached to Stapler rotation HP PS the upper part of another timing belt PS713 The stapler F and the clincher F are attached to the lower part of each timing belt Clincher rotation HP PS PS714 Spring Ball Stapler movement HP PS PS711 Stapler var m IM JU i Ar Locked Released 3 Stapling For stapling first the stapler motors R and F M709 and M714 in the staplers R and F push out the paper pressure Stapler movement HP PS PS711 unit to press the paper respectively Then the staples are pushed out Stapler clincher rotational movement Finally the staples are folded inside by the force of the clincher motors R and F M710 and M715 mounted in the clinchers R and F respectively The stapler R and clincher R are rotatable up to 45 degrees for the single staple rear The stapler rotation motor M706 rotates the stapler R The clincher rotation motor M704 rotates the clincher R The ball lock mechanism locks
38. Q3634A Approximately 65 kg External dimensions 656 pi 741 tray extended 656 tray closed 410 990 O SIS AAA IA AAA AAA AA INIA NASA ENWW Maintenance Maintenance procedures Same as the MFP Service life Same as the MFP Operating environment Temperature 10 C to 30 C 50 F to 86 F Humidity 10 percent to 80 percent RH Note The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice ENWW Stapler stacker Q3633A and multifunction finisher Q3634A product specifications 5 Finisher overview Cross section diagram Upper tray Shift unit Paper exit opening unit Main tray Gate Bypass gate Clincher Alignment plate U Flat stapling stopper a Be Booklet stopper Stapler l l l l ea a DIN I Three folding el IE lt oe l stopper l i Ss O i Three folding gate SO pi l l i A N Booklet tray Ng Folding knife l l l i x Alignment plate L l l l l l l I Poo SSeS eee Se ee ee eS le a l Components in the region enclosed by the dotted line represent those of Q3634A l l 6 Finisher overview ENWW Drive system diagram Paper conveyance drive Sub tray paper exit roller Paper exit opening motor M708 Sub tray paper exit motor M721 Shift motor M702 Sub tray conveyance roller Paper exit roll
39. Removing and reinstalling the thermostat U TS1 CAUTION This is an important safety part P N SP00 0020 Be sure to observe the following cautions and steps when removing or reinstalling After reinstalling the thermostat U make sure that its wires do not touch the fusing upper roller ENWW When reinstalling the thermostat U adjust its position using the positioning tool 00M8 1 00 and secure it with screws Be sure to apply screw lock agent to the screws This adjustment should be made in a pressured state Removal procedure 1 Remove the fuser 2 Remove the web cover 3 Remove the cleaning web 4 Remove one screw and two Faston terminals to detach the thermostat U Thermostat U TS1 Reinstallation procedure 1 Connect two Faston terminals to the thermostat U ENWW 2 Set a thermostat positioning tool 00M8 1 00 between the thermostat U and fusing upper roller and secure the thermostat U with one screw so that the distance between the roller and thermostat U is equal to the thickness of the tool Screw Faston terminal Faston terminal Bd Positioning tool 00M8 1 00 Fixing a Sea 3 Set the distance a between the thermostat U and fusing upper roller so that it is equal to the thickness B of the positioning tool Thermostat U TS1 Si Thermostat U TS1 Fixing upper roller Standard value of a 3 75 0 25mm Fuser 219 MFP disassembly assemb
40. Rotating direction signal of M203 L CW H CCW Paper feed unit 13 Post insertion unit explanation 14 23MPI S OUT1 1 finisher CB to PIDB Output selecting signal 1 of PS202 to 205 24MPI S OUT1 2 finisher CB to PIDB Output selecting signal 2 of PS202 to 205 25MPI S OUT2 1 finisher CB to PIDB Output selecting signal 1 of PS207 to 210 PS211 26MPI S OUT2 2 finisher CB to PIDB Output selecting signal 2 of PS207 to 210 PS211 b Output signals 1 M201 DRV1 2 PIDB to M201 Signal for driving M201 2 MC201 DRV PIDB to MC201 Signal for driving MC201 L ON H OFF 3 SD201 DRV PIDB to SD201 Signal for driving SD201 L ON H OFF 4 M202 DRV1 2 PIDB to M202 Signal for driving M202 5 MC202 DRV PIDB to MC202 Signal for driving MC202 L ON H OFF 6 SD202 DRV PIDB to SD202 Signal for driving SD202 L ON H OFF Post insertion unit explanation 7 M203 P S PIDB to M203 Drive control signal of M203 L ON H OFF 8 M203 CLK PIDB to M203 Clock signal for controlling the rotating speed of M203 9 M203 F R Rotating direction signal of M203 L CW H CCW 10M203 LD PIDB to finisher CB Achieves specified speed of M203 L Achieves specified speed H Not achieves specified speed 11MPI S IN1 1 PIDB to finisher CB Detection signal from PS202 to PS205 12MPI S IN2 1 PIDB to finisher CB Detection signal from PS207 PS208 PS209 or P5210 13MPI S IN2 2 PIDB to finisher CB
41. When PS709 paper exit belt HP signal has changed from off to on and a predefined time period has elapsed M707 stops The paper exit arm moves to the staple mode HP When the stapling operation has been completed M707 rotates to drive the paper exit belt of the stacker section This action allows the paper exit arm to lift the paper to the level of the paper exit roller which delivers it to the main tray When PS709 detects the change in signal from off to on M707 stops Conveyance section 31 Finisher unit explanation c Staple mode other than those above The finisher operation signal from the MFP lets M707 paper exit roller rotate When PS709 paper exit belt HP signal has changed from off to on anda predefined time period has elapsed M707 stops The paper exit arm moves to the staple mode HP When paper other than those described above is used the paper exit opening is open The paper exit opening is closed by M708 upon the completion of stapling When PS712 paper exit opening HP detects that the paper exit opening has been closed M707 starts rotating to drive the paper exit arm This allows the paper exit arm to lift the paper to the level of the paper exit roller which delivers it to the main tray When PS709 detects the change in signal from off to on M707 stops d Folding and stitch and fold modes The finisher operation signal from the MFP lets M707 paper exit roller counter rotate When P
42. temperature sensor 2 Fixing temperature sensor 1 Fixing temperature sensor 2 Screws 2 Fixing Fixing temperature SY temperature sensor 1 NA E sensor 2 CN52 CN53 SR Reinstallation procedure 1 Secure fusing temperature sensor 2 to the fusing plate with a screw 2 Make sure that fusing temperature sensor 2 touches the fusing upper roller If they do not touch each other be sure to bring the sensor in contact with the roller Fuser 217 MFP disassembly assembly 3 Set a fusing temperature sensor positioning tool between fusing temperature sensor 1 and fusing upper roller and secure fusing temperature sensor 1 with two screws so that the distance between the sensor and roller is equal to the thickness of the tool Fixing temperature sensor 2 The fixing temperature sensor 2 must contact the fixing upper roller Positioning tool 7050K0010 Fixing temperature sensor 1 218 MFP disassembly assembly 4 Set the distance a between the fusing temperature sensor 1 and fusing upper roller so that it is equal to the thickness of the positioning tool Fixing temperature sensor 1 Fixing upper roller Standard value of a 0 75 0 05mm 5 Apply screw lock agent to the two screws securing fusing temperature sensor 1 6 Secure the wires of fusing temperature sensors 1 and 2 in the wire guides and connect their connectors 7 Reverse the removal procedure to reinstall other parts
43. 10 5 mm adjustable Longitudinal positions of holes Paper center 80 mm i adjustable not adjustable lt Swedish 4 holes gt 10 5 mm adjustable H lt Longitudinal positions of holes Paper center 1 21mm 1 adjustable 2 70mm 2 not 4 adjustable 4 The2 holes type is used in Japan There are five types of punch kit 2 holes inch 2 holes 3 holes 4 holes and swedish 4 holes types All the five types can be purchased as product Applicable paper Non Punch mode Same as MFP ENWW Punch mode Maintenance e Metric area 4 holes Swedish 4 holes Maintenance A3 B4 A4 B5 Ledger Letter Same as the MFP Inch area 3 holes Ledger Letter A3 B4 A4 B5 Operating environment Inch area 2 holes Temperature Ledger Legal Letter Letter R P 5 5 by 8 5 5 5 by 8 5R 10 C to 30 C 50 F to 86 F A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 A5R Humidity 1 F4 Punch mode with A5R or 5 5 by 8 5R size paper cannot be used together with 10 percent to 80 percent RH the stapling mode Note The information herein may be subject to change for High quality paper of 64 g m to improvement without notice 128 g m or 16 Ib to 24 Ib Punch mode cannot be used together with the fold mode staple and fold mode or tri fold mode Media not supported in punch mode Transparency label paper blueprint master binding holed paper tabs Amount of paper curl Maximum 10 mm for 5
44. 12 Non sort mode 2 202er eens 13 Sort and group modes 14 Sub tray mode aaa 15 Staple mode an 16 Booklet mode aa 18 Tri folding mode auauna anaa 19 2 Finisher unit explanation External section 2222202 22 Composition 2 222222 seen 22 Mechanism soei duaa terrenet rirasi 22 Conveyance section 5 24 Composition seen 24 Mechanism 22220222 24 M701 finisher conveyance control 28 M712 gate drive control 29 SD705 bypass gate control 29 M702 shift control 30 M707 paper exit roller control 31 SD704 paper exit opening solenoid CONTOR i ri ae n a 33 M708 paper exit opening control 33 M721 upper tray paper exit control 34 ENWW Main tray section aaa 36 Composition ooocooooooo 36 Mechanism 222c eee eee 36 M703 tray up down control 37 Stacker SECtION oooocococcoocoo ooo 39 Composition ooooooocoooo 39 MechanisM oooooocoormono o 39 M705 alignment U control 42 M716 alignment L control Q3634A A are BA bada 43 M718 folding stopper control Q3634A A eked Che elas kah 44 M713 stacker entrance control 46 Stapler section 2222222 48 Composition 2 222222 een 48 Mechanism 0 2 cece eee 0 49 Stapler movement c
45. 16 Safety information aa 16 Safety circuits ooooooooooo 16 Overall protection circuit 16 Safety labels on the MFPs 19 Scanner section 0 21 Laser scanner assembly 21 SI an be desire ale NG 21 3 MFP overview Overview of system 0a 24 hp LaserJet 9055mfp 9065mfp product specificatiONS ooo ooooooo 25 Pira ari 25 FUNCHONS vna data da 25 Applicable copy paper 26 Opo nanam a anoh acs 26 Particulars of machine 26 Maintenance and life 26 Environmental conditions 26 Central cross sectional vieW 27 Drive system diagram 28 Fuser web drive section 28 Drum drive section 29 Developing drive section 29 Paper feed vertical conveyance tray up drive sections 30 ENWW Tray 1 paper feed automatic duplex unit ADU pre registration drive section 31 Charging and transfer separation wire cleaning drive section 32 Automatic Duplex Unit ADU conveyance drive section 33 Paper exit drive section 34 Toner supply drive section 34 Optics drive section 35 4 MFP unit explanation External section 2e seen 40 Composition oooooooooo 40 Drive section 2 22 22 0c c eee ee
46. 3 Original feed direction size detection operation When the original is fed from the registration roller in single side original copy mode when AMS is not used and double side original copy mode the conveyance path of original is same as normal conveyance path In single side original copy mode when AMS is used and Z fold copy mode the conveyance path of original is same as that in double side original copy mode passing the reverse gate and reverse section In each case the ON interval of PS304 original registration 1 is measured and used to detect the length of the original In single side original copy mode when AMS is used the original is not read before magnification rate is decided Therefore the conveyance path of original is same as that in double side original copy mode so that PS304 detects the length of the original ENWW In Z fold original copy mode the length of the first original is detected PS304 Original registration 1 Registration roller Original exit reversal Reversal roller Reverse gate c Allowed size combination Ll Same size O Same series Different series X Mixing prohibited Not supported 1 AB series 1 Reference original maximum size original detectable with guide plate
47. 3 Remove a mounting screw holding the ground cable Remove the ground cable and the clamp 4 Remove four screws securing the clincher Detach the clincher F and the connector ENWW Screw 5 Remove four mounting screws holding the clincher R Clincher R Stapler section 77 Finisher disassembly assembly 6 Remove two screws Detach the ball bearing bracket and then remove the clincher R by rotating it to the appropriate position Remove the connector CAUTION Do not lose the bearing spring and the ball ee Connector Ball bearing mounting bracket Screw 7 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse 78 Finisher disassembly assembly Removing and reinstalling the stapler CAUTION Make sure that the power cord of the MFP is unplugged from the power outlet Do not use hands to move stapler units to horizontal direction Otherwise the belt and the gear teeth skipping may occur WARNING CAUTION Be sure to perform the adjustmentwork described in the finisher stapler upper lower positions adjustment section of the manual and the adjustment section after you have attached the stapler Procedure 1 Open the front door 2 Draw the stacker unit out 3 Remove the cartridge from the stapler ENWW 4 Remove four mounting screws securing the stapler and the screw holding the ground cable Detach the stapler F and the connector CN181
48. 5 external section removing and reinstalling 62 theory of operation 22 F finisher conveyance M701 control 28 folding conveyance M720 control 59 folding drive 11 folding knife M719 control 58 folding section 56 folding stopper M718 control 44 front door 64 ENWW G gate drive M712 control 29 group mode paper stacking capacity 3 theory of operation 14 H humidity 5 intermediate conveyance roller sponge roller 68 M M701 finisher conveyance control 28 M702 shift control 30 M703 tray up down motor 70 M703 tray up down control 37 M705 alignment U control 42 M707 paper exit roller control 31 M708 paper exit opening control 33 M712 gate drive control 29 M713 stacker entrance control 46 M716 alignment L control 43 M718 folding stopper control 44 M719 folding knife control 58 M720 folding conveyance control 59 M721 upper tray paper exit control 34 main paper exit opening cover 66 main tray 65 main tray capacity 3 main tray section removing and reinstalling 70 theory of operation 36 maintenance 5 N non sort mode 13 non staple mode 3 81 Index O offset mode 3 operating environment 5 P paper curling 3 sizes 2 stacking capacity 3 types 2 paper conveyance drive 7 paper conveyance path 12 paper exit opening M708 control 33 paper exit opening solenoid SD704 control 33 paper exit opening unit 69 paper exit roller M707 control 31 paper exit roller sponge ro
49. 5V P GND DEVM_CONT DEVM_CLK DEVM_CW CCW DEVM_GAIN DEVM_EM PRCB Dmax maximum contrast control is a performed by TCSB toner control sensor board M2 drum M3 developing and so on under the control of PRCB printer control board 1 Operation The purpose of Dmax maximum contrast control is to adjust the maximum density to the reference level for each machine ENWW Dmax maximum contrast control 1 Method Several latent images are created at the maximum laser power images are developed with the rotational speed of the developing sleeve varied and then each density is read by the Dmax maximum contrast sensor PD1 on TCSB toner control sensor board Developing unit 65 MFP unit explanation The developing sleeve speed Dmax maximum contrast LED detected when the density has ON OFF control signal han heigl ie is L LED on recorded as t e optimum sleeve H LED off speed allowing developing to be performed at this sleeve speed 2 TNLED_REF PRCB to TCSB 2 Timing Power supply line for PD1 LED on a When the fuser temperature is TESB lower than 50 C 122 F at SW2 The voltage is adjusted so that the sub power on Dmax maximum contrast MONI b Every 10 000 prints upon signal becomes 1 9 V completion of the last job 3 DJLED_CONT PRCB to TCSB 2 Signals JAM LED ON OFF control signal a Input signals L LED on 1 DM_SIG_EX TCSB to PRCB H LED off Output volta
50. 5V PS803 IN PS803 IN2 PAPER IN3 EDGE IN4 SENSOR M801 DRV1 ma M801 DRV2 PS801 5V PS801 IN PS801 SG The movement of the punch unit is driven by M802 punch shift and the punching operation is driven by M801 punch M801 is DC motor and rotates once per punch Related signals are PS801 punch HP PS803 punch shift HP and paper edge sensor ENWW 1 Operation The punching operation can be divided into the movement of the punch unit and the punch movement that makes holes In the punch mode these movements are performed for every sheet of paper while in the non punch mode these are not performed However the movement of the punch unit is performed for some paper sizes even in the non punch mode a Searching the standby home position of the punch unit With power turned on M802 punch shift runs to move the punch unit to the position where PS803 punch shift HP is turned on which makes a standby state This position becomes the standby home position of the punch unit b Moving the standby position of the punch unit When the punch mode is selected M802 punch shift runs to move the punch unit so that the paper edge sensor mounted on the punch unit is located inside of the side edge of paper by 5 mm However if the paper size is Letter Legal or 5 5 by 8 5R the sensor is positioned by 10 mm inside Either of these positions becomes the standby position in the pu
51. 5V3 T3SIZE_S_PS SGND 5V3 T3SIZE L PS SGND 3 3V2 T3SIZE_VR AGND The paper size in Tray 4 is detected using PS17 paper size 1 3 PS18 paper size 2 3 and VR3 paper size 3 Based on the detection signals the PRCB printer control board judges the paper size 1 Operation The length of paper is detected using PS17 18 paper size 1 3 2 3 Variable resistor VR3 interlocked with the guide position is installed at the bottom of the tray to detect the width of paper ENWW The relationships between the sensors and paper sizes lengths are as follows Paper size 8 5 by 11 or A4R to B5R F4 or larger less Sensor PS17 OFF ON ON PS18 OFF OFF ON 2 Signals a PRCB input signals 1 T3SIZE S PS PS17 to PRCB Paper size detection signal L Paper does not exist H Paper exists 2 T3SIZE L PS PS18 to PRCB Paper size detection signal L Paper does not exist H Paper exists 3 T3SIZE_VR VR3 to PRCB Paper width detection signal No paper detection control No paper in the tray is detected by PS15 no paper 3 and which is controlled by the PRCB printer control board 1 Operation When the tray becomes empty PS15 no paper 3 is turned off displaying a message on the LCD via OB1 operation board 1 Tray 4 paper feed unit 87 MFP unit explanation 2 Signals a PRCB input signals 1 PS15 PS15 to PRCB No paper detection signal L Paper does not exist
52. ADF unit 195 MFP disassembly assembly 7 Remove two screws to remove the ADU reverse guide assembly CAUTION When reinstalling align the projection on the rear of the ADU reverse guide assembly with the hole on the ADU bottom plate assembly Open close wire Screws Automatic document feeder bottom pota assembly Open close wire assembly Screws Automatic document feeder reverse guide assembly Automatic document feeder Holes bottom plate assembly Projections Automatic document feeder reverse guide assembly 196 MFP disassembly assembly 8 Remove the nine screws illustrated from the bottom of the ADU stand Front Screws Paper te exit side Automatic document feeder bottom plate assembly ENWW 9 Remove one screw while holding the ADU bottom plate assembly to remove the paper feed side open close wire Be sure to hold ADU bottom plate assembly when removing the screws because the ADU bottom plate assembly becomes free when the paper feed side open close wire is removed CAUTION IN LL Sam OF AG Ws nig A p en a wire 10 Lower the ADU bottom plate assembly straight down and remove the ADU guide cover ENWW ina Automatic document feeder
53. LG PART reg 16 Overall protection circuit 000 nennen een 16 Safety labels on the MFPS 0000 e eee eee 19 Scanner Section oo gcc alain alae et GG NAA HAAN ee 21 Laser scanner assembly 0 00 cece eee eee eee 21 FREAD COVER a a Rot cca esses honey thd pama ere ap AD a aa 21 Safety Safety and important warning items Read carefully the safety and important warning items described below to understand them before doing service work Important notices Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this MFP as well as the risk of damage to the MFP HP strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by HP trained service technicians Changes may have been made to this MFP to improve its performance after this service handbook was printed Accordingly HP does not warrant either explicitly or implicitly that the information contained in this service handbook is complete and accurate The user of this service handbook must assume all risks of personal injury and or damage to the MFP while servicing the MFP for which this service handbook is intended Therefore this service handbook must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical training and even after that for performing maintenance and control of the MFP properly Keep this service handbook also for future service When it is impossible to read the description about safety and warnings
54. LPR5V LDB to ICB This signal monitors the LDB laser driver board power supply H Normal L Abnormal 5 ALM2 LDB to ICB This signal indicates the state of the laser 2 drive current H Normal L Abnormal b Output signals 1 S H1 ICB to LDB APC sampling signal for one line for laser 1 2 ENB1 ICB to LDB Laser APC function ON OFF control signal for laser 1 Laser beam emission stops when it is off ENWW 3 S H2 ICB to LDB APC sampling signal for one line for laser 2 4 ENB2 ICB to LDB Laser APC function ON OFF control signal for laser 2 Laser beam emission stops when it is off 5 VIDEO1 VIDEO1 ICB to LDB Image signal for laser 1 6 VIDEO2 VIDEO2 ICB to LDB Image signal for laser 2 DACLK ICB to LDB LDB laser driver board MPC value data transmission clock signal 7 DADI ICB to LDB LDB laser driver board signal for MPC 8 DALD ICB to LDB LDB laser driver board MPC value memory command signal Laser scanner unit 55 MFP unit explanation Drum unit Composition Charging corona unit Separation claws Toner guide roller TGR Drum Charging corona unit PCL LB Drum Cleaning toner recycle section a m Developing unit eee fe Ng Transfer and separation corona unit TSL To prevent a specific part of Mechanisms image copied paper from being Mechanism Method A Cola ED stained and to preve
55. M711 stops at the appropriate positions Stapler section 51 Finisher unit explanation When PS706 main tray paper exit has detected the last sheet and a predefined time period has elapsed M711 is activated again to move the staplers to the home position and M711 stops when PS711 stapler movement HP turns on b Single staple rear oblique The finisher operation signal from the MFP activates M711 stapler movement to extend the distances between the two staples as well as the two clinchers After a predefined time period has elapsed M706 stapler rotation and M704 clincher rotation start to rotate the stapler R and the clincher R respectively When the staplers and clinchers are set in place M704 M706 and M711 stop PS706 main tray paper exit turns on by detecting the last paper and after a predefined time has elapsed M704 and M706 start to rotate the stapler R and the clincher R back to their home positions The rotating actions of the stapler R and the clincher R stop when PS713 stapler rotation HP and PS714 clincher rotation HP detect them respectively At the same time M711 starts moving the staplers to the home position The operation of M711 stops when PS711 stapler movement HP turns on Two staples When two staples are used the staplers and the clinchers stay in their home positions for the stapling operation 2 Signals a Finisher CB input signals 1 PS711 IN PS711 to RB to finish
56. M720 stops ENWW M720 BLK M720 CONT M720 CLK M720 PLL M720 F R 24V 24V PGND PGND PS722 PS725 PS726 2 Signals a Finisher CB input signals 1 M720 PLL M720 to RB to finisher CB Signal for monitoring the rotation of M720 L M720 is rotating at a specified speed H M720 is not rotating at a specified speed b Finisher CB output signals 1 M720 BLK finisher CB to RB to M720 Signal to apply braking to the M720 L Braking on H Braking off 2 M720 CONT finisher CB to RB to M720 Signal to drive control M720 L M720 on H M720 off Folding Tri folding section Q3634A only 59 Finisher unit explanation 3 M720 CLK finisher CB to RB to M720 Signal relating to the clock for controlling the rotation speed of M720 SD706 tri folding gate control SD706 CONT SSS Saat PS725 IN MAIN BODY SD706 tri folding gate operates the tri folding gate which provides the appropriate paper passage for either one of the three operations folding stitch and fold or tri folding The finisher CB finisher control board controls the operation of SD706 The related signal is PS725 folding exit 1 Operation When the booklet stopper stops at the tri folding position SD706 tri folding gate is activated This operates the tri folding gate providing the paper passage that leads to the tri folding stopper When PS725 folding exit has d
57. MC The pick roller and feed roller touch the paper when SD100 HCI first feed is on feeding the paper to the conveyance roller Then SD100 HCI first paper feed turns off to release the pick roller and feed roller from the paper The conveyance roller is also driven by M101 by turning on MC102 HCI first feed MC paper is fed to the MFP The related signals are PS100 HCI top cover open close detection PS106 HCI feed PS107 HCI first feed and PS110 HCI jam access door open close detection 1 Operation a First paper feed timing 1 Start of first paper feed At predefined interval after the START button is pressed 10 HCl unit explanation 2 Start of second and subsequent papers When PS106 HCI feed is turned off by the preceding paper 3 OFF timing When the MFP M7 paper exit turns off b Interlock The power supply line of M101 HCI paper feed is equipped with MS101 HCI interlock 1 and MS102 HCI interlock 2 When the top cover is opened MS101 turns off and when the jam access door is opened MS102 turns off thereby cutting off the power supply to M101 Furthermore the top cover is equipped with PS100 HCI top cover open close detection and the jam access door is equipped with PS110 HCI jam access door open close detection and when either of these doors is opened during paper feed the M101 drive signal is turned off to stop the paper feed operation c Internal heater The HCI i
58. MFP is unplugged from the power outlet When removing the tray up down motor be sure to hold the main tray to prevent it from falling 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the connector Remove two mounting screws while holding the main tray and then detach the tray up down motor M703 3 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse 70 Finisher disassembly assembly Replacing the up down wire CAUTION Make sure that the power cord of the MFP is unplugged from the power outlet When removing the tray up down motor be sure to hold the main tray to prevent it from falling Note The wire replacing procedure described below is of the rear side For the front side the design as well as the winding direction of the wire is symmetrical CAUTION F is impressed on the front side surface of the wire bracket Also R is impressed on the rear side surface Be sure of the direction when installing Procedure 1 Remove the following parts e Side cover Front door Rear cover Tray up down motor M703 Main tray ENWW 2 Remove five mounting screws Remove 4 Loosen the two screws on the belt the up down gear cover and the gear tensioner Belt tensioner 5 Remove the E ring and the up down pulley L Then remove the up down wire 3 Remove two screws Detach the wire bracket on the rear from the up down stay CAUTION When you remove the up d
59. ON OFF drive signal IL MC102 on H MC102 off CONT HCIDB to SD100 SD100 HCI first paper feed ON OFF drive signal IL SD100 on H SD100 off HCIM_CONT HCIDB to M101 M101 HCI paper feed ON OFF control signal IL M101 on H M101 off IO_URXD HCIDB to MFP Serial data to transmit the HCIDB HCI drive board operating status to MFP PRCB lO UCLK HCIDB to MFP IO_URXD signal clock signal REQ4 HCIDB to MFP Serial data send request signal from HCI to MFP PRCB HCIM_CLK M101 to HCIDB M101 HCI paper feed rotational speed control clock signal HCIM_F R M101 to HCIDB M101 HCI paper feed rotational direction indication signal This MFP always indicates H normal rotation Paper feed section 11 HCI unit explanation Up down plate drive control Ria lee la MAIN BODY 24v l PGND o E o A When the top cover opens or closes M100 HCI up down motor rotates forward or backward to move the up down plate up or down The up down plate descends by 120 mm each time SW100 HCI tray down drive is pressed while the top cover is opened The related signals are PS100 HCI top cover open close detection PS101 HCI lower limit detection and PS109 HCI upper limit detection 1 Operation a Up down plate descend timing 1 ON timing When the top cover is opened and PS100 HCI top cover open close detection is turned off M100 rotates backward to lower the up down plate
60. Others 280 mm s 9055 320 mm s 9065 ENWW Loop second paper feed control IO DTXD IO DCLK ADU LATCH IO UCLK REQ1 IO URXD ACK1 ERR OUT1 2NDM_CLK REG_PS ADUDB The paper fed from each tray is fed to the second paper feed section The second paper feed takes place as the result of the transmission of the drive force from M5 conveyance to the second pick roller via MC1 registration The second paper feed section is preceded by a loop roller used to form a paper loop and this conveyance section is also used for the paper fed from the HCI It is not used for the paper fed from Tray 1 or the ADU The loop roller is driven by M6 loop roller The above parts are ENWW ADUEXT PS S GND DEF VIDEO GMD 5V2 5V GND DEF_SI DEF_CLK DEF_LED 24V1 controlled by PRCB printer control board via ADUDB ADU drive board M6 is driven by PRCB directly Related signals are PS36 loop PS43 leading edge PS44 registration and PS50 ADU pre registration 1 Operation a Loop control After a lapse of the specified time from turning on of PS44 registration by the paper fed from each tray or the ADU at Automatic duplex unit ADU 101 MFP unit explanation a high speed M6 loop roller is turned off to form a paper loop in the registration section b Second paper feed control After formation of a paper loop under loop control MC 1 registration is
61. Removing and reinstalling the vertical conveyance MC MC11 MC12 CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Remove the vertical conveyance section 2 Remove the gear lock to remove the two gears and two spacer axes 3 Disconnect the two connectors CN881 CN882 to remove the wiring harness from the harness guide 4 Remove each MC Connector Zl CN881 NG lt D f AT Vertical conveyance AR MC 1 MC11 A x ne CN882 5 Vertical pacer axils conveyance MC 2 MC12 Spacer axis Vertical conveyance MC Detent Vertical conveyance section 187 MFP disassembly assembly 5 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION When installing be sure the detent of the clutch is at the position shown above ADF unit Pulling out and reinstalling the ADU stand WARNING The interlock which is turned off when the front right or left door opens or closes should never be turned on forcibly with the ADU stand pulled out CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Open the front right and left doors 2 With the solenoid release lever on the ADU stand pushed to the left turn down the ADU pulling lever to the left 188 MFP disassembly assembly 3 Grip the ADU stand pulling lever and pull out the ADU stand ADU stand
62. Removing the ADF 0 000 c cece eee ene 22 Reinstalling the ADF 00 0 0 cece eee 24 Original feed conveyance exit section 2 222220 cee eee ee 26 Replacing the pick roller and conveyance roller rubber 26 Cleaning the cleaning pad 4 27 Replacing the separation roller separation roller rubber 27 21 ADF disassembly assembly External section This section explains how to disassemble and reassemble the machine CAUTION When disassembling and reassembling the machine follow the precautions given below Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet The disassembled parts must be reassembled following the disassembly procedure in reverse unless otherwise specified Care should be taken not to lose small parts Care should also be taken not to install small parts in wrong places Do not operate he machine before installing all the disassembled parts completely Removal of some screws is prohibited in this section Never loosen them Removing the ADF CAUTION Make sure the power cord of the main unit has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Remove the rear cover See the external section of the MFP 2 Remove two screws to detach the two stoppers Stopper1 Stopper2 22 ADF disassembly assembly ENWW 3 Open the ADF to the upright position 4 Remove four connectors CN612 to CN615 from the scanner driv
63. SD SD705 Shift mechanism of the shift unit The finisher conveyance motor M701 drives the shift roller conveying the paper forward to the main tray While the paper is conveyed to the main tray the shift motor M702 rotates to activate the crank mechanism This mechanism moves the shift moving section including the shift roller by Finisher unit explanation 300 mm toward the rear which also moves the paper and then it is delivered The shift hp PS PS718 detects the shift position Crank arm To main tray Shift motor M702 Fixed man NAG gt From FNS conveyance motor M701 Shift roller Shift HP PS PS718 L Shift moving section Shift HP PS PS718 Position for straight Paper exit Shift motor M702 Fixed Shift roller section le Crank shaft y es moving section Position for offset shift paper exit gt Open close of paper exit opening When paper is conveyed to the stacker and it is larger than B5R in the vertical length feeding direction it does not fit the paper exit opening This mechanism addresses this problem by opening the paper exit opening from the start of copying until the completion of stapling ENWW 5 Paper exit opening unit To main tray BEIN Paper exit opening motor M708 Paper exit opening HP PS PS712 The paper exit opening
64. actuating the top cover interlock switch can cause the paper tray to lift beyond the upward limit and damage the HCI Top cover ENWW 4 Remove three screws to detach the clutch replacement cover Clutch Screws replacement cover 5 Disconnect two relay connectors CN765 CN766 of the clutches 6 Remove the snap ring to detach each clutch LT first paper feed MC MC102 LT feed MC MC101 N SS Relay connector CN766 VS Snap ring Relay connector CN765 7 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION When installing each MC make sure that the stopper of each clutch is on the predefined position ENWW Replacing the Q3637A up down wires CAUTION With the power held on press the HCI tray down switch SW100 to move the up down plate down to the bottom in advance Procedure 1 Open the top cover 2 Remove the clutch replacement cover 3 Remove five screws to detach the right side cover Ca be AL Right side A cover Screws 4 After opening the jam access door remove six screws to detach the front cover CAUTION When removing the front cover close the jam access door after removing the screws Paper feed section 21 HCI disassembly assembly Right side cover 5 Remove twelve screws to detach the rear cover 0 3 PA Z Sc
65. be fed to the reverse exit roller ADU gate and 98 MFP unit explanation ADU reverse roller sequentially Normally the ADU gate is closed and it has no drive mechanism it is opened by the rigidity of paper When the paper reverse PS PS42 detects the trailing edge of paper and consequently turns off the reverse exit roller and ADU reverse roller start rotating in the opposite direction feeding the paper back toward the fuser unit However since the reverse exit gate is closed the paper is fed to the MFP exit roller via the path outside this gate Thus the paper is ejected with the print side down Reverse exit selection gate Fuser roller upper Fuser exit PS Pu lower lt Exit roller Decurler roller _ KO Im oe ADU gate Reverse exit roller Paper reverse PS PS42 Reverse exit gate Main body exit roller ADU reverse roller Reverse exit ee gate ENWW b Straight ejection When paper is ejected straight the reverse gate SD SD7 is turned on to close the reverse exit selection gate The paper fed by the paper exit roller is fed to the paper exit roller with the print side up Fuser roller upper IAS 6 Fuser roller lower Fuser exit PS PS30 Exit roller Reverse exit selection gate Main body exit roller c ADU paper conveyance In the two sided copy mode the paper finished with printing on the front side is fed through the path under the reverse exit selecti
66. control panel ENWW 2 Signals a Input signals 1 PS804IN PS804 to PKDB to finisher CB Punch waste box existence detection signal L Punch waste box is not set H Punch waste box is set 2 PS802IN PS802 to PKDB to finisher CB Punch waste box full detection signal L Punch waste box is full H Punch waste box is not full Punch waste box section 17 Punch kit unit explanation 18 Punch kit unit explanation ENWW ENWW Punch kit disassembly assembly PUNCH SOCOM a naia ee PPO Chaar taa EA 20 Screws that should not be removed a 20 Replacing the punch unit o cocccccccc eee 20 Cleaning the punch edges and punch waste full PS P5802 22 19 Punch kit disassembly assembly This section explains how to disassemble and reassemble the MFP When disassembling and reassembling the MFP follow the precautions given below CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet The disassembled parts must be reassembled following the disassembly procedure in reverse unless otherwise specified Care should be taken not to lose small parts Care should also be taken not to install small parts in wrong places Do not operate the MFP before installing all the disassembled parts completely Removal of some screws is prohibited in this section Never loosen them Punch section Screws that should not be Replacing the punch unit removed CAUTION Be sure to unplug th
67. control the Phase B of M712 SD705 bypass gate control 24V SD705 DRV 5V PS704 IN GND MAIN BODY SD705 bypass gate only operates for small size papers A4 B5 or 8 5 by 11 The finisher CB finisher control board controls SD705 The related signal is PS704 finisher entrance 1 Operation a First set While the sheets of the first set are being processed SD705 bypass gate does not operate Conveyance section 29 Finisher unit explanation 2 30 b Second set The stapling operation for the first set is activated and after a predefined time SD705 bypass gate is activated to pull the first sheet of the second set toward the bypass SD705 stops it operation when a predefined time has elapsed since PS704 finisher entrance detected the rear end of the first sheet of the second set SD705 does not operate when the second and subsequent sheets of the second set are processed c Third and subsequent sets PS704 finisher entrance detects the rear end of the last sheet of the second set Then after a predefined time SD705 bypass gate is activated to pull the first sheet of the third set toward the bypass SD705 stops it operation when a predefined time has elapsed since PS704 finisher entrance detected the rear end of the first sheet of the third set SD705 does not operate when the second and subsequent sheets of the third and subsequent sets are processed Signals a F
68. copies are offset Shift roller Shift unit Entrance roller Main tray Conveyance roller A 14 Finisher overview ENWW Sub tray mode In the sub tray mode the gate is set to the position to carry paper to the sub tray Each sheet delivered from the MFP is delivered to the sub tray Conveyance roller A Upper tray Entrance roller y Upper tray paper exit roller CR Upper tray conveyance roller ENWW Paper conveyance path 15 Finisher overview Staple mode For sheets of all sizes except A4 B5 and 8 5 by 11 1 The gates are set to the position to carry paper to the stacker 2 If paper is larger than A4R the paper exit opening will open 3 Each sheet is carried to the flat stapling stopper and its vertical position feeding direction is adjusted 4 The horizontal position width direction of each sheet is adjusted by the alignment plate U 5 When all necessary sheets are stacked they are stapled with the stapler and the clincher 6 The set of stapled sheets is delivered by the paper exit arm to the main tray 7 Steps 3 through 6 are repeated for each set of sheets to be stapled Paper exit opening unit Entrance roller Main tray Conveyance roller A N Conveyance roller B N A conveyance roller N Stacker entrance roller Swing belt Stapler 4 Clincher a Alignment plate U Paper exit belt Paper exit arm Flat sta
69. described above and the original is conveyed by the conveyance roller The scanning starts when the specified time has passed after PS306 original conveyance has turned on 2 Double side original copy mode The back side of the original is scanned first then the front side The scanning procedure is the same for both sides M301 original feed rotates backward at high speed MC301 original feed MC is on and the original is conveyed from the reversal section to the read section Then it switches back to low speed when the specified time has passed after PS305 original registration 2 has turned on At the same time M302 original conveyance starts rotating to scan the original The scanning operation is the same as for the single side original copy Original feed conveyance exit section 13 ADF unit explanation d Scanning the last sheet of original When PS301 last original turns off while scanning is in progress currently scanned original is processed as the last original The pre feed of the original stops and with PS302 original setting turned off the original feed tray is detected as empty M301 original feed and M302 original conveyance stop when the specified time has passed after the original has passed through PS303 original exit and original ejection has completed Original skew detection control PS307 original skew F and PS308 original skew R are provided to detect the inclined le
70. does not exist H Paper exists 6 T2SIZE S PS PS12 to PRCB Paper size detection signal Tray 3 L Paper does not exist H Paper exists 7 TISIZE VR VR1 to PRCB Paper width detection signal Tray 2 8 T2SIZE VR VR2 to PRCB Paper width detection signal Tray 3 ENWW No paper detection control No paper in the tray is detected by PS3 no paper 1 and PS9 no paper 2 which are controlled by the PRCB printer control board 1 Operation When the tray becomes empty PS3 9 no paper 1 2 is turned off displaying a message on the LCD via OB1 operation board 1 2 Signals a PRCB input signals 1 T1 OPS PS3 to PRCB No paper detection signal Tray 2 L Paper does not exist in tray H Paper exists in tray 2 T2 OPS PS9 to PRCB No paper detection signal Tray 3 L Paper does not exist in tray H Paper exists in tray Tray 2 3 paper feed unit 81 MFP unit explanation Tray 4 paper feed unit Composition Tray up drive motor 3 M18 Paper size PS 2 3 PS18 Mechanisms Drive pulley for wire C D Mechanism Method Paper lift up 1 Up Driven by wires Down Falls down by its own weight Tray loading Front loading Double feed Torque limiter prevention First paper feed Pick roller No paper detection Photosensor actuator Paper size detection 2 Universal Width VR Length Photosensor actuators two First paper fee
71. finisher CB Signal relating to the main tray upper limit position in the staple mode L Upper limit position H Non upper limit position Main tray section 37 Finisher unit explanation 4 PS715 IN PS715 to finisher CB Signal relating to the counter reset L Non counter reset position H Counter reset position b Finisher CB output signals 1 M703 DRV_F finisher CB to M703 Signal to drive control the normal rotation of M703 2 M703 DRV_R finisher CB to M703 Signal to drive control the reverse rotation of M703 38 Finisher unit explanation ENWW Stacker section Composition Alignment HP PS U PS708 Alignment plate U Coupling pin Paper exit belt HP PS PS709 Stacker entrance motor M713 Paper exit arm Alignment motor U M705 Paper exit belt Stacker no paper PS PS720 Stacker entrance PS PS705 a N Swing beit J SA Folding stopper motor M718 Stacker entrance roller N Alignment HP PS L Flat stapling stopper pee PS724 Folding stopper HP PS PS723 Alignment motor L 1 i M716 f 1 1 I 1 1 1 y 1 i 1 Booklet stopper 7 1 1 H Alignment plate L H O 1 Q3634A only H 1 i a PAIN E En ei es I Mechanism 1 Stack Mechanism Method The stacker section features a compact Stack 1 Corrugation roller component design using the stack with Swing belt own weigh
72. from the power outlet WARNING Be careful when you detach the finisherfrom the MFP If you pull out the stacker unit the finisher may fall This may cause injury Procedure 1 Open the front door 2 Draw the stacker unit out Stacker unit 3 Remove the two screws securing the rail stopper Further pull the stacker unit out CAUTION Place something under the drawn stacker unit to prevent the finisher from falling due to the weight of the unit 76 Finisher disassembly assembly rail stopper Support preventing the falling of the FNS 4 Remove five screws and detach the cover 5 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Removing and reinstalling the clincher CAUTION WARNING CAUTION Procedure Make sure that the power cord of the MFP is unplugged from the power outlet Do not move the stapler units manually This can result in a misalignment between the gear and belt use to move the stapler units Use the 47 mode to move the stapler units or remove the stapler movement motor M711 Be sure to perform the adjustment work described in the finisher stapler upper lower positions adjustment section of the manual and the adjustment section after you have attached the clincher 1 Open the front door 2 Pull the stacker unit out and remove the stapler unit cover
73. fusing separation claw upper unit 8 Remove six fusing separation claws upper Separation claw Screw Upper support shaft Fixing separation co upper 6 Fuser 213 MFP disassembly assembly 9 Reinstall the above parts following the 5 Slide the frame holding the fusing removal steps in reverse separation claws lower and remove the three claws CAUTION After installing the fusing Fixing separation separation claw upper claws lower 3 move the upper claws with your finger and check that they return with the force of the spring Removing and reinstalling the fusing separation claw lower unit and fusing separation claws lower Procedure Fixing separation claw lower assembly 1 Remove the fuser 2 Open the fuser upper 3 Remove two screws to detach the fusing separation claw lower assembly 4 Remove the three springs from the three fusing separation claws lower 6 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION After installing the fusing separation claw lower check that the frame moves smoothly Removing and reinstalling the fusing upper roller Procedure 1 Remove the fuser 2 Remove the fuser front cover 3 Remove the fusing separation claw upper unit 4 Open the fuser top 5 Remove the fusing heater lamps L2 L3 214 MFP disassembly assembly ENWW 6 Remove the two C rings two gears two bearings two washers
74. fusing plate front ENWW 4 Remove the front lamp harness from the harness guide to remove the two Faston terminals CAUTION When removing the Faston terminals be sure to hold the connector The connector cannot be removed by pulling on the harness gt Lamp fixing plate rear 8 Pull out the fusing heater lamps L2 L3 from the front side of the fusing upper roller Lamp fixing plate front 5 Open the fuser top 6 Remove the screw at the far side to remove the lamp fusing plate rear 7 Remove the two Faston terminals of the far side lamp Fixing heater lamps L2 L3 CAUTION When removing the Faston terminals be sure to hold the connector The connector cannot be removed by pulling on the harness ENWW Fuser 211 MFP disassembly assembly 9 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION When installing the lamps pay attention to their orientation The size of the lamp terminal mounting hole in the front lamp fusing plate is different from that in the rear lamp fusing plate The lamp cannot be installed properly if it is facing the opposite direction Replacing the fusing heater lamp L4 CAUTION Do not touch the fusing heater lamp with bare hands Install the heater lamp with the manufacturers mark facing the rear The heater lamp should not touch the inner surface of the upper roller When replacing
75. heater lamp circuit in DCPS as soon as the SW2 sub power is turned on holding L2 fuser heater lamp 1 L3 fuser heater lamp 2 and L4 fuser heater lamp 3 lit until the fuser roller upper reaches the specified temperature L2 L3 and L4 are turned on off under the control of the TRC1 triac 1 TRC2 triac 2 and TRC3 triac 3 b Protection against abnormal temperature rise 114 MFP unit explanation MAINRL_CONT Thermostats are used to prevent the temperature of the fuser rollers from rising abnormally TS1 thermostat U and TS2 thermostat L are used for the fuser roller upper lower As these thermostat are of the noncontact type those do not touch the fuser roller upper lower The operating temperature of the thermostats are as follows TS1 Opens at 180 C TS2 Opens at 110 C 2 Signals a PRCB input signals 1 TH1 TH1 to PRCB Fuser roller upper temperature detection signal This signal is used to control the temperature of the fuser roller upper and to detect abnormal temperature rise ENWW 2 TH2 TH2 to PRCB Fuser roller upper temperature detection signal This signal is used to detect the fuser roller upper abnormal temperature rise b PRCB output signals 1 FIXHT1_CONT PRCB to DCPS L2 drive control signal L L2 on H L2 off 2 FIXHT2 CONT PRCB to DCPS L3 drive control signal L L3 on H L3 off 3 FIXHT3 CONT PRCB to DCPS L4 drive con
76. image read position originals 2 M maintenance 3 mixed original copy mode 8 ENWW O operating environment 3 original conveyance control 12 original conveyance process 6 original conveyance section removing and reinstalling 26 theory of operation 11 original exit section removing and reinstalling 26 theory of operation 11 original feed control 12 original feed section removing and reinstalling 26 theory of operation 11 original reversal and conveyance control 16 original scan control 12 original size detection control 18 originals curling 2 feed layout 2 image read position 2 maximum number stacked 2 read speed 2 sizes 2 types 2 P pick roller 26 plain originals 2 power consumption 2 power source 2 product specifications 2 R read speed originals 2 29 Index S separation roller 27 separation roller rubber 27 single side original copy mode 6 special originals 2 specifications product 2 stacking originals 2 T temperature 3 W weight 2 Z Z fold original copy mode 8 30 ENWW hp LaserJet 9055mfp 9065mfp 4000 sheet high capacity input A4 Letter Q3637A A3 Ledger Q3638A Contents 1 HCI overview Q3637A Q3638A product specifications Functions 0000 Machine data 0 00 Maintenance 04 Operating environment Center cross sectional drawing Drive system drawing
77. in reverse External section 137 MFP disassembly assembly Drive section Removing and reinstalling the drum motor M2 CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Be sure to pull the drum unit out of the MFP before removing or reinstalling the drum drive motor If you fail to pull out the drum unit the cleaning blade may be damaged because the drum rotates when installing or removing the flywheel or gear Procedure 1 Pull the drum unit out of the MFP See Drum unit on page 152 2 Remove the rear cover See External section on page 132 3 Remove the developing suction cover and right cover top See External section on page 132 4 Remove twenty one screws and remove the image control board cover 138 MFP disassembly assembly Image control board cover Screws 7 Screws 5 5 Remove five screws at the rear and three screws on the right side and remove all connectors from the image control board ICB Screws 3 Image control board ICB Screws 3 Image control board mounting board Screws 2 6 Remove each cable from wire guide ENWW 7 Remove one cable from the scanner board and two cables from the laser scanner assembly pull them through the hole and open the image control board mounting pl
78. insertion kit Q3636A product specifications Type Sheet feeder employing torque limiter separation Functions Automatic sheet feed online operation The Q3636A automatically feeds sheets into the finisher in accordance with instructions from the MFP Manual sheet feed offline operation User feeds sheets into finisher by operating the PI control panel User can select from the following four finishing modes Single staple mode staple at rear Two staple mode flat stapling Punch mode with punch kit e Staple and fold mode available only if mounted to the Q3634A Tri fold mode available only if mounted to the Q3634A e Manual sheet feed is only available with the lower tray This is not allowed for wide papers Copy paper Plain paper 60 to 90 g m or 17 Ib to 24 Ib high quality paper recycled paper Special paper 50 to 59 g m or 13 Ib to 16 Ib high quality paper recycled paper 91 to 200 g m or 24 Ib to 45 Ib high quality paper recycled paper Printing paper Double sided art paper Mat coating paper High quality paper 2 Post insertion overview Upper tray copy sizes Metric area A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 Inch area Letter Letter R 5 5 by 8 5 Lower tray copy sizes O Metric area A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 BSR A5 F4 wide paper 314 mm by 445 mm maximum Inch area Ledger 8 5 by 14 Letter Letter R 5 5 by 8 5 wide paper 314 mm by 445 mm maximum Paper stak
79. la macchina prima di rimuovere CAUTION You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to avoid CAUTION Do not remove caution labels If any caution label has come off or is soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read contact our service office ENWW Safety labels on the MFPs 21 Safety Z WARNING MEE ann MO Breeze anda dada Ver Rohe do naang PLN ENTE Desenchute la m quina antes de Scollegare la macchina prima di IRIARTE BETSIE BUTLE ERTAMEZH REMMI ETICO BAHA Hilal Zyl 3051 Jo UY GU AL onal CAUTION CAUTION 22 Safety You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to avoid Do not remove caution labels If any caution label has come off or is soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read contact our service office ENWW ENWW MFP overview Overview of system sss sde sadaa eee 24 hp LaserJet 9055mfp 9065mfp product specifications 25 NA AA PA AA sented mene PA PAA 25 ALA PE 25 Applicable copy paper 0000 c eee eee ee 26 OP LONG na a asana een ken ara es ele eed ag 26 Particulars of machine eee 26 Maintenance and life eee 26 Environmental conditions 0 0 0 0 saasa narrare 26 Central cross sectional view 2 2 22 22er nennen 27 Drive system diagram 00 000 ete 28 Fuser web drive sect
80. mode 6 Double side original copy mode 7 Mixed original copy mode 8 Z fold original copy mode 8 2 ADF unit explanation External section aaa 10 Composition seen 10 Mechanism 222222 10 Original feed conveyance exit section 11 Composition 2 222222 een 11 Mechanism 222222 11 Original feed conveyance scan control 12 Original reversal and conveyance COMO AA 16 Original size detection control 18 3 ADF disassembly assembly External section 00 00 0000 22 Removing the ADF 22 Reinstalling the ADF 24 Original feed conveyance exit section 26 Replacing the pick roller and conveyance rollerrubber 26 Cleaning the cleaning pad 27 Replacing the separation roller separation roller rubber 27 Index ENWW Contents ENWW ENWW ADF overview Automatic document feeder product specifications MSY OC an aaa Berd ny Stash ae ANA KA AN AA ANAN a FUNCTIONS aaah mk GANA DAAN dod ANDA NAN AGA Machine datak s na 2 00 NA ae ye el R es dec Maintenances APP Operating environment 2 Center cross sectional drawing ccc eee eee eee Drive system diagram 0 00 c ce eee Original conveyance process 00 e eee eee Single side original copy mode 0000 c eee eee e
81. motor M708 rotates to activate the crank mechanism lifting the paper exit opening unit The paper exit opening opens Close position Paper exit Crank shaft opening unit Paper exit opening motor M708 Paper exit opening HP PS PS712 Open position Paper exit opening nip Because the rotational speed of the paper exit roller is slower than that of the conveyance roller the nip is in the released position except during the paper exit action When a sheet of paper reaches the paper exit opening the paper exit opening solenoid ENWW SD704 activates the nip roller The roller nips the sheet to deliver to the main tray Paper exit opening unit To main tray Paper exit opening SD SD704 Main tray paper exit PS PS706 Nip moving section Paper exit guide assembly Position when the nip is not active Nip roller Nip moving section Position when the nip is active Paper exit opening SD SS tray paper exit roller Conveyance section 27 Finisher unit explanation M701 finisher conveyance control PS704 IN PS704 24V IN 070 24VDC IN M701 finisher conveyance operation is performed by the 24V DC motor and controlled by the finisher CB finisher control board The related signals is PS704 finisher entrance 1 Operation a Interlock control Finisher paper conveyance drive control is initiated by the ON signal from t
82. off to switch between the reversal section and the Original exit tray Mechanism Method aati h k Original feed Pick roller original exit section Feed roller Double feed Separation roller Reverse gate prevention Original conveyance Original conveyance roller two Original exit Original exit roller Original conveyance Reverse gate path selection 1 Original reverse and Reversal roller feed Original exit reversal roller Original exit path Original exit gate selection 2 1 Original conveyance path selection During the double side copy mode the original conveyance path is selected at the reverse gate in order to flip the original over to the other side and the original is conveyed to the reversal section The reverse gate drive SD ENWW Original feed conveyance exit section 11 ADPF unit explanation 2 Original exit path switching During the double side copy mode the up down movement of the original exit gate determines whether to eject the original or to feed the original to the reversal section to scan it again The exit gate drive SD SD302 turns on off during the double side copy mode To scan the back side the original exit gate goes down to convey the original to the reversal section When both sides of the original are read the original exit gate lifts to exit the original to the original exit tray Exit gate drive SD SD302
83. out quickly and HP must be notified To determine the cause of the accident conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on site checks in accordance with instructions issued by HP Conclusion Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration Therefore safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer engineer When performing service each MFP on the site must be tested for safety The customer engineer must verify the safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment ENWW Safety warnings 15 Safety Regulatory statements FCC Class A Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The end user of this product should be aware that any changes or modifications made to this equipment without the approval of Hewl
84. position M713 stops When P5729 folding full has detected the trailing edge of the set M713 stacker entrance returns to its high speed rotation mode to prepare for the next paper conveyance 2 Signals a Finisher CB output signals 1 M713 CLK finisher CB to RB Signal relating to the clock for controlling the rotation speed of M7 13 2 M713 RESET finisher CB to RB Reset signal for M713 3 M713 CONT finisher CB to RB Signal to activate or deactivate M713 L M713 on H M713 off b RB output signals 1 M713 DRV A A RB to M713 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase A of M713 2 M713 DRV B B RB to M713 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase B of M713 Stacker section 47 Finisher unit explanation Stapler section Composition Stapler R Stapler rotation motor M706 Ny Stapler movement motor M711 Clincher rotation motor M704 Stapler rotation HP PS PS713 Nr Clincher R Clincher rotation HP PS PS714 Clincher F Staple SW R SW702 Staple SW F SW704 Stapler R F Cartridge SW R SW701 Cartridge SW F SW703 Clincher R F Stapler HP PS R PS730 Stapler HP PS F PS731 Stapler motor R M709 y Clincher motor R M710 Stapler motor F M714 Clincher HP PS R PS732 Clincher motor F M715 Clincher HP PS F PS733 48 Finisher unit explanation ENWW Mechanism Stapler rotation motor M706 stepping motor and timing
85. power cord from the wall outlet e Drum cleaner isopropyl alcohol and roller cleaner acetone based are highly flammable and must be handled with care A risk of fire exists e Do not replace the cover or turn the MFP on before any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated O A risk of fire exists e Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid If this happens immediately wipe it off A risk of fire exists 14 Safety ENWW N WARNING Handling of service materials When using any solvent ventilate the room well Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort Toner and developer are not harmful substances but care must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with eyes and so forth It may be stimulative If the substances get in the eye rinse with plenty of water immediately When symptoms are noticeable consult a physician eo Never throw the used toner bottle and toner into fire You may be burned due to dust explosion Measures to take in case of an accident If an accident has occurred the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer an on site evaluation must be carried
86. power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull out the ADU stand from the MFP 2 Remove the two springs 3 Open the pre transfer jam handler to remove the pre transfer roller assembly Pre transfer jam handler Pre transfer roller assembly Springs 194 MFP disassembly assembly 4 Remove the E ring to remove the pre transfer roller from the shaft CAUTION When reinstalling pay attention to the position of the E ring Pre transfer roller E ring 5 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Cleaning the automatic document feeder paper reverse PS PS45 Reverse Exit PS PS46 WARNING The interlock which is turned off when the front right or left door opens or closes should never be turned on forcibly with the ADU stand pulled out CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull out the ADU stand from the MFP 2 Remove the fuser See Fuser on page 208 3 Remove the ADU cover 4 Remove one screw to remove the ground plate 5 Remove the open close spring from the paper exit side open close wire ENWW Open close a a AFA wire N Open close Automatic document E spring feeder reverse guide assembly nm plate Screw 6 Remove two screws to remove the open close wire assembly
87. reinstalling the stacker UNIP COVER ee 74 Removing and reinstalling the stacker UN bse SG hao cae we Pe el Se de bee 74 Stapler section 000000 00s 76 Removing and reinstalling the stapler unit COVET 26 aaa 76 Removing and reinstalling the clincher 77 Removing and reinstalling the stapler 78 Index ENWW ENWW Finisher overview Stapler stacker Q3633A and multifunction finisher Q3634A product specifications 1 0 0 0 0 00 0 cee 2 Types ana owen Coe Gh mkha an haha 2 FUNCIONS sn cee esc lg ANA aa EG etn Bursa 2 Staple Mode 1 4 2 sy aout added we oe debated 4 Booklet mode Q3634A only 1 0 0 0 0 00 e eee eee eee 4 Tri folding mode Q3634A only a 4 Options aaa kana Th beat Meee ora gang ee dee eee eer 4 Machine specifications 0 2222 nennen een nen 4 Maintenances id ists 5 Operating environment 0000 ccc eee eee eae 5 Cross section diagram 0 0 cee 6 Drive system diagram 0 000 tees 7 Paper conveyance drive 000 c eee eee eee 7 Stacker drive oii amd kaaa a adie duke aera amie 8 Cielo AAP AP AA 9 Tray OVA aa bee eka a a elk ea ein ae 10 Folding GVE oca ar dai eee 11 Paper conveyance PAD 12 NOn SOn MODE a abaka Kan een 13 Sort and group modes 0c eens 14 Sub tray mode ooo 15 Slaple AA an 16 Booklet modes a une een a 18 Tri f lding mode naarawan GH raeas a dd 19 Finisher overview Stapler st
88. remove the two bearings outward to remove the pick roller unit Pick roller unit nap ring Snap ring 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse Paper feed section 17 HCI disassembly assembly Replacing the pick roller 6 Remove the snap ring to pull the feed rubber feed roller rubber roller from the shaft 7 Remove the rubber from each roller CAUTION If HCI is connected to the MFP make sure that the Pick roller rubber Coupling MFP power plug is disconnected from the power outlet Procedure 1 Remove the pick roller unit 2 Remove the bearing and paper feed po 9 Shaft Feed roller reference actuator Ng Snap ring Paint mark Feed roller rubber O 8 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse Bearing CAUTION Make sure rollers and rubber portions are oriented properly when Bearing reinstalling them 3 Remove two snap rings Make sure the one way 4 Remove two bearings outward to detach clutch direction is correct the roller section from the roller fitting Check whether grease is Roller fitting Bearing present on each roller Snap rings y Bearing 5 Remove the bearing from the opposite side of the coupling then remove the pick roller from the shaft 18 HCI disassembly assembly ENWW Replacing the separation roller rubber CAUTION Procedure CAUTION If HCI is connected to the MFP make sure that the MFP power plug i
89. roller 207 V Contents Removing and reinstalling the fuser 208 Removing and reinstalling the fuser A e a a 208 Removing and reinstalling the web COVEN area 209 Removing and reinstalling the cleaning web 210 Replacing the fusing heater lamps E PIN ee 210 Replacing the fusing heater lamp L4 212 Removing and reinstalling the fusing separation claw upper unit and fusing separation claws upper 213 Removing and reinstalling the fusing separation claw lower unit and fusing separation claws lower 214 Removing and reinstalling the fusing upper roller 214 Removing and reinstalling the fusing lower roller o o 215 Removing and reinstalling the decurler roller 216 Removing and reinstalling the fusing temperature sensors 1 and2 217 Removing and reinstalling the thermostat U TS1 218 Removing and reinstalling the thermostat L TS2 220 6 Product comparison hp LaserJet 9055mfp 9065mfp list of differences a 224 A Environmental Product Stewardship Program Environmental Product Stewardship Program papasa wahahah hana pitaka 226 Protecting the environment 226 B Terminology cross reference Terminology cross reference for the MFP 228 Index vi ENWW ENWW How to use this manu Manual contents Manual organization al How to use this man
90. sectional view Charging corona section PCL Laser Scanner Cleaning section Developing section Fixing section Second paper feed section Tray 1 Paper exit section Paper reverse exit section Transfer corona section AT Tray 2 A TSL gs Tray 3 Vertical conveyance section nana ae ul ADU Automatic Duplex Unit Separation corona section Paper conveyance section ENWW Central cross sectional view 27 MFP overview Drive system diagram Fuser web drive section Cleaning web unwinding shaft Web SD SD2 Fixing input gear Fixing upper roller Fixing lower roller Fixing motor M4 Decurler roller Oe F Reverse gate SD SD7 28 MFP overview ENWW Drum drive section Separation claw swing cam Separation claw SD SD1 Drum motor M2 Separation claw section Toner conveyance screw Toner guide roller Agitator screws 0 o Agitator wheel a ENWW Drive system diagram 29 MFP overview Paper feed vertical conveyance tray up drive sections Pick roller Paper feed MC MC3 5 7 Pre registration MC MC4 6 8 Feed roller Pre registration roller
91. sheets of copied paper in piles Copied paper 5 sheets Amount of curl Pa t 4 Punch kit data Power source DC24V DC5V supplied from finisher Maximum power consumption 40VA Punch kit dimensions 130 mm W by 470 mm D by 115 mm H Weight Approximately 3 kg ENWW Punch Kit product specifications 3 Punch kit overview Center cross sectional view Punch section Entrance roller Main body Conveyance roller A Conveyance roller B Punch scraps box Intermediate conveyance roller Stacker entrance roller 4 Punch kit overview ENWW Drive system diagram Punch section Punch motor M801 Yam a KO Eccentric cam O T Drive arm Punch edge N Moving section Rack Punch unit Belt Guide shafts Punch shift motor M802 FRONT ENWW Drive system diagram 5 Punch kit overview Punching process Punch Kit consists of the following sections Shift roller Conveyance roller B Intermediate conveyance roller Punch section Entrance roller Main body Conveyance roller A Stacker entrance roller Punch scraps box Note The punching process differs between the punch mode holes are made and non punch mode no holes are made Either of these modes can be selected on the control panel of the MF
92. spring fusing plate and tighten each screw Cleaning the ADF glass and scanner glass CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Remove the original stopper plates left and rear scanner glass and top cover right left front center and rear center See External section on page 132 2 Remove two screws to detach the ADF glass ENWW 3 Place the removed ADF glass and scanner glass on a rag and clean with drum cleaner and a cleaning pad ADF glass 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse Scanner section 147 MFP disassembly assembly Replacing the scanner motor M11 CAUTION CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Remove the ADF unit original stopper plates left and rear scanner glass and top cover right left front center and rear center See External section on page 132 Make sure to install the belt in the middle of two pulleys Also make sure that the belt is not placed on the edges of pulleys or that it is running off from the pulleys Tighten the motor by first tightening the screw and then give it one turn to loosen slightly Scanner Belt 2 Remove one connector CN639 from the auto paper timing PS PS51 Connector CN639 0l A
93. stacker section at the same time 4 Third and subsequent sheets of the second and subsequent sets The third and subsequent sheets of the second and subsequent sets are conveyed to the stacker in the same manner as the sheets of the first set Folding and stitch and folding modes The finisher operation signal from the MFP lets M713 stacker entrance start to rotate at a high speed When PS705 stacker entrance has detected the rear end of the paper the rotation speed of M713 changes to low conveying the paper slowly to the stacker Then after a predefined time has elapsed the rotation returns to the high speed mode to prepare for the next conveyance of paper When the last sheet of the set has been aligned M713 stops When PS725 folding paper exit has detected the rear end of the set M713 stacker entrance returns to its high speed rotation mode to prepare for the next paper conveyance ENWW d Tri folding mode The finisher operation signal from the MFP lets M713 stacker entrance start to rotate at a high speed When P5705 stacker entrance has detected the trailing edge of the paper the rotation speed of M713 changes to low conveying the paper slowly to the stacker Then after a predefined time has elapsed the rotation returns to the high speed mode to prepare for the next conveyance of paper When the last sheet of the set has been aligned and the booklet stopper has moved to the tri folding
94. stopper lowers to the stitch and fold position The flat stapling stopper is released as the booklet stopper lowers 4 The paper is conveyed to the booklet stopper to line up sheets in the lengthwise direction 5 The alignment plate U and alignment plate L line up each sheet in the widthwise direction 6 When the stitch and fold mode is selected the sheets are stapled by the stapler and the clincher 7 The booklet stopper lowers to the folding position for setting the paper to the folding position 8 The folding knife and the folding roller fold the sheets which are delivered to the booklet tray Paper exit opening unit Entrance roller Main tray N Conveyance roller A Conveyance roller B Alignment plate U 7 Intermediate conveyance Paper exit belt Ls KS on A a Stacker entrance roller Na Swing belt SEN NA y Flat stapling stopper Clincher Folding knife Stapler Folding roller Alignment plate L Booklet stopper Booklet tray 18 Finisher overview ENWW Tri folding mode 1 The gates are set to the position to carry paper to the stacker 2 The paper exit opening opens 3 The booklet stopper lowers to the stitch and fold position The flat stapling stopper is released as the booklet stopper lowers 4 The paper is conveyed to the booklet stopper to line up in the lengthwise direction 5 The alignment plate U and the alignment plate L line up each sheet in the widthwise direction 6 Th
95. the ADU stand from the MFP 2 Detach the ADU cover 3 Remove the second paper feed unit 4 Turn the second paper feed unit upside down and clean the registration PS PS44 with a blower brush Registration PS PS44 5 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Removing and reinstalling the registration roller Bearing WARNING The interlock which is turned off when the front right or left door opens or closes should never be turned on forcibly with the ADU stand pulled out CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull out the ADU stand from the MFP 2 Detach the ADU cover 3 Remove the second paper feed unit 4 Remove the registration MC MC1 5 Turn the second paper feed unit upside down and remove the E ring on the front of the registration roller 6 Remove the two E rings one on the left and the other on the right and one bearing from the registration roller 7 Slide the registration roller to the front then remove it by lifting the rear end Registration roller kk 5 8 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW ADF unit 193 MFP disassembly assembly Removing and reinstalling the pre transfer roller WARNING The interlock which is turned off when the front right or left door opens or closes should never be turned on forcibly with the ADU stand pulled out CAUTION Be sure the
96. the ADUDB ADU drive board operation state to PRCB printer control board 2 REQ1 ADUDB to PRCB This signal indicates that sending data from ADUDB ADU drive board to PRCB printer control board is requested When ADUDB receives ACK1 and can send data this signal stands at the L level 3 IO_UCLK ADUDB to PRCB Clock signal for IO_URXD signal b Output signals 1 SEP_CLM_MA B ADUDB to M10 M10 transfer separation cleaning drive control signal The drive direction of M10 transfer separation cleaning drive control signal The drive direction of M10 is controlled by switching between the drive current directions of two signals Status SEP CLM MA SEP CLM MB Forward H L stroke of cleaning Backward L H stroke of cleaning Stop L L Corona unit section 61 MFP unit explanation 2 O DTXD PRCB to ADUDB PRCB printer control board TSL is driven Serial data used to report the by ADUDB ADU drive board PCL and TSL machine operation state understood are controlled by PROB by PRCB printer control board to 1 Operation ADUDB ADU drive board PCL turns on when the START button is 3 IO_DCLK PRCB to ADUDB pressed It is turned off after a lapse of the F specified time from turning on of PS37 CIR Signar TE TAG signal paper exit TSL turns on after a lapse of 4 ADU_LATCH PRCB to ADUDB the specified time from turning on of PS43 Latch signal for IO_DTXD signal leading ed
97. the end of the inner wire Pull out the outer wire from above the drive pulley in the paper exit direction and the inner wire from under the drive pulley in the paper feed direction 4 After winding the outer wire secure it to the wire stopper via the outside of pulley 1 and V mirror pulley through the notch in the wire stopper Four turns 4 kana A e gt paa LAD Metal bead Four turns Five turns Metal bead Wire stopper Metal bead Pulley 1 Exposure unit mounting piece Pd O ws V mirror pulley ka Pulley 1 EE Wire stopper V mirror unit a a lt a po Exposure unit a A XE Pulley 3 gt lt sA mounting piece kc 9 IN 7 F x Drive pulley 5 lt P Wire stopper Pulley 2 7 M Front 5 Spring fixing plate Drive pulley 7 Screws 6 Spring fixing plate Pulley 3 V mirror pulley Pulley 2 Metal bead N Wire stopper 146 MFP disassembly assembly ENWW CAUTION There are two grooves in the wire stopper Ensure that the outer groove is at the rear and the inner groove is at the front 5 Reverse the inner wire at pulley 2 pass it along the inside of the V mirror pulley and pulley 3 then attach the wire terminal to the spring fusing plate At this time secure the spring fusing plate temporarily with one screw 6 Install the other wire following the same procedure 7 Loosen each screw that was tightened temporarily install the spring on the
98. the heater lamp be sure to insert the lamp end in the lamp terminal securely Also check that the Faston terminals are connected properly Procedure 1 Open the fusing cover upper 2 Remove the screw at front to remove the lamp fusing plate lower front 212 MFP disassembly assembly 3 Remove the Faston terminal 4 Remove the rear lamp harness from the two harness guide to remove the Faston terminal Harness guides Faston terminal Lamp fixing plate rear ENWW 5 Pull out the fusing heater lamp L4 from the front side of the fusing lower roller Fixing heater lamp L4 6 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION When installing the lamp pay attention to its orientation The lamp cannot be installed properly if it is facing the opposite direction Removing and reinstalling the fusing separation claw upper unit and fusing separation claws upper Procedure 1 Remove the fuser 2 Remove the fuser front cover 3 Remove the web cover 4 Remove the screw to detach the fixture ENWW 5 Remove the fusing separation claw upper unit Fixing separation claw upper unit Screw 6 Remove the screw to remove the upper separation claw support shaft from the fusing separation claw upper unit CAUTION Be careful when removing the shaft because it bends easily 7 Remove six springs attached to the
99. the leading edge of the original Scanner section 51 MFP unit explanation Laser scanner unit Composition Laser driver board LDB Collimator lens unit Polygon mirror f0 lens Mechanisms Mechanism Method Scan 1 Polygon mirror Light source 2 1 chip 2 beam laser diode Power 15 mW per beam Reference positioning Index sensor 1 Path of laser light The light output from the semiconductor laser is radiated onto the OPC drum via the collimator lens cylindrical lens 1 polygon mirror fe lens cylindrical lens 2 and write mirror 52 MFP unit explanation Index sensor board INDXSB Index mirror Semiconductor laser Write mirror Collimator lens Ng Cylindrical lens 1 Ts E Polygon mirror Paa f0 lens 7 a Cylindrical lens 2 ENWW 2 Light source Conventionally two parallel beams were generated from two laser beams The laser diode adopted for this machine can generate two beams using a single chip requiring neither fine adjustment prism nor beam composition prism M15 polygon control POLM_CLK POLM_LOCK M15 polygon is driven by PMDB polygon drive board and is controlled by PRCB printer control board 1 Operation a Explanation of operation M15 is a 3 phase brushless DC motor which is driven by the 3 phase bipolar method The current flowing through the coil is switched according to t
100. the solenoid 1 Install the separation claw unit to the drum unit 2 Tighten the solenoid screw when the claw closest to the drum touches the drum Bottom surface of the drum unit Separation claw SD Screws Drum unit Separation claw 3 Set the drum unit to the MFP and check that the tips of the separation claws are off the drum Standard clearance More than 0 mm up to 1mm Drum unit 157 MFP disassembly assembly Removing and reinstalling the toner control sensor board CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Remove the drum unit from the MFP 2 Remove the drum 3 Remove the separator claw solenoid assembly 4 Remove the connector CN362 5 Remove three screws and remove the toner control sensor board ka FE SS CN362 Toner control sensor board TCSB 158 MFP disassembly assembly 6 Clean the sensors of the toner control sensor board the Dmax maximum contrast jam sensor at the front and the y sensor at the back using a blower brush drum cleaner and a cleaning pad Toner conveyance screw Sp ST an _ I Dmax jam sensor 7 sensor 7 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION When reinstalling the toner control sensor board TCSB tighten the shoulder screws and then verify that the board move
101. turns off after a specified time With the same timing MC203 changes its rotating speed to low speed and comes into feeding operation for the next sheet d Detection of sheet size VR201 VR202 sheet size U L detect the sheet width Sheet length is detected by the combination of PS203 PS208 sheet setting U L and PS212 sheet size L 12 Post insertion unit explanation VR201 sheet size U VR212 sheet size L Width regulation VR202 sheet size L PS208 sheet setting L PS203 sheet setting U 2 Signals a Input signals 1 PS201 IN PS201 to PIDB Detection signal of sheet passage on upper tray L Sheet passed H Sheet not passed 2 PS202 IN PS202 to PIDB Detection signal of no sheet on upper tray L Sheet detected H Sheet not detected 3 PS203 IN PS203 to PIDB Detection signal of sheet setting on upper tray L Sheet detected H Sheet not detected 4 PS204 IN PS204 to PIDB Detection signal of upper limit of up down plate U L Positioned at upper limit H Not positioned at upper limit 5 PS205 IN PS205 to PIDB Detection signal of lower limit of up down plate U L Positioned at lower limit H Not positioned at lower limit ENWW 6 PS206 IN PS206 to PIDB Detection signal of sheet passage on lower tray L Sheet passed H Sheet not passed 7 PS207 IN PS207 to PIDB Detection signal of no sheet on lower tray L Sheet detected H Sheet not detected 8 PS208 IN
102. unit positioning tool Exposure unit fixing hole Unused hole For exposure unit positioning Exposure unit Stopping surface STE A N Optics unit positioning tool V mirror unit fixing hole left 4 Install the exposure unit to the optics wire mounting bracket with four screws 5 Remove two optics unit positioning tools 6 Reverse the removal procedure to reinstall the removed parts ENWW Installing the optics wire CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet When winding the optics wire around the pulley be sure to run the wire tightly so that it does not ride on the side of the pulley Then re tensioning or replacing the optics wire be sure to use the optics positioning tool Be sure to perform image adjustment after replacing or re installing the wire Procedure 1 Remove the exposure unit 2 Move the V mirror unit toward the paper exit side then insert the optics positioning tools from the front to secure the V mirror unit Ensure that the optics positioning tools pass through the V mirror unit 3 Place the metal bead at the midpoint of each optics wire in the mounting hole in the drive pulley Starting at this point wind the optics wire five turns to the outside and four times to the inside on the drive pulley Scanner section 145 MFP disassembly assembly CAUTION Ensure that there is a metal bead at the end of the outer wire and a wire terminal at
103. upper limit BP detects the paper upper limit Paper size detection control and turns on M20 turns off to stop pushing up paper When paper is fed and consequently PS34 turns off M20 BPSIZE_S PS turns on again maintaining the upper Sone limit position of paper b Paper up timing 5VA 1 ON timing BPSIZE VR PRCB At start of copying 2 OFF timing The size of paper in the Tray 1 is detected by PS31 paper size 1 BP PS32 paper size 2 BP and VR5 paper size BP Based on the detection signals PRCB printer control board judges the paper size M20 up down motor BP is turned off when PS34 tray upper limit BP is turned on c Paper down timing 1 Operation 1 ON timi nd The length of paper is detected by PS31 When there is no paper or a paper paper size 1 BP and PS32 paper jam occurs size 2 BP Tray 1 is provided with a 2 OFF timing variable resistor VRS interlocked with the f guide position to judge the paper width M20 up down motor BP is turned off according to the change in the resistance when PS35 tray lower limit BP is value tured on The relationships between the sensors 2 Signals and paper sizes lengths are as follows a PRCB input signals Paper size 8 5by11 A4R to F4 or Sensor or less B5R larger 1 BPUP_PS PS34 to PRCB PS31 OFF ON ON Paper upper limit position detection PS32 OFF OFF ON signal Tray 1 L Not detected 2 Signals H Detected a PRCB input signals 2 B
104. upper tray paper exit control an Main tray section c tees EOMPOSITON kersa co Na E iae ALAPAN AA ears sande MECA Mii maamin be id el a ii pa M703 tray up down control n seen nen St cker section ds de a a Comp siti n a cot BAGAL Vd acta dee a hd Ga Mechas Mov saomcps mya Kama non BANTAYANANG KAN a aa a M705 alignment U control 00 ee M716 alignment L control Q3634A only 0000 M718 folding stopper control Q3634A only M713 stacker entrance control Stapler section Composition Mechanism Stapler movement control Staple control Folding Tri folding section Q3634A only 00 000 e eee Composition Mechanism M719 folding knife control M720 folding conveyance control a SD706 tri folding gate control 22 22 22 24 24 24 28 29 29 30 31 33 33 34 36 36 36 37 39 39 39 42 43 44 46 48 48 49 51 53 56 56 57 58 59 60 21 Finisher unit explanation External section Composition Main paper exit cover Main tray Rear cover Booklet paper exit cover e Q3634A only Booklet tray Q3634A only Mechanism Upper tray Mechanism Method Jam removal 1 Through the rotation of roller s and the opening closing operation of the guide plates
105. washer one screw and bearing in this order 216 MFP disassembly assembly 6 From the rear side remove one E ring one washer one screw and bearing in this order and then remove the decurler roller from the frame Fixing exit guide plate lower 22 a Screw JA eii pag E ring Washer Screw Fixing exit guide plate upper Fixing exit guide plate lower Bearing Washer E ring Gear E ring Jam handling release knob 7 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION When reinstalling check that the gear is installed correctly ENWW Removing and reinstalling the fusing temperature sensors 1 and 2 CAUTION After reinstalling fusing temperature sensor 2 make sure that the sensor touches the fusing upper roller Make sure the sensor wires do not touch the fusing upper roller When reinstalling fusing temperature sensor 1 adjust its position using the positioning tool 7050K0010 and secure it with screws Be sure to apply screw lock agent to the screws This adjustment should be made in a pressured state Removal procedure 1 Remove the fuser 2 Remove the web cover 3 Remove the cleaning web 4 Disconnect the two inline connectors fusing temperature sensor 1 CN52 fusing temperature sensor 2 CN53 and release the sensor wires from the cable guides 5 Remove two screws to detach fusing temperature sensor 1 ENWW 6 Remove one screw to detach fusing
106. 05 IN GND 5V PS725 IN GND has elapsed the rotation returns to the high speed mode to prepare for the next conveyance of paper When the last sheet of the set has passed through and the stapling operation has started M713 stops When M708 paper exit has closed the opening the rotation of M713 changes to a high speed to prepare for the conveyance of the paper to be stapled b Staple mode for sheets of paper sizes A4 B5 and 8 5 by 11 with bypass feature 1 Sheets of the first set The sheets of the first set are processed in the same way as in the staple mode described above for sheets of all paper sizes except A4 B5 and 8 5 by 11 without bypass feature 2 First sheets of the second and subsequent sets When PS705 stacker entrance has detected the rear end of the last sheet ENWW of the first set and a predefined time period has elapsed M713 stacker entrance stops This action ensures that the stapling of the first set completes before the sheets of the second set are fed to the stacker section the first sheet waits on the bypass channel 3 Second sheets of the second and subsequent sets When PS704 finisher entrance has detected the trailing edge of the second sheet of the second and subsequent sets and a predefined time period has elapsed M713 stacker entrance rotates as a high speed This action allows the first and second sheets to be conveyed to the
107. 2 Punch scraps full PS PS802 Punch edges 3 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse 22 Punch kit disassembly assembly ENWW Index C center cross sectional view 4 curl amount of 3 D diameter of holes 2 dimensions machine 3 drive system diagram 5 E environment operating 3 H holes diameter 2 number of 2 pitch 2 positions 2 humidity 3 maintenance 3 moving section 5 N non punch mode paper 2 number of holes 2 O operating environment 3 P paper amount of curl 3 non punch mode 2 not supported in punch mode 3 punch mode 3 pitch of holes 2 position of holes 2 power consumption 3 power source 3 ENWW product specifications 2 PS802 punch waste full PS 22 punch control 13 punch edges 22 punch mode overview 8 paper 3 punch position correction 8 punch section diagram 5 removing and reinstalling 20 theory of operation 12 punch unit 20 punch waste box section 16 punch waste conveyance control 17 punch waste full PS PS802 22 punching method 2 punching process 6 R registration loop formation 7 S specifications product 2 standby position movement 6 T temperature 3 W weight machine 3 23 Index 24 Index ENWW 3 in vent 2003 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P www hp com Q3631 90908
108. 233 Index drum cleaning 155 removing and reinstalling 155 drum M2 control 42 drum drive section diagram 29 drum motor M2 138 drum unit removing and reinstalling 152 theory of operation 56 dust proof glass 151 E environmental conditions 26 environmental product stewardship program 226 E RDH memory capacity 26 exposure control 48 exposure lamp 142 exposure unit 143 external covers 133 external section removing and reinstalling 132 theory of operation 40 F FCC Class A statement 16 FCOT first copy out time 25 feed clutches MCs Tray 3 181 Trays 2 and 3 175 first copy out time 25 first paper feed control Tray 1 bypass tray 90 Tray 2 3 77 Tray 4 84 fixed magnifications 25 FM4 developing suction control 69 fuser M4 control 42 fuser top 208 fuser drive section diagram 28 fuser temperature control 114 fuser unit removing and reinstalling 208 theory of operation 111 fusing heater lamp L2 L3 210 L4 212 fusing input gear 140 fusing lower roller 215 fusing separation claw unit lower 214 upper 213 234 Index fusing separation claws lower 214 upper 213 fusing temperature sensors 1 and 2 217 fusing upper roller 214 G gradation correction control 67 ground lead warnings 9 H HP LaserJet 9055mfp 9065mfp comparison 224 humidity specifications 26 warnings 10 image write control 53 inspection warnings 11 installation requirements 10 installation type 25 L L2 fusing heater lamp 210 L
109. 3 fusing heater lamp 210 L4 fusing heater lamp 212 laser scanner unit removing and reinstalling 150 theory of operation 52 laser scanner assembly 150 LaserJet 9055mfp 9065mfp comparison 224 leading edge PS PS43 189 loop paper feed control 101 M10 transfer separation cleaning control 61 M11 scanner motor 148 M11 scanner control 45 M12 toner supply control 72 M14 charger cleaning control 60 M15 polygon control 53 M16 web drive control 113 M2 drum motor 138 M2 drum control 42 M3 developing control 63 M4 fuser control 42 magnifications 25 main power parts energized when off 116 parts operational when on 117 maintenance 26 manual how to use 1 ENWW material safety data sheets MSDS 226 maximum contrast control 65 MC1 registration MC 190 MC11 vertical conveyance MC 187 MC 12 vertical conveyance MC 187 MCs pre registration and feed clutches Tray 3 181 Trays 2 and 3 175 memory capacity E RDH 26 modifications unauthorized 5 N no paper detection control Tray 1 bypass tray 92 Tray 2 3 81 Tray4 87 non operational handling warning 10 O on site service checkpoints 6 optics drive section diagram 35 optics wire 145 option control 126 original read control 48 overview MFP 24 ozone filter 132 P paper conveyance control 103 paper dust removing brush 188 paper exit control 104 paper exit drive section diagram 34 paper feed drive section diagram 30 paper feed trays 25 paper feed
110. 3 torque limiter 20 U upper tray copy sizes 2 WwW weight machine 2 22 ENWW hp LaserJet 9055mfp 9065mfp punch kit Q3689A Q3635A Q3690A Q3691A Contents 1 Punch kit overview Punch Kit product specifications 2 WV OGM ee een 2 Funeli ns oa a caine tape dtc dane tees 2 Applicable paper 2 Punch kit data 3 Maintenance 0 0000 3 Operating environment 3 Center cross sectional view 4 Drive system diagram 222222220 5 Punch section aaa 5 Moving section 2 00 5 Punching process 00 0 0000 6 Movement of the standby position of the punch unit 6 Formation of a registration loop 7 Correction of the punch position 8 PUNCH anumang ma ee 8 2 Punch kit unit explanation Punch section 2 2222er een 12 Composition 2 222222 12 Mechanisms piurensis 13 Punch control o ooooo oooo 13 Punch waste box section 16 Composition 000085 16 Mechanisms 2 00s 16 Punch waste conveyance control 17 3 Punch kit disassembly assembly Punch section eee eee 20 Screws that should not be removed 20 Replacing the punch unit 20 Cleaning the punch edges and punch waste full PS PS802 22 Index ENWW Contents ENWW ENWW Punc
111. 302 Reverse gate drive SD SD301 Original exit roller Drive system diagram 5 ADF overview Original conveyance process The ADF consists of an original feed section conveyance section reversal section and original exit section Original feed section Conveyance section j LI Original exit section ADF glass Read section The original face up on the original feed tray is fed from the topmost original The fed original is not conveyed to the original glass Instead it is read when it passes the ADF glass placed in the conveyance path The ADF operation consists of single side original copy mode double side original copy mode mixed original copy mode and Z fold mode Each has a different conveyance path Single side original copy mode single side to single side single side to double side The original set in the original feed tray is pressed to the pick roller by the original pressing board The pick roller and feed roller pre feed the original until the original registration PS 1 PS304 turns on and original reaches the registration roller 6 ADF overview Feed roller Registration roller NA va saga ER Is bi Original pressing board Original registration PS 1 PS304 After completing the registration loop the registration roller re feeds the original and the original is conveyed to the read section The original is conveyed by the conveyance roll
112. 715 on H M715 off c RB output signals 1 M709 DRV 1 RB to M709 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase A of M709 2 M709 DRV 2 RB to M709 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase B of M709 3 M710 F RB to M710 Pulse signal to start or stop the normal rotation of M7 10 4 M710 R RB to M710 Pulse signal to start or stop the reverse rotation of M710 5 M714 DRV 1 RB to M714 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase A of M714 6 M714 DRV 2 RB to M714 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase B of M714 7 M715 F RB to M715 Pulse signal to start or stop the normal rotation of M715 8 M715 R RB to M710 Pulse signal to start or stop the reverse rotation of M715 Stapler section 55 Finisher unit explanation Folding Tri folding section Q3634A only Composition Three folding gate SD SD706 Folding paper exit PS P5725 Three folding gate Folding conveyance M720 Q A W 53 gt AR Three folding stopper 0 A Folding full PS PS729 LA N NN N Folding knife HP AYY ww E Pr AY PS PS722 I NS Folding knife Z AS IB Folding roller Three folding roller Booklet stopper Three folding gate SD SD706 Folding paper exit PS PS725 Three folding gate Folding knife HP PS P5722 Folding roller N Folding knife IG Folding full PS P8729 Three folding stopper Three folding roller Folding full LED LED729 IN Folding passage P
113. 82 Wirellength8 a a Rie hee ready ao ra de es 183 Installing Wire 8 a 2 42 ee dat eres Sass 184 Tray MGA Ree mean Math le hb An det teed ay al NLA GEN bhala HAL aha 185 Removing and reinstalling Tray 1 0000 e eee eee 185 Replacing the paper pick roller paper pick roller rubber 185 Replacing the separation roller rubber 20 000005 186 Vertical conveyance section eee 187 Removing and reinstalling the vertical conveyance section 187 Removing and reinstalling the vertical conveyance MC ME 14 MC12 12 2 2a Hera 187 ADE Unit re PA 188 Pulling out and reinstalling the ADU stand 188 Cleaning the paper mis centering PS PS70 leading edge PS PS43 A tt Ba aa AG Ma tte cuca ANA Back yaaa tbe 189 Removing and reinstalling the registration MC MC1 190 Removing and reinstalling the second paper feed unit registration ASSEMDIY os cctac tuts tie hla KGAD LL aa eee 191 Cleaning the registration PS PS44 000000 a ee 192 Removing and reinstalling the registration roller 193 Removing and reinstalling the pre transfer roller 194 Cleaning the automatic document feeder paper reverse PS PS45 Reverse Exit PS PS46 cece eee 195 Removing and reinstalling the ADF reverse roller 198 Removing and reinstalling the ADU stand 199 Removing and reinstalling the pre reg
114. A3 TA4 B4 B5 A4 A5 B5 A5 B6 R R R JR A3 O ho A4 O NN B4 I 90o B5 f amp a ls le OO O A4R z lala OOO O I IO A5 fe E OOOO O B5R X X 00000 A5R X X IX Ix Xx Xx 1x B6R X X X X X X X 1 Memory switch in the key operator mode needs to be changed to use the inch series Original feed conveyance exit section 19 ADF unit explanation 2 Inch series 2 Reference original maximum size original detectable with guide plate 11x17 8 5x11 8 5x14 8 5x11R 8 5x 5 5 8 5x 5 5R 11x17 O 8 5x11 O pad CO O JO babad CH ON Ke O OO lo lo 8 5x5 5R X X X X X 2 Memory switch in the key operator mode needs to be changed to use the AB series 3 Signals a Input signals 1 SIG PS309 to SCDB Original horizontal dimension detection signal L Original present H No original 2 SIG PS310 to SCDB Original horizontal dimension detection signal L Original present H No original 3 SIG VR301 to SCDB Original vertical dimension detection signal b Output signal 1 PS309_SIG SCDB to PRCB See Input signal 2 PS310_SIG SCDB to PRCB See Input signal 3 VR301_SIG SCDB to PRCB See Input signal 20 ADF unit explanation ENWW ENWW ADF disassembly assembly External section sico iia is tena se Se a een 22
115. AEJGO11 a Set the distance b between the thermostat L and the fusing lower roller so that it is equal to the thickness of the positioning tool Fixing lower roller Thermostat L TS2 Standard value of a 1 75 0 25mm ENWW b After setting the distance b remove the thermostat L positioning tool and make sure that the part b thermostat L positioning tool cannot be inserted in a space between the fusing lower roller and the thermostat L Part a Part b 2 Apply screw lock agent to the two screws securing the thermostat L 3 Reverse the removal procedure to reinstall other parts Fuser 221 MFP disassembly assembly 222 MFP disassembly assembly ENWW ENWW Product comparison hp LaserJet 9055mfp 9065mfp list of differences 223 Product comparison hp LaserJet 9055mfp 9065mfp list of differences revolutions 21 850rpm thick paper 21 850rpm thick paper Classification 9065 9055 Reason Warm up time 6 minutes max 5 5 minutes max CPM change First copy out time A4 3 1 seconds or shorter 3 4 seconds or shorter CPM change Continuous copy speed A4 65 copies min 55 copies min CPM change 8 Developer Common to 9065 9055 o Toner E 2 Drum G o o Linear speed 320 mm s standard 280 mm s standard CPM change 185 mm s thick paper 185 mm s thick paper Polygon motor 37 795rpm standard 33 070rpm standard CPM change ADU drive
116. AUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull out the ADU stand See Pulling out and reinstalling the ADU stand on page 188 2 Turn the pressure release lever counterclockwise to release the pressure 3 Remove two screws and remove the fuser by lifting 208 MFP disassembly assembly CAUTION Do not hold the connector socket Remove by holding the pressure release lever and the holding end at the far side Connector socket holding end Pressure release Fixing unit lever 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION After installing the fuser turn the pressure release lever clockwise and return it to the original position Removing and reinstalling the fuser top CAUTION Before opening the fuser top check that the pressure release lever is turned counterclockwise and the bottom roller pressure is released Procedure 1 Remove the fuser 2 Remove one screw to detach the fuser front cover ENWW 3 Remove two screws to open the fuser top Fixing unit front cover 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Removing and reinstalling the web cover Procedure 1 Remove the fuser 2 Remove the fuser front cover 3 Open the fusing separation claw upper unit and remove two screws inside 4 Remove two screws to detach the web cover Fixing separation Web cover cla
117. D Wire C ae gic Drive pulley y Wire Black oS 6 Remove drive pulley holder lt lt and three E rings and pull out the drive pulley lt gt NI Wire A black 5 Remove wire D gt E ring Up down plate Wire B white 7 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to remove wire A and wire B Wire lengths 298 9 1 mm Tray 3 Wire A C 589 2 1 mm Tray 3 Wire B D ENWW Paper feed unit of Tray3 183 MFP disassembly assembly Installing wires 4 Install the pulley pass wires C and D and install the wire restraining cover and retaining ring Wire D must be inside Wires must not cross Wire ven cover Wire D Wire C white black J 2 Install the pulley pass wire D through the pulley and install the wire restraining cover and E ring Wire D white 1 Pass wire D through the up down plate Up down plate Wire B white 6 Repeat steps 1 to 4 to install wire A and wire B 184 MFP disassembly assembly 5 Install the wires C and D from inside the drive shaft hole push in the drive pulley and secure with E rings Wire D white Wire C black E ring a Drive pulley Install the wires A and B from inside the drive shaft hole push in the drive pulley and secure with E rings Next install the drive pulley holder Wire B a Wire A white black E ring E ring Pa gt Drive A N E ENWW Tray 1
118. Detection signal from PS212 14PS201 IN PIDB to finisher CB Detection signal of sheet passage on upper tray L Sheet passed H Sheet not passed 15PS206 IN PIDB to finisher CB Detection signal of sheet passage on lower tray L Sheet passed H Sheet not passed 16VR201 IN PIDB to finisher CB Detection signal of sheet size on upper tray ENWW 17VR202 IN PIDB to finisher CB Detection signal of sheet size on lower tray 18MC203 DRV PIDB to MC203 Signal for driving MC203 L ON H OFF ENWW Paper feed unit 15 Post insertion unit explanation 16 Post insertion unit explanation ENWW ENWW Post insertion disassembly assembly External section a Siem sak aaa ek eae Ask e ej 18 Removing reinstalling the external covers 18 Paper feed Uniti occ kae ace das WG ADB EAR dee doom daw bhang 19 Replacing the paper pick roller and pick roller 19 Replacing the double feed prevent roller and torque limiter 20 17 Post insertion disassembly assembly This section explains how to disassemble and reassemble the MFP When disassembling and reassembling the MFP follow the precautions given below CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet The disassembled parts must be reassembled following the disassembly procedure in reverse unless otherwise specified Care should be taken not to lose small parts Care should al
119. ENWW up down plate in the tray moves up When the tray upper limit PS 1 PS2 2 PS8 detects the actuator of the roller that has been moved up by paper the tray up drive motor 1 M16 2 M17 stops b Lowering of tray When the paper feed tray is pulled out the coupling shaft of the tray is disengaged from the coupling gear of the tray up drive motor on the MFP side allowing the up down plate in the tray to fall down by its own weight Tray 2 3 paper feed unit 75 MFP unit explanation 2 Coupling Tray side Paper size detection Length When paper pushes the paper size detection actuator the paper size PS 2 1 2 2 PS6 PS12 and the paper size PS 1 1 1 2 PS5 PS11 turn on Thus the paper size is automatically determined according to the combination of the on off states of these PSs Width When the side guides of the tray are slid the rack gear of the side guide front turns the paper size VR 1 2 gear Thus the paper size is automatically determined according to the change in the resistance value of the VR Paper size VR gear Rack gear Side guide front 76 MFP unit explanation 3 First paper feed paper loop mechanism When paper feed starts paper is fed to the pre registration roller by the feed roller and pick rollers The fed out paper operates the actuator of the paper feed PS 1 PS1 the paper feed PS 2 PS7 turning it on The feed and pick rollers remain on for a spec
120. FP make sure that the MFP power plug is disconnected from the power outlet Procedure 1 Open the top cover 2 Remove six screws to detach the paper feed cover B 9 Fi e Screws J Top 7 cover Screws Paper feed cover B 16 HCI disassembly assembly 3 Insert a flat bladed screwdriver in the cavities in two locations for paper dust removing brush to release the locking lugs then remove the paper dust removing brush Paper dust removing brush Locking lugs 4 Clean the paper dust removing brush using a blower brush 5 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Cleaning the HCI feed PS PS106 HCI first paper feed PS PS107 CAUTION If HCI is connected to the MFP make sure that the MFP power plug is disconnected from the power outlet Procedure 1 Looking into the paper exit side of the HCI from below clean sensors through the cavity for HCI feed PS PS106 and the cavity for HCI first paper feed PS107 using a blower brush Cavity for PS106 Cavity for PS107 ENWW Removing and reinstalling the pick roller unit CAUTION If HCI is connected to the MFP make sure that the MFP power plug is disconnected from the power outlet Procedure 1 Open the top cover 2 Remove the spring from the pick roller unit Top cover Pick roller unit Pick roller unit 3 After removing two snap rings
121. Feed roller Pick roller Up down plate L Tray up down motor L M202 Separation roller Conveyance roller L Feeding process 5 Post insertion overview 6 Post insertion overview ENWW ENWW Post insertion unit expla nation External section una ada 8 Mechanisms 6000 Ka PAARALAN GANA in ore NLANG 8 Interlock control a a asarria a id pea aa 8 Paper feed Umit s soutaire r ether AGA NG NGA Aue Min cla 9 COMPOSItI N siaiu a dra a 9 MECHANISMS a pia ei c ete 9 Feed CONO noc io a a add dae A de den od 10 7 Post insertion unit explanation External section Composition Top cover Release lever Connecting cover Lower cover Upper tray Control panel cover Lower tray Mechanisms Interlock control Mechanism Method ff po a ay SAU Clearing paper jams 1 Release lever 24V 24V 4 Clearing paper jams Clear paper jams with the following FIDE procedure nnn 1 Lift the release lever Interlock control uses MS201 PI interlock MS that detects the opened upper tray 2 In that status lift up the upper tray ina slanting direction 1 Operation a Detecting the opened upper tray Top cover Release lever MS201 PI interlock is a switch for the interlock When opening the upper tray of PI MS201 goes off and 24V power from finisher CB is shut off 2 Signals a Input signals 1 24V 24V finisher CB to PIDB 3 Remove paper jams Input from a DC24V power source
122. K on ENWW Other kinds of control 125 MFP unit explanation Option control FNS Q3633A Q3634A HCl Q3637A Q3638A CV COPY VENDOR Options such as HCI and finisher are controlled by the PRCB printer control board 126 MFP unit explanation ENWW 1 Operation Finisher incorporates CB which exchanges only control data with PRCB printer control board of the MFP HCI finisher and HDD are powered by the DCPS DC power supply unit Functions and output timings of signals for copy vendors Connector Pin Signal name Description Output timing Signal type no 35 DV24V Key counter power supply Always 24 V 300 mA 2 C K SIG Key counter connection recognition C K GND Signal ground C K DRIVE Key counter signal count up 100 ms L signal output after paper ejection 5 P GND Power ground 36 1 Vendor Copy Copying signal Output from the moment START Open collector PRINT button is pressed to the 5V 200 mA moment paper ejection is completed 2 Vendor FEED Paper feed signal Common to MFP tray 100 ms L signal output in sync with paper feed 3 Paper size 0 Paper size signal Output when paper size is 4 Paper size 1 changed 5 Paper size 2 6 Paper size 3 7 Vendor screen Double sided copy selection Output when ADU mode
123. L FM5 on H FM5 off ENWW 6 CLFFAN D PRCB to FM5 FM5 cleaner cooling rotational speed control signal L Low speed H High speed 7 FIXFAN_D PRCB to FM6 FM6 paper exit F rotational speed control signal L Low speed H High speed 8 FIXFAN D PRCB to FM7 FM7 paper exit R ON OFF control signal L FM7 on H FM7 off 9 FIXFAN D PRCB to FM8 FM8 main cooling 2 ON OFF control signal L FM8 on H FM8 off 1024V DRV SCDB to FM9 FM9 scanner cooling ON OFF control signal L FM9 on H FM9 off 11ADU FAN 1 ADUSDB to FM10 FM10 ADU reverse motor cooling ON OFF control signal L FM10 on H FM10 off 12FAN1 DCPS to FM13 L FM13 on H FM13 off Other kinds of control 121 MFP unit explanation 13SCANFAN CONT 18 PRCB to SCDB FM9 scanner cooling ON OFF control signal L FM9 on H FM9 off Control panel control PAKB LCD OB INVB OB1 The control panel consists of OB1 operation board 1 PAKB panel key board and LCD indicator board The LCD has a backlight which is driven by OB IVNB OB inverter and touch switches which correspond to the display messages The control panel is controlled by the OB1 based on the serial data output from the ICB image control board 1 Operation a LED ON operation The LED on the OB1 operation board 1 is controlled by sub CPU of OB1 at the command of ICB image control board 122 MFP unit explanation
124. M varied in several steps and development is performed at the sleeve speed obtained by Dmax maximum contrast correction Next each density is read by the y sensor PD2 on TCSB toner control sensor board to detect the gradation characteristics of image density The gradation characteristics obtained here are used as the values for correcting the laser exposure amount Developing unit 67 MFP unit explanation Gradation correction control must be Dot diameter correction control performed in two ways 1 dot PWM for normal mode and 2 dot PWM for 12v photo mode GND A G _SIG_EX b Timing y LED_CONT 1 When the fuser temperature is lower than 50 C at SW2 sub power on TNLED_REF 2 Every 5 000 prints upon completion of the last job 2 Signals a Input signals 1 G_SIG_EX TCSB to PRCB This signal monitors the output Dot diameter is detected by TCSB toner voltage from the ysensor PD2 on control sensor board and is controlled by the TCSB toner control sensor PRCB printer control board board as well as the light reflected by the drum surface without toner 1 Operation The voltage applied to the gradation Dot diameter correction is performed to detection LED is corrected by prevent the 1 dot laser beam diameter TNLED_REF so that the output from fluctuating due to the change in voltage becomes 3 0 V calibration developing characteristics caused by deteriorated developer and soil in the laser sc
125. M201 FRONT Tray up down motor L M202 4 Post insertion overview ENWW Feeding process Automatic sheet feeding online operation Tray up down motors U L M201 M202 raise the Up down plate U L When sheet feed SD U L SD201 SD202 and conveyance MC U L MC201 MC202 come on the drive of PI conveyance motor M203 is transmitted and the sheets are fed one by one by pick feed and separation rollers For the fed sheet a loop is formed at the conveyance rollers U L to correct the bend temporarily and then the sheet is conveyed Sheets are stacked in the finisher as cover sheets for papers conveyed from the MFP and then applied with finishing processes Feed roller Tray up down motor M201 Conveyance roller U Pick roller Up down plate U Tray up down motor L M202 Z Up down plate L Separation roller Conveyance roller L ENWW Manual sheet feeding offline operation M201 M202 tray up down U L raises the Up down plate L When sheet feed SD U L SD201 SD202 and conveyance MC U L MC201 MC202 come on the drive of PI conveyance motor M203 is transmitted and all sheets set on the lower tray are fed into the finisher stacker by pick feed and separation rollers finisher carries out finishing processes In this case a loop is formed at the conveyance roller L for the sheet the bend is corrected temporarily and then the sheet is conveyed
126. N drive signal These signals switches the direction of the drive current to control the rotation direction of M100 Remaining paper detection no paper detection control HCIDB 5V SIG PS102 S GND 5V SIG PS103 S GND 5V SIG PS104 S GND gras SS SS ey 5V MAIN BODY 24v SIG PS105 PGND S GND 5V SGND 5V 0 PS PS108 S GND D1 D2 The remaining paper quantity is detected by PS102 HCI remaining paper detection 1 PS103 HCI remaining paper detection 2 j 10_DTXD IO_UCLK r LCT_LATCH PS104 HCI remaining paper detection 3 PS105 HCI remaining paper detection 4 and no paper detection is made by PS108 HCI no paper detection The signals detected by these sensors are controlled by HCIDB HCI drive board and displayed on the MFP display 1 Operation a Remaining paper detection control The remaining paper quantity is determined from the on off combination of sensors PS102 HCI remaining paper detection 1 PS103 HCI remaining paper detection 2 PS104 HCI remaining paper detection 3 and PS105 HCI remaining paper detection 4 which detects the ENWW rotational position of M100 HCI UP DOWN that is driving the up down plate Each sensor turns on or off according to the position of the remaining paper detection gear which is linked with the rotation of M100 The remaining paper quantity is detectable at eight levels but it is displayed on the MFP display as five levels Remainin
127. NWW Drive system diagram 33 MFP overview Paper exit drive section Paper exit motor M7 Paper exit roller Exit conveyance roller Toner supply drive section Toner bottle motor M13 Rear view Toner conveyance screw Front view 34 MFP overview ENWW Optics drive section Scanner drive wire rear O O Re a Scanner motor NA unit sA SS O y DEN FRONT canner drive wire front mn V mirror unit ENWW Drive system diagram 35 MFP overview 36 MFP overview ENWW ENWW MFP unit explanation External SOCIO ass aa mb BRAND ADAN a aon ok eae AB 40 COMPOSITION zu Kaila Maia ator cures here tice NA Digs 40 DRIVES AA PA 41 Composition sr deo ii DAANG DLOAD NANG oboe es 41 Mechanisms 2 toi ha Dana pa a AG NG 41 M2 drum Controles a Gada DUA DUDE en 42 MA fuser Control sera ee nenne 42 Scanner SOCIO merindad ee nee NG 44 COMPOSITION ge deat ee ars o PA PRA AR 44 Mechanisms taere aa paham kahan Dasha And 44 M11 scanner control oocoocooccoo eee 45 Exposure control a seeria bt NG Am et debe decken 48 Original read control 2 22 000 cee eee 48 APS COMO napa ita apm NA MA el seal da enge 49 AE CONTO e esaa er ae irae ade oa 51 Laser scanner UNI aa NG KG ee a ieee De KANG 52 Composition nka Ha ea Abbe 52 MECHNANISS cocos ae eke en ies 52
128. Not in the home position 2 PS726 IN PS726 to RB to finisher CB Signal indicating whether the paper has passed through the folding passage sensor L Paper exists H Paper does not exist b Finisher CB output signals 1 M719 DRV 1 and 2 finisher CB to RB Signal to activate or deactivate M719 DRV1 DRV2 Normal rotation H L Reverse rotation L H Halt L L c RB output signals 1 M719 DRV RB to M719 Signal to drive control M709 ENWW M720 folding conveyance control M720 BLK M720 CONT M720 CLK M720 PLL M720 F R 24V PS722 IN PS725 IN PS726 IN MAIN BODY M720 folding conveyance operates the folding roller s which rotates the tri folding roller The finisher CB finisher control board controls the operation of M720 The related signals are PS722 folding knife HP PS725 folding paper exit and PS726 folding passage 1 Operation PS726 folding passage detects the paper and the booklet stopper stops at the folding position After a predefined time period has elapsed since then M719 folding knife is activated When PS722 folding knife HP detects the paper M720 folding conveyance is activated to fold the paper with the folding roller s and the tri folding roller The folded paper is delivered to the booklet tray When PS725 folding paper exit has detected the trailing edge of the paper and a predefined time period has elapsed since then
129. ON To remove the control panel skip this step and proceed to step 5 CAUTION When the attachment angle of the control panel is changed the control panel cover and two screws will become unnecessary Stopper hole Screws Control panel stopper ENWW 5 Remove the inline connectors CN163 164 Each inline connector consist of two male sides and one female side Be sure to remove only the male side shown below CAUTION 6 Remove the control panel Relay connector CN164 Relay connector CN163 Control panel 7 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse Resetting the circuit breaker CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Connection of cables to circuit breaker 1 and 2 CBR1 2 must not be changed ENWW Procedure 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove two screws and loosen the circuit breaker assembly 5 m Ie Noise filter NF Faston FT3 noise filter side black cable Circuit breaker 1 CBR1 Screws 2 Faston FT1 wall outlet side black cable 1 Circuit breaker a assembly Re Faston FT2 wall outlet side white cable Faston FT4 noise filter side white cable 3 Turn over the circuit breaker assemblies and press the reset button at the center of each circuit breaker 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps
130. OP ADUDB to M5 M5 conveyance drive control signal L M5 on H M5 off 2 2NDM CLK CLK PRCB to ADUDB to M5 M5 conveyance clock signal 3 2ND MC ADUDB to MC1 MC1 registration drive control signal L MC1 on H MC1 off 4 DEF SI ADUDB to PS70 PS70 paper mis centering start pulse 5 DEF CLK ADUDB to PS70 PS70 paper mis centering drive clock signal 6 DEF LED ADUDB to PS70 PS70 paper mis centering LED control signal ENWW 7 CW CCW ADUDB to M5 M5 conveyance rotational direction indication signal IL CCW H CW 8 H L ADUDB to M5 M5 conveyance rotational speed indication signal L Low speed H High speed 9 A A PRCB to M6 M6 loop roller A phase drive control pulse signal 10B B PRCB to M6 M6 loop roller B phase drive control pulse signal Paper conveyance control 5V MAINEXIT PS S GND IO_DTXD IO DCLK The paper fed from the second paper feed section is fed to the fuser unit by the pre transfer roller and conveyance belt driven by M5 conveyance In the conveyance section paper suction is provided by FM3 conveyance suction through the duct installed on the back of the ENWW conveyance belt M5 and FM3 are controlled by PRCB printer control board via the ADUDB ADU drive board 1 Operation a M5 conveyance operation M5 conveyance starts when the START button is pressed and it sto
131. P The following flowchart shows the flow of operations performed by the above sections These operations are explained according to this flowchart Start Movement of the standby position of the punch unit Formation of a Registration Loop Correction of the punch position Punch 6 Punch kit overview Movement of the standby position of the punch unit When the punch mode is selected the punch shift motor M802 runs to move the punch unit so that the paper edge sensor mounted on the punch unit is placed inside of the side edge of paper by 5 mm However if the paper size is Letter Legal or 5 5 by 8 5R the sensor is positioned by 10 mm inside The above operation is not generally performed in the non punch mode however for the paper sizes shown below the punch unit is moved to the position located inside of the side edge of paper by 10 mm in order to secure the easy feeding of paper when conveyed ENWW 2 holes 4 holes Inch 2 holes Swedish Formation of a registration loop MEMES The finisher conveyance motor M701 turns B6 16K off temporarily to stop conveyance of paper 3 holes MFP when the specified time has passed since paper exit PS PS37 detected the leading Letter Legal 5 5 by 8 5R ASR A4 edge of the paper Thus the paper is pressed against the entrance roller forming a loop to Rack Punch unit correct the bend When the specified time has passed M701 turn
132. PDN_PS PS35 to PRCB 1 BPSIZE_S_PS PS31 to PRCB Paper lower limit position detection Paper size detection signal signal Tray 1 L Paper does not exist L Not detected H Paper exists H Detected ENWW Tray 1 bypass tray 91 MFP unit explanation 2 BPSIZE_L_PS PS32 to PRCB Paper size detection signal L Paper does not exist H Paper exists 3 BPSIZE VR VR5 to PRCB Paper width detection signal No paper detection control No paper in the tray is detected by PS33 no paper BP which is controlled by PRCB printer control board 1 Operation When the tray becomes empty PS33 no paper BP is turned off displaying a message on the LCD via OB1 operation board 1 2 Signal a Input signal 1 BP_OPS PS33 to PRCB No paper detection signal L Paper does not exist H Paper exists 92 MFP unit explanation ENWW Vertical conveyance section Composition Vertical conveyance MC 1 MC11 Vertical conveyance MC 2 MC12 Mechanisms Mechanism Method Paper conveyance Rollers Conveyance drive Vertical conveyance roller upper Paper feed motor M1 Vertical conveyance roller lower Paper feed motor M1 Vertical conveyance control MC24V 2 VFMC1 DRV MC24V_2 VFMC2_DRV FEEDM_CONT FEEDM_CLK 5V3 FEEDM F R T2PASS PS S GND V In the vertical conveyance section paper is fed vertically by transmitting the drive force ENWW Vertical co
133. PRCB to M4 M4 fuser rotational direction switchover signal L CW rotation H CCW rotation 3 MAINM_EM M4 to PRCB M4 fuser rotational speed control clock signal ENWW Drive section 43 MFP unit explanation Scanner section Composition Scanner HP PS PS61 Exposure unit V mirror unit APS sensor 3 PS65 APS sensor 1 PS63 APS sensor 2 PS64 E E VN Optical rail R cooling fan FM9 Scanner drive wire Exposure lamp L1 ADF glass L1 inverter L1 INVB A D converter board ADB CCD unit Mechanisms Mechanism Method Light source 8 Xenon lamp Exposure Light source moving slit exposure static exposure Scanning Platen original scanning 1st 2nd and 3rd mirrors are shifted ADF original scanning Original is moved with light source held stationary Lamp power Lamp cord supply Scanner Cooling fan cooling 44 MFP unit explanation ENWW M11 scanner control SCAN_CLK SCAN_FR SCAN_MGN SCAN_CUR1 SCAN_CUR2 SCAN_CUR3 MODE1 MODE2 MODE3 SCANHP PS PRCB M11 scanner is driven by SCDB scanner drive board and is controlled by PRCB printer control board The related signal is PS61 scanner HP 1 Operation a Operation of M11 scanner M11 scanner is a 3 phase stepping motor driven by the 3 phase bipolar constant current drive method The motor is turned on off by supplying stopping clock pulses The rotation
134. PS208 to PIDB Detection signal of sheet setting on lower tray L Sheet detected H Sheet not detected 9 PS209 IN PS209 to PIDB Detection signal of upper limit of up down plate L L Positioned at upper limit H Not positioned at upper limit 10PS210 IN PS210 to PIDB Detection signal of lower limit of up down plate L L Positioned at lower limit H Not positioned at lower limit 11PS212 IN PS212 to PIDB Detection signal of sheet size on lower tray L Sheet detected H Sheet not detected 12VR201 IN VR201 to PIDB Detection signal of sheet size on lower tray 13VR202 Detection signal of sheet size on lower tray ENWW 14M203 LD M203 to PIDB Achieves specified speed of M203 L Achieves specified speed H Not achieves specified speed 15MPI_DRV_SEL IN finisher CB to PIDB Switch signal between M201 M202 MC201 MC202 and SD201 SD202 16MPI_M_CONT finisher CB to PIDB Drive control signal of M201 M202 L ON H OFF 17MPI M F R finisher CB to PIDB Rotating direction signal of M201 M202 L Tray down H Tray up 18MPI SD CONT finisher CB to PIDB Drive control signal of SD201 SD202 L ON H OFF 19MPI MC CONT finisher CB to PIDB Drive control signal of M201 M202 L ON H OFF 20MC203 P S finisher CB to PIDB Drive control signal of M203 L ON H OFF 21M203 CLK finisher CB to PIDB Clock signal for controlling the rotating speed of M203 22M203 F R finisher CB to PIDB
135. Punch kit overview ENWW ENWW Punch kit unit explanation Punch SECO us doe ein ea a beeen ete aul abs 12 Compositor Npa ADD AGING MAGAAN HAD DNA Ae 12 Mechanisms aa ka dreunen LP Ha end 13 Punch o A Ga TE en nae a 13 Punch waste box section eee 16 COMPOSIION aeie crise eraikan BAG an eae Gee wad hwak Ab 16 Mech nisms amba malaon datas bith beac aa lee heh do MAL 16 Punch waste conveyance control eee eee eeee 17 11 Punch kit unit explanation Punch section Composition Guide shafts Eccentric cam Eccentric cam Punch scraps full PS PS802 Dive arm Punch shift HP PS PS803 Punch HP PS PS801 Punch motor M801 c23 gt gt gt Punch shift motor M802 E gt FRONT Punch scraps box set PS PS804 Drive arm Punch edges The number of punching cutters differs depending on the destinations 12 Punch kit unit explanation ENWW Mechanisms Mechanism Method Back and forth movement of punch unit Punch motor M801 Eccentric cam Drive arms Punch edges Punch unit movement Punch shift motor M802 Concurrent use of Gear Rack Punch control M801 CONT e M801 F R r 24V 24V M802 DRVA M802 DRVA M802 DRVB A M802 DRVB PS803
136. Rear cover Screws External section 133 MFP disassembly assembly 2 Remove seven screws to detach the left side cover Left side cover Screws 3 Loosen one screw and remove the developing suction filter cover 4 Loosen five screws and detach the right side cover upper CAUTION The developing suction filter cover detaches together with the right side cover upper 5 Loosen two screws to detach the right side cover lower front 6 Loosen two screws to detach the right side cover lower rear 134 MFP disassembly assembly 7 Loosen two screws to detach the right side cover lower middle Right side cover upper Developing suction filter cover Right side cover Screws Screws lower rear Right side cover Right side cover lower middle lower front 8 Open the ADF 9 Remove the two shoulder screws to remove the original stopper plate left 10 Remove the three shoulder screws to remove the original stopper plate rear 11 Remove the scanner glass 12 Remove two screws to detach the top cover left 13 Remove two screws to detach the top cover right ENWW 14 Remove the top cover middle front and top cover middle rear Original stopper plate rear Shoulder screws Top cover middle rear Top cover right Top cover left Ze Top cover Shoulder screws middle front Platen glass Original sto
137. S P5726 Booklet stopper 56 Finisher unit explanation ENWW Mechanism Mechanism Method Folding Tri folding Folding knife and roller folding first folding 1 Tri folding Roller folding second folding 2 Booklet full detection 3 Translucent sensor 4 Folding tri folding first folding The folding knife motor M719 rotates the crank axle 180 degrees which protrudes the folding knife toward the contact surface of two folding rollers The two folding rollers rotate to drag and fold the sheet s of paper The location at which the paper is folded will be controlled by the position of the booklet stopper Folding rollers Folding knife HP PS722 Folding knife 2 Tri folding second folding The tri folding gate SD SD706 changes the position of the tri folding gate so that the paper carried from the folding rollers will be conveyed toward the tri folding stopper ENWW After the paper has been stopped by the tri folding stopper it is bent along the surfaces of the upper folding roller and the tri folding roller Then the paper is carried through the contact surface of the two rollers which completes the second folding operation The location for the second folding is determined by the position of the tri folding stopper Three folding gate SD SD706 Folding rollers Paper Three folding gate NPA N gt Booklet tray 3 Booklet full detec
138. S709 paper exit belt HP signal has changed from off to on M707 stops The paper exit arm moves to the booklet mode HP When the stapling operation has completed the paper is moved to the folding position At this stage the paper exit arm will not operate This is because the paper exit arm may come into contact with the paper which is waiting for a process at the folding position Tri folding mode The finisher operation signal from the MFP lets M707 paper exit roller counter rotate When PS709 paper exit belt HP signal has changed from off to on M707 stops The paper exit arm moves to the booklet mode HP 32 Finisher unit explanation When the paper alignment has been completed M707 paper exit roller counter rotates helping the paper to be carried to the tri folding position When PS709 signal has changed from off to on M707 stops 2 Signals a Finisher CB input signals 1 PS706 IN PS706 to finisher CB Signal relating to the main tray paper exit L Paper does not exist H Paper exists 2 PS709 IN PS709 to finisher CB Signal relating to the paper exit belt HP L Paper exit belt is not at the HP H Paper exit belt is at the HP 3 PS712 IN PS712 to finisher CB Signal relating to the paper exit opening HP L Paper exit opening is open H Paper exit opening is closed 4 M707 LD M707 to finisher CB Signal relating to the rotation speed of M707 L Operating at a specified rota
139. SD303 ON OFF drive signal L SD303 on H SD303 off 18 ADF unit explanation Original size detection control PS304 SIG PS309_SIG PS310_SIG VR301_SIG SCDB The size of the original placed in the original feed tray is detected by PS309 original size 2 PS310 original size 1 and VR301 original size VR Each of these features is controlled by PRCB printer control board and driven by SCDB scanner drive board 1 Operation a Normal copy mode PRCB detects the original size from the combination of the following signals 1 Drum axis direction size detection A guide plate is connected to VR301 original size VR and the resistance value varies with the position of the guide plate This is used to determine the vertical dimension of the original 2 Original feed direction size detection The horizontal dimension of the original is detected with the on off combination of PS309 original size 2 and PS310 original size PS 1 b Mixed Z fold copy mode original size detection Size detection during mixed and Z fold copy modes are performed as follows 1 Drum axis direction size detection The vertical dimension of the largest original is determined by the position of the guide plate ENWW 2 Original feed direction size detection The ON interval of PS304 original registration 1 after the original passes the registration roller is used to determine the horizontal dimension of each original
140. T PRCB to HV This signal turns on off the charging wire L Charging voltage on H Charging voltage off 2 TXD PRCB to HV Output level of each high voltage electrode Serial data signal for control 3 CLK PRCB to HV Clock signal for TXD 4 LATCH PRCB to HV Latch signal for TXD ENWW Transfer separation control T CONT EM T SIG S CONT EM S SIG TRANSFER Le SEPARATION Le The voltages applied to the transfer wire and separation wire is supplied from HV high voltage unit and are controlled by PRCB printer control board The levels of outputs to these wires are transmitted using 8 bit serial data This serial data includes the level information for all outputs driven by HV excluding the ON OFF control signal Accordingly a separate signal line is provided to turn on off only the transfer wire or separation wire 1 Operation a Transfer Positive DC high voltage is used for transfer Transfer DC output range 50 pA to 600 LA b Separation AC high voltage and negative DC voltage are used for separation Separation AC output range 4kV to 5 7kV Separation DC output range O LA to 400 uA 2 Signals a Input signals 1 EM T SIG HV to PRCB This signal indicates the leak or short state of the transfer corona unit L Normal H Abnormal Corona unit section 59 MFP unit explanation 2 EM S SIG HV to PRCB This signal indicates the leak or short state of
141. UTION When installing the transfer separation corona unit make sure the cleaning gear coupling is engaged properly Removing and reinstalling the plunger prevention plate CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull the ADU frame from the MFP See Pulling out and reinstalling the ADU stand on page 188 2 Remove the transfer separation corona unit 3 Release the six locks and remove the plunger prevention plate front 4 Release the six locks and remove the plunger prevention plate rear plunger prevention plate front plunger prevention gt plate rear t Lock Lock Same as on the opposite side 5 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse 164 MFP disassembly assembly Replacing the transfer separation wires and transfer separation wire cleaning block CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull the ADU frame from the MFP See Pulling out and reinstalling the ADU stand on page 188 2 Remove the transfer separation corona unit 3 Remove the plunger prevention plate 4 Remove the spark arrester plates front and rear Spark arrester plate rear Spark arrester plate front 5 Remove the springs of wires one each CAUTION When installing the springs bend the edge of each spring inside ENWW 6 Release and remove three wires from each cleani
142. When SW100 HCI tray down drive turns on by pressing M100 rotates backward to move the up down plate down 2 OFF timing M100 turns off at predefined interval after PS100 turns off or SW100 turns on This in turn lowers the up down plate by 120 mm 12 HCI unit explanation 3 Others The up down plate descends by 120 mm each time SW100 is pressed until PS101 turns on to indicate the bottom limit of the up down plate b Up down plate ascend timing 1 ON timing When the top cover is closed and PS100 HCI top cover open close detection is turned on M100 HCI UP DOWN rotates forward to raise the up down plate 2 OFF timing When the up down plate rises and PS109 HCI upper limit detection turns on to indicate the detection of the topmost paper M100 HCI UP DOWN turns off and stops the up down plate The up down plate also stops when the top cover is opened and PS100 HCI top cover open close detection turns off 2 Signals a Input signals 1 SIG PS101 to HCIDB Up down plate lower limit detection signal L Up down plate not at lower limit H Up down plate at lower limit 2 UP_PS PS109 to HCIDB Up down plate upper limit detection signal L Up down plate not at upper limit H Up down plate at upper limit 3 DW_SW SW100 to HCIDB SW100 HCI tray down switch ON OFF detection signal IL SW100 on H SW100 off ENWW b Output signal 1 D1 2 HCIDB to M100 M100 HCI UP DOW
143. a b 102 mm 97 mm 2 mm c h 25mm 25 mm or less jor less Height Note Measurements must be made using a single sheet Amount of sort offsetting 30 mm after sorting and grouping Finisher overview Staple mode Number of sheets to be stapled 50 sheets or less the height must be 5 mm or less when using 80 g m or 20 Ib quality paper Positions for stapling A 8 5 mm 3 mm B 8 5 mm 3 mm C 60 mm 3 mm D 8 5 mm 3 mm E 14mm 3 mm F 60 mm 3 mm A D e E m Hm oj oJ r Fa 1 t i Single staple Two staples 7 Single staple rear front r NG a Booklet mode stitch and fold Multifunction finisher only Staple capacity 5000 staples cartridge Booklet mode Q3634A only Stitch and fold Maximum 20 sheets when using 80 g m or 20 Ib quality paper Maximum 19 sheets when using 80 g m or 20 Ib quality paper one sheet 200 g m or 45 Ib quality paper 4 Finisher overview Folding Maximum 3 sheets when using 80 g m or 20 Ib quality paper Tri folding mode Q3634A only Number of tri folding Maximum 3 sheets when using 80 g m or 20 Ib quality paper However special paper cannot be used Option Q3636A HP Post insertion kit Punch kit Machine specifications Power source 24V 5VDC supplied from the MFP Maximum power consumption 100VA Weight Q3633A Approximately 55 kg
144. a ANG Pa GA Aha 10 Mechans Mirita een EPR Adee ees 10 Original feed conveyance exit section aaa 11 COMPOSITION oai oo do led 11 Mechanism iis aw see e 5 ens inpia pee WEG an en en 11 Original feed conveyance scan control 0 00000 eae 12 Original reversal and conveyance control 05 16 Original size detection control 0 a 18 ADF unit explanation External section Composition Original feed unit Jam access cover Kr N ga SS IH Y Original feed tray il Mechanism Jam access cover Mechanism Method Original feed unit Jam removal 1 Open close cover Original feed unit White board 4 Jam removal Remove the jammed original in the paper feed section by opening the jam access Cover Remove the jammed original in the conveyance section by opening the white board Jam access cover Remove the jammed original in the reversal section by opening the jam access cover and paper feed unit 10 ADF unit explanation ENWW Original feed conveyance exit section Composition Separation roller Original conveyance motor M302 Pick roller Feed roller Original feed MC MC301 BEN Original feed motor M301 Registration roller a Original feed tray Reverse gate drive SD SD301 II TI Exit gate drive SD SD302 N ae Pressure roller release SD SD303 Mechanism SD301 is turned on
145. acker Q3633A and multifunction finisher Q3634A product specifications Type Q3633A Finishing device with offset collation sort and group stapling and sub tray eject features Q3634A Finishing device with offset collation sort and group stapling sub tray eject booklet stitch and fold and tri folding features Functions Type of paper Same as the MFP 2 Finisher overview Paper size Q3633A Q3634A Q3634A only TG 191610 lo A O O KG olla lo lolo lo lo Jou it lo Jolo lo A o lolo lo mG lalo lo lo lo ig lolole a O mao lo SS lla lo ma lolol Ca go lololo AE O olo lo mT Tol lo la alo To one 1 The position of the stopper must be changed when using paper with different size ENWW Paper stacking capacity 80 g m or 20 Ib Sub tray exit mode Maximum 200 sheets same size sheets only Non Staple group and offset modes e Maximum 1500 sheets A3 B4 F4R 11 by 17 and 8 5 by 14 e Maximum 3000 sheets A4 A4R B5 B5R 8 5 by 11 and 8 5 by 11R e Maximum 500 sheets A5 A5R B6R 5 5 by 8 5 and 5 5 by 8 5R Note For Q3634A the maximum stacking capacity is 2500 sheets for A4 A4R B5 B5R 8 5 by 11 and 8 5 by 11R paper Staple mode Maximum 1000 sheets paper must be the same size Main tray capacity Original pages A3 11 by 17 Other paper types A5 an
146. ading edge of the original during conveyance PS307 and PS308 are placed at the front and back of the pre scan conveyance path and determine the inclination in interval at which the leading edge of the original turns these switches on A skewed image caused by original inclination is corrected through image processing and image data is written FM301 original feed motor cooling fan operation FM301 is used to cool M301 so that M301 does not overheat during operation 1 ON timing At the start of DF 2 OFF timing When M302 is off 2 Signals a Input signal 1 24V MS301 to SCDB Open close detection signal of Jam access cover L Cover opened H Cover closed 14 ADF unit explanation 2 SIG PS301 to SCDB Last sheet of original on the original feed tray detected L Original present H No original 3 SIG PS302 to SCDB No original on original feed tray detection signal L Original present H No original 4 SIG P5303 to SCDB Original exit detection signal L Original present H No original 5 SIG PS311 to SCDB ADF open close detection signal L ADF closed H ADF opened 6 SIG PS304 to SCDB Original detected at the entrance of the registration roller L Original present H No original 7 SIG PS305 to SCDB Original detected for double side original copy mode L Original present H No original 8 SIG PS306 to SCDB Original detected before the scan position L Original pres
147. al ball to remove wire A Up down plate Wire C Wire D 18 Release the metal ball to remove wire D Wire C Wire D 9 14 Release the ball to remove wire D 4 Release the metal ball to remove wire B i 16 Release the metal 7 Release the meta i 4 Y ball to remove wire ball to remove wire i A 9 Release the meta ball to remove wire B 12 Release the meta ball to remove wire a 3 Remove the pulley C Wire A Wire B 6 Remove the E ring 8 Remove the pulley 5 Remove the pulley Up down shaft 15 Remove the E ring then remove the pulley to release wire C 11 Remove the E ring then remove the 13 Remove the pulley to 17 Remove the pulley pulley to release release wire D to release wire D wire C 10 Remove the pulley 28 HCI disassembly assembly ENWW Installing the up down wires 20 Insert wire A in the pulleys then attach a metal ball Up down plate 3 o o O Insert wire D in the pulleys then attach a metal ball Insert wire B in the pulleys then attach a metal ball Insert wire D in the pulleys then attach a metal ball i gt 5 Insert wire C in the Insert wire A in the a ee ce pulleys then attach a pulleys then attach a KA i bi metal ball metal ball i 3 Insert wire B in the lt Wire A pulleys then attac
148. al section on page 132 2 Remove the control panel 3 Remove the inline connector CN162 Each inline connector consist of two male sides and one female side Be sure to remove only the male side shown below of the CN 162 connector 4 Loosen the left and right screws on the control panel cover top Scanner section 143 MFP disassembly assembly 5 Remove three screws and remove the operation unit cover top Relay connector eee CN162 tt Control panel cover Screws T Mm Screws loosen Screws loosen 6 Move the exposure unit to the notch in the MFP frame on the paper exit side 7 Remove two screws to detach the cord clamp B 8 Remove one screw to remove the ground terminal 9 Disconnect the connector CN630 144 MFP disassembly assembly 10 Remove four screws to detach the exposure unit Cord clamp B Optical wire fastener Screws Screw Ground terminal Optical wire fastener SS i Exposure unit Installation procedure 1 Move the V mirror unit toward the paper exit side then insert the optics positioning tools from the front to secure the V mirror unit Ensure that the optics positioning tools pass through the V mirror unit 2 Insert the optics positioning tools in the holes at the exposure unit mounting position from the front ENWW 3 Slide the exposure unit to the paper exit side until it touches the optics
149. al speed direction and amount of movement of M11 is determined by the increment of the driving step count This count is reset each time PS61 scanner HP is turned on or off by the exposure unit b Movement speed of the exposure unit Scanning speed Operation mode Movement speed Scan 320 mm s 1 1 Return 640 mm s Home position search 247 mm s ENWW c Exposure unit home position search When SW2 sub power switch or the START button is pressed M11 scanner searches for the home position of the exposure unit However this operation is performed in different ways depending on whether PS61 scanner HP is on or off 1 When PS61 scanner HP is off PS61 Platen APS read position Vv 2 When PS61 scanner HP is on PS61 Platen APS read position Ne I d Read with shading correction Shading correction is performed in different ways depending on whether SW2 sub power is on or the START button is on When shading correction starts the exposure unit is atthe home position and PS61 scanner HP is off 1 When SW2 sub power is on L1 exposure lamp turns on Next M11 scanner moves the exposure unit toward the paper exit side After being driven by the specified number of steps M11 stops thus reading the light reflected by the white reference plate installed underneath the glass stopper plate and performing the first Scanner section 45 MFP unit explanation white correcti
150. al steps in reverse 14 Remove the E ring to detach the idle gear 15 Rotate the remaining paper detection gear until the round hole in this gear is aligned with the oblong hole in the up down motor mounting assembly CAUTION Align when the up down plate is in lowest position Up down motor Remaining paper mounting assembly detection gear y Idle gear 16 Install the idle gear ENWW 17 Attach the covers following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION After replacing the up down wires make horizontal and centering adjustment of the up down plate Refer to Adjustment section Replacing the Q3638A up down wires CAUTION With the power held on press the HCI tray down switch SW100 to move the up down plate down to the bottom in advance Procedure 1 Remove the clutch replacement cover side cover right front cover and rear cover following the steps 1 to 5 in 7 Replacing the Q3637A up down Wires 2 Remove the E ring 3 Remove the five screws to detach the gear cover 4 Remove the two bearings E ring Bearing Screws Bearing 5 Remove the gear A 6 Remove the E ring to remove gear B Paper feed section 25 HCI disassembly assembly 7 Remove the detent pin for gear B from the up down pulley shaft 8 Remove the E ring and bearing to remove gear C Bearing ee Gear B Up down pulley shaft 9 Remove the bearing behind gear C 10 Re
151. and reinstalling the PCL CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Remove the charging corona unit 2 Disconnect the wire binding band at two locations 3 Release the lock and remove the PCL Wire binding band 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Cleaning the charging corona unit PCL CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Remove the charging corona unit 2 Remove the charge control plate and PCL 3 Place the charge control plate on a flat surface and clean by gently tapping with a cleaning pad moistened with drum cleaner Next remove any remaining dirt with a blower brush CAUTION Take care not to damage the mesh of the charge control plate during cleaning 4 Clean the PCL with a cleaning pad moistened with drum cleaner Charging corona unit control plate ENWW Removing and reinstalling the transfer separation corona unit CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull the ADU frame from the MFP See Pulling out and reinstalling the ADU stand on page 188 2 Loosen two screws to remove the transfer separation corona unit Corona unit 163 MFP disassembly assembly 3 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CA
152. and two insulating CAUTION Reinstall the bearings and sleeves from the fusing upper roller insulating sleeves with the collars facing the directions 7 Remove the fusing upper roller from the E shown in the figure frame Bearing Insulating sleeve O Removing and reinstalling the fusing lower roller Procedure Washer 1 Remove the fuser 2 Remove two screws to remove the fusing entrance guide plate lower Fixing entrance guide plate lower 3 Remove the fusing separation claw lower unit 4 Remove the fusing lower roller upward il NG V Collars Collars 8 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION Before reinstalling the insulating sleeve coat the inside with Tri flow ENWW Fuser 215 MFP disassembly assembly 5 Remove two bearings from the fusing lower roller Fixing lower roller O Le ee 68 E Bearing 6 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION The fusing entrance guide plate lower should be pressed against the fusing upper roller bearing when installing Removing and reinstalling the decurler roller Procedure 1 Remove the fuser 2 Open the fuser top 3 Lift the fusing exit guide plate upper and remove two screws to remove the fusing exit guide plate lower 4 Remove the screw to detach the jam handling release knob 5 From the front side remove one E ring one gear one E ring one
153. anner unit a Method Reference voltage 3 0 V lt Timing gt Before gradation correction Multiple dot pattern patches with the same condensation are created to be 1 yLED CONT PRCB to TCSB read by the y sensor PD2 The laser a power where the y sensor output kakaba oe LED ONOFE reaches the reference voltage is used nen as the MPC value L LED on H LED off b Output signal b Timing 1 Every 10 000 prints upon completion of the last job 68 MFP unit explanation ENWW Toner density control The density of toner is controlled by controlling M12 toner supply from PRCB printer control board 1 Operation a Toner density detection The reference patch density is detected using the patch detection method of TCSB toner control sensor board and the corresponding analog voltage signal is output to PRCB printer control board thus detecting the toner density The PRCB compares the detected voltage with the reference value to determine whether toner must be added b Toner supply operation Upon read of the patch M12 toner supply is turned on to supply toner The time needed to add toner depends on the paper size 2 Signals a Output signals 1 TNSM_A AB PRCB to M12 A phase drive signal of M12 toner supply 2 TNSM_B BB PRCB to M12 B phase drive signal of M12 toner supply ENWW FM4 developing suction control SUCTFAN D FM4 developing suction is co
154. ate Image control board mounting plate 8 Remove three screws and remove the two flywheels Flywheels 2 Screws 3 9 Remove the connector CN301 ENWW 10 Remove four screws and remove the drum motor M2 Connector CN301 Drum motor M2 Screws 4 11 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse Drive section 139 MFP disassembly assembly Removing and reinstalling the fusing input gear CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Open the image control bard mounting board 2 Remove six screws and remove the fusing motor cover 3 Pull out the connector CN304 remove four screws to remove the fusing motor assembly CAUTION Hold the fusing motor assembly with your hand because it is connected to the MFP with cable Screws 4 Fixing motor assembly Connector CN304 Fixing motor cover Screws 6 4 Remove two screws to remove the fusing input gear holder 140 MFP disassembly assembly 5 Pull out the fusing input gear from the shaft Screws 2 6 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse
155. ation 89 Tray 1 paper feed drive section diagram 31 Tray 2 and 3 paper feed units 173 Tray 2 3 paper feed unit 75 Tray 3 paper feed unit 179 Tray 4 paper feed unit 82 tray up drive section diagram 30 TS1 thermostat U 218 TS2 thermostat L 220 TSL control 62 TSL unit 166 U unauthorized modifications 5 V ventilation warnings 10 vertical conveyance control 93 vertical conveyance drive section diagram 30 vertical conveyance MC MC11 MC12 187 vertical conveyance section removing and reinstalling 187 theory of operation 93 vertical magnifications 25 vibration warnings 11 WwW wall outlet warnings 7 warm up time 25 warning items 4 warning symbols 5 web cover 209 web drive M16 control 113 web drive section diagram 28 wire lengths Tray 3 183 Trays 2 and 3 178 wires Tray 3 installing 184 replacing 182 wires Trays 2 and 3 installing 178 replacing 176 wiring warnings 8 Z zoom magnifications 25 ENWW hp LaserJet 9055mfp 9065mfp automatic document feeder Q3644A Contents 1 ADF overview Automatic document feeder product specifications 20008 2 VPO ui tered ati ae deeded ane eae 2 FUNCHONS a trade een 2 Machine data ooooooo 2 Maintenance 0 0000 3 Operating environment 3 Center cross sectional drawing 4 Drive system diagram 2 5 Original conveyance process 6 Single side original copy
156. bare hands Also do not directly contact the rollers to any object After replacing the toner guide roller be sure to apply electricity lubricant on the edge of the guide roller shaft on power supply pin side Cleaning toner recycle unit 171 MFP disassembly assembly Procedure 7 Remove the toner guide roller 1 Remove the drum unit See Drum unit on Screw Positioning part page 152 2 Remove the charging corona unit See Corona unit on page 159 3 Remove the cleaning blade 4 Release the power supply pin in contact with the toner guide roller shaft 5 Remove the cleaner idle gear 6 Remove the screws securing the front and rear positioning parts Power supply pin Cleaner idle gear 8 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse 172 MFP disassembly assembly ENWW Paper feed units of Trays 2 and 3 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull out paper feed Tray 2 or 3 2 Loosen the securing shaft screw and remove one screw 3 Disconnect the inline connector CN814 834 and remove the paper feed unit by lifting Relay connector CN854 Securing shaft screw Paper feed unit Screw N 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Removing and reinstalling the paper feed Trays 2 and 3 WARNING When remo
157. board Exclusively for 9065 Exclusively for 9055 ADU linear speed change Image control program Printer control program Control ADU Section Laser Scanner Unit Drive Section Specification Exclusively for 9065 Exclusively for 9055 CPM change 224 Product comparison ENWW ENWW Environmental Product Stewardship Program Environmental Product Stewardship Program 222222220 Protecting the environment 000020 cece eee eee 225 Environmental Product Stewardship Program Environmental Product Stewardship Program Protecting the environment Hewlett Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment Ozone protection This product contains an ozone filter to protect indoor air quality The ozone filter should be replaced every 250 000 pages during preventive maintenance Paper use This product s automatic duplex capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources Plastics Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at end of life Paper This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the Print Media Guide This produ
158. chanism8a isa maa ts ana aha 93 Vertical conveyance control cece eee 93 Automatic duplex unit ADU 2 2 2 0600 cee 95 COMPOSITION Als Arten gta rd mode ne ee 95 Mech nisms m a we a tack Se Ae resid Bie ba 96 Loop second paper feed control 0c eee eee aee 101 Paper conveyance control 2 22 103 Paper reverse and exit control cece eee eee 104 ADF paper conveyance feed control 0000e sees 108 ENWW ENWW FUSER UN Ite nt Ng ee NN KNANG Oe NAIN PENA 111 Composition tr kka halak aaa BAUS AR Atal 111 Mechanisms coi a eek auf ape emia 111 M16 web drive control 0 0000 c eee eee 113 Fuser temperature control ccc eee eee eee eee 114 Other kinds of controls ssi cares ec ee ee ene eee eens 116 Parts energized when SW1 main power is off 116 Parts that operate when SW1 main power SW2 secondary POWER 1S OM Ls Baan ehren NAG ONG aling Maa nee 117 Cooling fan controlas rary re 00000 nennen nennen 118 Control panel control 0 0000 eee 122 Counter contr l u ork da seed essen dad 124 Option controle mees en ee A 126 39 MFP unit explanation External section Composition Control panel Secondary power switch SW2 Toner supply cover Front right cover Front left cover Primary power switch SW1 Ozone filter cover Optional cover Rear cover 40 MFP unit explanation ADF Tray 1 N Right si
159. conveyance roller 4 Bearing 19 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Removing and reinstalling the ADU conveyance roller 1 and 2 WARNING The interlock which is turned off when the front right or left door opens or closes should never be turned on forcibly with the ADU stand pulled out Removal and reinstallation of the ADU stand involve carrying a heavy load so it should be performed by two persons CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull out the ADU stand from the MFP 2 Remove the fuser See Fuser on page 208 3 Remove the transfer separation corona unit See Corona unit on page 159 4 Remove the second paper feed unit 5 Remove the ADU stand 6 Remove the conveyance unit 7 Remove the ADU conveyance MC MC13 8 Disconnect the connector CN407 9 Remove three screws to detach the reverse gate solenoid assembly 10 Remove one screw to remove the connector cover ENWW 11 Remove three screws to detach the reverse motor assembly Screws Reverse motor Connector CN415 jo Connector CN407 embly 12 Disconnect the two connectors CN403 404 13 Disconnect the connector CN415 14 Disconnect the connector CN417 Each inline connector consists of two male sides and one female side Be sure to remove only the male side shown below of the connect
160. cord or sheath is damaged replace with a new power cord with plugs on both ends specified by HP If the power cord inlet type is not connected to the MFP securely a contact problem may lead to increased resistance overheating and risk of fire I ENWW Safety warnings 7 Safety N WARNING Power plug and cord e Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and so on Overheating may occur there leading to a risk of fire e Do not bundle or tie the power cord Overheating may occur there leading to a risk of fire e Check whether dust has collected around the power plug and wall outlet Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in fire Donot insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand The risk of electric shock exists When unplugging the power cord grasp the plug not the cable The cable may be broken leading to a risk of fire and electric shock JN WARNING Wiring e Never use multi plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet If used the risk of fire exists 8 Safety ENWW WARNING Wiring When an extension cord is required use a specified one Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited so using an extension cord that is too long may result in fire Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up Fire may re
161. crews that must not be removed 141 Removing and reinstalling the CCD UN Its an mh eae dea Lg 141 Replacing the exposure lamp 142 Removing and reinstalling the exposure unit 143 Installing the optics wire 145 Cleaning the ADF glass and scanner YASSI Kna an dee garen 147 Replacing the scanner motor M11 148 Laser scanner unit 0 150 Removing and reinstalling the laser scanner assembly 150 Cleaning the dust proof glass 151 Drum unit papag iiwan a 152 Removing and reinstalling the drum Ut 152 Installing the coupling 154 ENWW Removing cleaning and reinstalling theidr m ise kaka mi NGA La Removing and reinstalling the separation claws and separation claw solenoid Removing and reinstalling the toner control sensor board Corona UNI vicios aNG Naaawa Screws that must not be removed Removing and reinstalling the charging corona Unit Removing and reinstalling the charge control plate Replacing the charging wires Removing and reinstalling the charging wire cleaning unit Removing and reinstalling the PCL Cleaning the charging corona unit PCL Removing and reinstalling the transfer separation corona unit Removing and reinstalling the plunger prevention plate Replacing the transfer separation wires and transfer separation wire cleani
162. ct is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN 12281 2000 Material restrictions This HP product contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp on the liquid crystal display control panel that may require special handling at end of life This HP product contains lead in solder that may require special handling at end of life This HP product contains a lithium battery located on the memory board unit that may require special handling at end of life For recycling information you can contact http www hp com go recycle or contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance at http www eiae org Material safety data sheet Material Safety Data Sheets MSDS can be obtained by contacting the HP LaserJet printer supplies website at http www hp com go msds For more information To obtain information about these environmental topics e product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products commitment to the environment e environmental management system e end of life product return and recycling program eo MSDS Visit http www hp com go environment or http www hp com hpinfo community enviro nment 226 Environmental Product Stewardship Program ENWW ENWW B ermino cross reference Terminology cross reference for the MFP 227 Terminology cross reference Terminology cross reference for the MFP Copy industry terminology HP terminology 1 obliqu
163. d 5 5 by 8 5 2t09 50 stacks 100 stacks 10 to 20 50 stacks 50 stacks 21 to 30 30 stacks 30 stacks 31 to 40 25 stacks 25 stacks 41 to 50 20 stacks 20 stacks Booklet mode Q3634A only Stitch and fold 20 booklets with 5 sheets folded each 15 booklets in case of small size paper A4R 8 5 by 11R One booklet with 6 sheets folded is taken as two and more booklets e Folding 33 booklets with 3 or less sheets folded each 25 booklets in case of small size paper A4R 8 5 by 11R Tri folding Tray capacity is a maximum of 50 individual folded sheets ENWW Stapler stacker Q3633A and multifunction finisher Q3634A product specifications 3 Paper curling 10 mm or less Amount of curl Paper 5 sheets Y 8 Height of folding in the booklet mode Q3634A only 80 g m or 20 lb Height of folding A yy A Original A3 B4 A4R pages 11 by 17 8 5 by 14 8 5 by 11R Oto 5 25 mm or less 25 mm or less 25 mm or less 6to10 50 mm or less 50 mm or less Not specified 11 to 20 Not Not Not specified specified specified The height of folding may be larger after exit although the booklet must be folded with ease manually Width a b and c and height h in the tri folding mode Width Measurements Nominal values Allowance height A4R 8 5x11R Width 93 mm 86 4 mm 2 mm 102 mm 97 mm 2 mm
164. d Paper loop mechanism 3 Photosensor actuator magnetic clutch 1 Paper lift up a Hoisting of up down plate paper feed tray is driven by wires When the paper tray is loaded the tray up drive motor 3 M18 rotates to wind the wires around the drive pulleys and consequently the 82 MFP unit explanation Pick roller Feed roller Drive pulley for wire A B Paper size VR 3 VR3 Paper size PS 1 3 PS17 up down plate in the tray moves up When the tray upper limit PS 3 PS14 detects the actuator of the roller that has been moved up by paper the tray up drive motor 3 M18 stops b Lowering of tray When the paper feed tray is pulled out the coupling shaft of the tray is disengaged from the coupling gear of the tray up drive motor on the MFP side allowing the up down plate in the tray to fall down by its own weight ENWW 2 Coupler Tray side Paper size detection Length When paper pushes the paper size detection actuator the paper size PS 1 3 PS18 and the paper size PS2 3 PS17 turns on Thus the paper size is automatically determined according to the combination of the on off states of this PS Width When the side guides of the tray are slid the rack gear of the side guide front turns the paper size VR3 gear Thus the paper size is automatically determined according to the change in the resistance value of the VR Paper size VR gear Rack gear Si
165. d by transmitting the drive force of M5 conveyance to ADU conveyance rollers 1 to 4 ADU conveyance rollers 1 and 2 are turned on off by MC13 ADU conveyance and ADU conveyance rollers 3 and 4 are controlled by MC2 ADU deceleration After a lapse of the specified time from turning on of PS49 ADU deceleration MC2 and MC13 are turned off to press the paper against the ADU pre registration roller forming a paper loop MC13 is turned on off only when the paper length is 325 mm or longer If the paper length is less than 325 mm it stays on during copying b ADF feed control M6 loop roller starts rotating at a high speed after a lapse of the specified time from detection of the leading edge of paper by PS50 ADU pre registration Thus the ADU pre registration roller starts rotating to feed paper to the second paper feed section At this time MC2 ADU deceleration and MC13 ENWW ADU conveyance are turned off so that the drive force of M5 conveyance which is also used to drive the second paper feed section is not transmitted to ADU conveyance rollers 1 2 3 and 4 MC2 and MC13 are turned on after a lapse of the specified time from detection of the trailing edge of paper by PS49 ADU deceleration proceeding to feed the next sheet of paper After a lapse of the specified time from detection of the leading edge of paper by PS44 registration M6 starts rotating at a low speed MC1 registration is turned on a
166. de cover lower rear Vertical conveyance door DYAN side cover upper A swt suction filter cover Right side cover lower middle Right side cover lower front Paper exit tray Left side cover ENWW Drive section Composition I Drum motor M2 Toner bottle motor M13 Scanner motor M11 ett SS Developing motor M3 Fixing motor M4 Loop roller motor M6 Paper feed motor M1 Mechanisms 1 Independent drive mechanisms Mechanism Driven parts Method Drive mechanisms of this machine are Drum Drum Toner guide Gear drive driven by dedicated motors to ensure drive 1 roller Toner dedicated motor high speed operation and to improve KAAU kaban ara serviceability of the drum unit and and Separation claw tity swing developing performance Developing Developing sleeve Gear drive Speeds of the drum motor M2 fuser drive 1 dedicated motor motor M4 and loop roller motor M6 Fuser Fuser roller upper Gear drive itched h bel di drive 1 dedicated motor are switched as shown below according Paper feed Tray 2 3 4 Vertical Gear driv
167. de guide front ENWW 3 First paper feed paper loop mechanism When paper feed starts paper is fed to the pre registration roller by the feed roller and pick rollers The fed out paper operates the actuator of the paper feed PS 3 PS13 turning it on The feed and pick rollers remain on for a specified time after the actuation of the paper feed PS 3 PS13 causing a paper loop to form against the pre registration rollers which are not turning In this way paper skew is corrected Pre registration roller Paper feed PS 3 PS13 Pick roller Feed roller Tray 4 paper feed unit 83 MFP unit explanation First paper feed control FEEDM_CONT FEEDM_CLK FEEDM_F E FEEDM_EM The first paper feed from Tray 4 takes place as the result of the transmission of the drive force from M1 paper feed to each pick roller by MC7 paper feed MC 3 and MC8 pre registration MC 3 The feed roller picks up paper using its own weight The above operations are controlled by the PRCB printer control board Related signals are PS13 paper feed 3 and PS27 vertical conveyance 3 issued from the vertical conveyance section 1 Operation a Operation of the MC7 paper feed MC 3 1 Start timing of printing of the first copy MC7 paper feed MC 3 turns on at the timing that is determined by the P counter from when copying starts and turns off after a lapse of the specified time from PS13 paper feed 3 turning o
168. dge of the original The original flips over and the reverse gate closes The reversal roller and the original exit reversal roller turn to the reverse direction and feed the original to the read section Next original Original exit reversal roller Reversal roller Reverse gate The reading of the back side of the original starts when the original conveyance PS PS306 turns on The original exit gate lowers and the original is fed to the original exit reversal roller when the back side is scanned The pressure on the original exit Original conveyance process 7 ADF overview reversal roller is released for a specified period of time The leading edge and the trailing edge of the original brush against each other at the original exit reversal roller The next original is pre fed if there is one Next original Original exit reversal roller Original exit gate Conveyance roller Original conveyance PS PS306 The original is conveyed to the original reversal exit when the back side is scanned The original exit gate returns to the original position Next original Original exit reversal roller Original exit gate The original is now reversed again and the reading of the front side of the original is conveyed to the read section by the reversal roller and the original exit reversal roller in the same manner as scanning the back side of the origina
169. due to contamination or tear the relevant page should be replaced Description items for Warning Caution and Note In this service handbook Warning Caution and Note are defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning When servicing the MFP the relevant works disassembling reassembling adjustment repair maintenance and so forth need to be conducted with utmost care WARNING Warning messages alert the reader to a specific procedure or practice which if not followed correctly could cause personal injury or catastrophic loss of data or equipment CAUTION Caution messages appear before procedures which if not observed could result in loss of data or damage to equipment Note Notes contain important information 4 Safety ENWW Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows A A Precaution when General precaution Electric hazard High temperature using the MFP Prohibition when General prohibition Do not touch with wet hand Do not disassemble using the MFP Direction when General instruction Unplug Ground Earth using the MFP Safety warnings Modifications not authorized by hp HP MFPs are renowned for their high reliability This reliability is achieved through high quality design and a solid service network MFP design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical physical and electrical aspects have to be taken into considerat
170. e CAUTION The following screws power cord of the MFP should not be removed If from the wall outlet you do punching cannot be done as designed Procedure 1 Remove the punch waste box Punch unit Za J MAT Punch scraps box Screws that should not be removed 20 Punch kit disassembly assembly ENWW 2 Remove the punch drive board cover by removing one screw Punch drive board cover Screw 3 Disconnect two connectors CN65 68 and one inline connector CN531 from the punch drive board PKDB Relay connector CN531 Connector CN65 Connector CN68 Punch drive board PKDB 4 Remove three screws to remove the punch unit cover ENWW Punch unit cover Screw 5 Disconnect two connectors CN158 505 6 Remove the punch unit from finisher by removing four screws Punch unit Screw Connector CN505 Punch shift HP PS PS803 Connector CN158 Punch shift motor M802 7 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse Punch section 21 Punch kit disassembly assembly Cleaning the punch edges and punch waste full PS PS802 CAUTION Be sure to unplug the power cord of the MFP from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Remove the punch unit 2 Use a blower brush to remove paper dust and punch waste from the punch edges and punch waste full PS PS80
171. e male side shown below of the connector ENWW 11 Remove two screws to remove the harness guide plate front Relay connector CN427 CN421 u Relay connector Harness guide plate front Relay connector CN426 Screw 12 Remove four screws to detach the registration drive motor assembly Screw Registration drive motor assembly Screws 3 ADF unit 203 MFP disassembly assembly 13 Remove the snap rings to remove the ADU deceleration MC MC2 and ADU conveyance MC MC13 feeder deceleration MC MC2 feeder conveyance MC MC1 PE XI x A A N S _ Wye 73 gt Automatic doc Automatic document BR XS Poe 14 Remove the E ring at the rear two belt holding collars ADU conveyance belt 1 and two ADU conveyance pulleys 15 Remove the pin from each roller shaft 16 Remove the E ring and bearing on the inside of the ADU conveyance pulley 17 Remove the E ring on the ADU conveyance roller 3 shaft 204 MFP disassembly assembly 18 Remove the front E ring and bearing and remove the ADU conveyance roller 3 and ADU conveyance roller 4 by sliding them back and forth Automatic document feeder conveyance belt 1 Bearing Ering Pin E ring lt Bearing y T Desi e Belt holding A a collars Gs cy Al E rings Automatic document feeder conveyance pulley Automatic document feeder Automatic document feeder
172. e 41 Composition 0005 41 Mechanisms 2 41 M2 drum control 42 MA fuser control 04 42 Scanner section aa 44 Composition oooooooooo 44 Mechanisms 22222222 44 M11 scanner control 45 Exposure control 222222220 48 Original read control 48 APS controle caca cod da de 49 AE controla ap ana era AA 51 Laser scanner unit ee rennen 52 Composition ooocooooooo 52 Mechanisms 2 22 2222er 52 M15 polygon control 53 Image write control 53 DUNN bs iter ter AG LA Dhaka ha 56 Composition 0 5 56 Mechanisms 2 000005 56 Separation claw control 57 Paper guide plate control 57 Corona unit section 2 2 2222 58 Composition ooocoo ooooo 58 Mechanisms 2 22 2222 58 Charging control 22 222220 58 Transfer separation control 59 iii Contents M14 charger cleaning control 60 M10 transfer separation cleaning CONTO AAP NA AA 61 PELITSL control a aa pasakan 62 Developing unit s seen 63 Composition 2 2 2222 63 Mechanisms 2222222 63 M3 developing control 63 Developing bias control 64 Dmax maximum contrast control 65 Gradation correction control
173. e TCSB toner control sensor board detects the density ofthe toner control patch developed on the drum surface to output the signal corresponding to the detected density to PRCB printer control board b Toner supply When the voltage detected by TCSB toner control sensor board is below the specified value PRCB issues a control signal to drive M12 toner supply The relationship between the paper size and toner supply time is summarized in the following table Paper size Supply time seconds A3 1 30 B4 0 98 F4 0 98 A4 0 65 B5 0 49 B5R 0 49 A5 0 33 11by17 1 30 8 5 by 14 0 98 8 5 by 11 0 65 5 5 by 8 5 0 49 ENWW Cleaning toner recycle unit Composition Cleaning blade Toner guide roller TGR Cleaning blade Scraper 4 NG j Ng Toner recycle MC MC14 O i ES Toner conveyance screw Separation Drum claw Mechanisms force from the toner conveyance screw This prevents excessive recycled toner Mechanism Method a A from being conveyed to the developing Drum cleaning Cleaning blade unit Toner collection 1 Toner guide roller TGR Toner recycle Screw conveyance toner recycle MC MC14 HV Terminal 1 Toner collection 2 Cleaning blade Toner removed by the cleaning blade is collected by the toner guide roller TGR and removed by the scraper then conveyed by the toner conveyance screw to be reused
174. e board SCDB on the MFP A S4 Connector CN614 TETIT TIN Scanner drive board SCDB Connector Connector CN615 Connector CN612 CN613 ENWW 5 Remove four screws to detach the cable conduit Cable conduit Screws 4 6 Pull the cable to the top of the MFP 7 Close the ADF Remove three screws to detach each of two fixing plates Fixing plate Screws 2 External section 23 ADF disassembly assembly 8 Open the ADF to the upright position Reinstalling the ADF 9 Remove two screws to detach the spacer and attachment from the left fixing plate CAUTION Make sure the power cord of the main unit has been 10 Holding the ADF remove two screws to unplugged from the wall detach two fixing plates and remove the ADF from the MFP Quer Procedure CAUTION When fixing plates are 1 Place the ADF on the top of the main unit removed the ADF may fall and loosely secure each of the two fixing down to the rear side Be plates with two screws sure fohold te ADF 2 Secure the attachment and spacer to the left fixing plate and loosely secure it with two screws 3 Remove two screws to detach the original stopper plate left J Fixing plate Screw plate OI Screw tighten temporarily Screws 2 a Spacer Ge Screw AN pi Attach SSN ttachment bol Fixing plate Scre
175. e booklet stopper lowers to the first folding position and the sheet is set to the first folding position 7 The folding knife and the folding roller perform the first folding and the paper is conveyed toward the tri folding stopper 8 The tri folding stopper curls the sheet and the second folding is made by drawing it to the tri folding roller The tri folded sheet is delivered to the booklet tray Paper exit opening unit Entrance roller NN Conveyance roller A Alignment plate U Conveyance roller B z Intermediate conveyance roller O 3 Stacker entrance roller Alignment plate L Flat stapling stopper Folding roller Three folding stopper Booklet stopper Booklet tray Three folding stopper ENWW Paper conveyance path 19 Finisher overview 20 Finisher overview ENWW ENWW Finisher explanation unit External Section miooo iris ern een COMPOSI gaze Ras ee ee cbse ee are ee Mechanism ss aa see ee Conveyance SectiON oooccoccococo en GoOmposition u NA na kann ke MechanisMmis i2 0c0ca0 esa ee gale ace een M701 finisher conveyance control eee eae M712 gate drive control 0000 cee eee eee SD705 bypass gate control 00 00 M702 shift control 2 0 0 2 00 eee M707 paper exit roller control 0 0 a SD704 paper exit opening solenoid control M708 paper exit opening control a M721
176. e drum and also to the cleaning blade regardless of whether the parts are new or old After applying setting powder to the drum perform the following before installing the drum unit in the MFP With the charging corona unit and developing unit removed turn the drum once to prevent setting powder from scattering onto the charging corona unit and to prevent image defects When installing a new drum be sure to enter Mode 25 and select Copy Count by Parts to be Replaced to reset drum counter ENWW Procedure 1 Remove the drum unit from the MFP 2 Remove the charging corona unit developing unit cleaning blade and toner guide roller from the drum unit See Corona unit on page 159 Developing unit on page 166 and Cleaning toner recycle unit on page 170 3 Supporting the drum at both ends with your fingers so that the drum surface is not damaged slowly remove it upward front side first 4 Clean the toner scattered around the drum installation area using a blower brush and a cleaning pad Hold here 5 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse Drum unit 155 MFP disassembly assembly Removing and reinstalling the separation claws and separation CAUTION claw solenoid CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Take care not to damage the drum when removing the separation claws Note the orientation and position of t
177. e paper dust removing brush with the positioning hole on the second paper feed unit 3 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW ADF unit 189 MFP disassembly assembly Removing and reinstalling the registration MC MC1 WARNING The interlock which is turned off when the front right or left door opens or closes should never be turned on forcibly with the ADU stand pulled out CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull out the ADU stand from the MFP 2 Remove one screw to remove the ADU stand pulling lever ADU stand drawing lever Screw AS 190 MFP disassembly assembly 3 Remove three screws to remove the ADU cover ADU cover 4 Remove one screw and remove the registration roller rotation knob Registration roller rotation knob ENWW 5 Disconnect the inline connector CN422 An inline connector consists of two male sides and one female side Be sure to remove only the male side shown below of the CN422 connector CAUTION 6 Remove the snap ring to detach the registration MC MC1 CAUTION When reinstalling be sure the detent of the clutch is in the clutch cover groove Registration MC MC1 Ky Stopper Relay connec
178. e section paper suction mechanism A paper suction duct is provided in the middle of the conveyance section and is led to the conveyance suction fan FM3 installed in the ADU To improve transportability of the paper that passes Automatic duplex unit ADU 97 MFP unit explanation 5 through the conveyance section the conveyance suction fan is used to provide suction for the paper Conveyance suction fan FM3 Suction holes Duct Conveyance section ag VA 5 Reverse exit paper path selection The reverse exit selection gate in the fuser unit determines whether the paper is to be ejected straight or reversed and ejected The paper gate is operated by the reverse gate SD SD7 installed in the ADU Because paper is reversed in the reverse exit section in the ADU the reverse exit section is provided with a reverse exit gate to switch between the forward and backward paper conveyance paths This gate has no drive mechanism and it is opened by the rigidity of the paper a Reverse exit operation Normally the reverse exit selection gate opens when the reverse gate SD SD7 is turned off The paper fed by the exit roller in the fuser unit is fed through the path under the reverse exit selection gate to the reverse exit section in the ADU by the decurler roller Normally the reverse exit gate in the reverse exit section is closed This gate is opened by the rigidity of the fed paper allowing the paper to
179. e staple 1 corner staple 11 by 17 Ledger or 11 by 17 but ledger when referring to the HCI s name 25 mode 2 5 mode 36 mode 3 6 mode 47 mode 4 7 mode 5 5 X 8 5 5 5 by 8 5 half letter 5 5 X 8 5 R 5 5 by 8 5 R half letter rotated 8 5 X11 Letter 8 5 X 14 Legal 80 g m 75 g m 20 Ib Agitator screws Developer supply screws AMS Automatic Magnification Selection APS Automatic Paper Selection Auto scale Auto paper APS sensors Document size detection sensors in text APS sensors in tables or drawings Armature Shaft Basic screen Main screen Bypass tray Tray 1 Cartridge set mode Centring Adjustment Cartridge set mode drum Centering Adjustment Charging control plate Charge control grid Charger cleaning block U Corona cleaning block Charger cleaning block L Charge control grid cleaner Copier Copy controller Copy quantity setting keys Keypad Cover sheet feeder Post Insertion Kit Cylindrical lens 2 Focusing lens 2 Dmax Maximum contrast Double feed prevention roller Separation roller 228 Terminology cross reference ENWW Copy industry terminology HP terminology FO lens Focusing lens 1 FO Faults Issues Feed roller Pick roller Feeder cover Jam access cover Fixing Fusing Fixing unit Fuser Flatbed unit Scannin
180. e to the paper type selected in the key MFP unit explanation drive 1 conveyance roller dedicated motor operator mode thus enhancing middle lower Belt reliability of copying on thick paper Tray 1 loop Tray 1 feed roller Gear drive drive 1 and ADU dedicated motor Paper type Motor speed pre registration roller Belt Thick paper 185 mm s Scanner Exposure unit Wire drive Others 280 mm s 9055 drive 1 V mirror unit a motor 320 mm s 9065 Paper exit Paper exit roller Gear drive drive 1 dedicated motor ENWW Drive section 41 M2 drum control 5V P GND DRUM_CONT DRUM_CLK CW CCW DRUM_EM vv PRCB MS1 MS2 24V2 OO 00 4 P GND DCPS M2 drum is controlled by PRCB printer control board and the motor drive power is supplied from DCPS DC power supply unit 1 Operation M2 drum is a motor driven by 24 VDC It drives the drum toner guide roller toner conveyance screw and separation claw swing The flywheel mechanism adopted for M2 ensures accurate and steady rotation M2 starts rotating when the START button is pressed and stops when the specified time lapses after completion of second paper feeding of the last copy When either one of the front left and front right doors of this machine opens MS1 interlock MS R or MS2 interlock MS L actuates to stop supplying the DC power to the motor causing M2 to st
181. e two click sounds os y Align Te 5 To reattach the sponge roller shaft perform the same procedure in reverse order CAUTION When reinstalling the shaft make sure that the pin on the far end of the shaft is placed properly in the slot ENWW Removing and reinstalling the paper exit opening unit CAUTION Make sure that the power cord of the MFP is unplugged from the power outlet Procedure 1 Remove the following parts Top cover 1 or optional PI if installed Top cover 2 Side cover e Rear cover e Main tray Main paper exit opening cover 2 Remove a mounting screw on the paper exit open close link 7 Paper exit open close link ENWW 3 Remove three screws holding the clamps one screw holding the ground Also remove the connector CN110 for the paper exit opening SD SD704 and the main tray paper exit PS PS706 Screw holding the ground cable Paper exit opening SD SD704 Connector CN110 Screw holding the clamp Main tray paper exit PS PS706 4 Remove the two E rings and the two brushings at the front and rear side Remove the paper exit opening unit Bearing E ring Bearing Paper exit opening unit 5 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse Conveyance section 69 Finisher disassembly assembly Main tray section Replacing the tray up down motor M703 CAUTION Procedure Make sure that the power cord of the
182. e upper unit and perform the steps 2 and 3 6 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION Ensure that the mounting direction of each roller and rubber is correct ENWW Index A automatic sheet feeding online operation specifications 2 theory of operation 5 Cc center cross section drawing 3 copy paper 2 copy sizes lower tray 2 upper tray 2 curling paper 2 D dimensions machine 2 double feed prevent roller 20 drive system diagram 4 E environment operating 3 external covers 18 external section removing and reinstalling 18 theory of operation 8 F feed control 10 feeding process 5 H humidity 3 interlock control 8 L lower tray copy sizes 2 ENWW maintenance 3 manual sheet feeding offline operation specifications 2 theory of operation 5 O operating environment 3 P paper curling 2 plain 2 printing 2 special 2 stacking capacity 2 paper feed unit removing and reinstalling 19 theory of operation 9 paper pick roller 19 pick roller 19 plain paper 2 power consumption 2 power source 2 printing paper 2 product specifications 2 S service life 3 sheet feeding specifications automatic online operation 2 manual offline operation 2 sheet feeding theory of operation automatic online operation 5 manual offline operation 5 special paper 2 specifications product 2 stacking capacity paper 2 21 Index T temperature
183. e user or CE may be injured Donot allow any metal parts such as clips staples and screws to fall into the MFP They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage Current can leak leading to a risk of electric shock or fire When disconnecting connectors grasp the connector not the cable Specifically connectors of the AC line and high voltage parts Current can leak leading to a risk of electric shock or fire 12 Safety ENWW WARNING Safety checkpoints Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit Current can leak leading to a risk of MFP trouble or fire Check high voltage cables and sheaths for any damage Current can leak leading to a risk of electric shock or fire Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and sign of leakage Current can leak leading to a risk of trouble or fire Before disassembling or adjusting the laser scanner assembly incorporating a laser make sure that the power cord has been disconnected The laser light can enter your eye leading to a risk of loss of eyesight Do not remove the cover of the laser scanner assembly Do not supply power with the laser scanner assembly shifted from the specified mounting position The laser light can enter your eye leadin
184. e you may be injured ENWW Safety labels on the MFPs 19 Safety Finisher with Cover Sheet Feeder only A CAUTI ON Paa AE a DO NOT insert your finger into A CAUTI 0 N an the bottom of the upper part DO NOT put your hand a PRECAUCION SPRECAUCION of the feeder when returning between the main body un to its original position f and tray otherwise you otherwise you may be injured may be injured A ATTENTION A CUIDADO a CAUTION All trays ATTENTION A ATTENTION vorsicht fa La PRECAUCION PRECAUCION AS ATTENZIONE acua ane lacaurion amp CAUTION Punch Kit l A CAUTION A CAUTION SE Za ATTENTION To avoid injury DO NOT N N mo put your hand on top of Ramon 7 LY __ the printed sheets A ATTENTION WEN p APRECAUCION J Be sure to hold both sides A CUIDADO A a of the PIA poo ole AATENTION ZA removing them an APRECAUCION ARA Fist ATTENZIONE NOT leave your hand on ER Caba Finisher only A the printed sheets while Z E the primary main tray S A CAUTI ON LET goes up Inside the lower paper Q3634A Finisher exit outlet is the roller drive unit DO NOT put A CAUTI ON your hand into it
185. ed from the wall outlet When replacing the ozone filter insertitin the opening in the MFP as far as it will go 1 Loosen two screws to remove the ozone filter cover Ozone filter cover 2 Replace the ozone filter 132 MFP disassembly assembly Ozone filter LI Ozone filter cover 3 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Replacing the developing suction filter CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet When replacing the developing suction filter insert it in the opening in the MFP as far as it will go Procedure 1 Loosen the screw to remove the developing suction filter cover 2 Replace the developing suction filter Developing suction filter Screw Ns 4 e l Developing suction filter cover AN 3 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION When installing the developing suction filter the filter supporting material should face the back of the MFP ENWW Removing and reinstalling the external covers CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Remove fourteen screws to detach the rear cover The ozone filter cover and the option cover detach together with the rear cover CAUTION Option cover Ozone filter cover Screws
186. ee Double side original copy mode 02 cee eee eee Mixed original copy mode 0 0000 e eee eee Z fold original copy mode 000 c eee ADF overview Automatic document feeder product specifications Type Sheet through type reversible DF Functions Original size o Metric area A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 A5R B6R e Inch area ledger legal letter letterR 5 5x8 5 5 5x85R e All sizes are detected through the APS e Mixing of original sizes possible Original type Plain original 50 g m or 14 lb to 130 g m or 35 Ib high quality paper Special original Original feed and conveyance ability may be inferior to those of 50 g m or 14 Ib to 130 g m or 35 Ib high quality original The following types of original cannot be used e Fine quality paper less than 35 g m or 10 Ib e Fine quality paper more than 201 g m or 54 Ib Ohp film Blueprint masters Label original Offset masters Bonded originals 2 ADF overview Original curling 10 mm maximum i As Amount of curl Maximum number of stacked originals 100 sheets maximum 80 g m or 22 Ib Original read speed copies per minute 600 dpi Mode Original size Feed speed Single sided original A4 letter 65 Double sided original A4 letter 38 Original feed layout Face up placement centered U turn feed straight eject switch back reversal method paper fed in order of 2 gt 1
187. ent H No original 9 SIG PS307 to SCDB Front side original skew detection signal L Original present H No original ENWW 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 ENWW SIG PS308 to SCDB Rear side original skew detection signal L Original present H No original DF FAN SC SIG FM301 to SCDB to PRCB FM301 abnormal operation detection signal L FM301 normal H FM301 abnormal DF M1 CLK PRCB to SCDB M301 control clock DF M1 F R PRCB to SCDB M301 drive direction control signal DF M1 EN PRCB to SCDB M301 drive IC enable signal DF M1 M1 PRCB to SCDB M301 drive control signal DF_M1_M2 PRCB to SCDB M301 drive control signal DF M1 11 PRCB to SCDB M301 drive electric current control signal DF M1 12 PRCB to SCDB M301 drive electric current control signal DF_M1_RETURN PRCB to SCDB M301 return signal DF_M2_CLK PRCB to SCDB M302 control clock DF_M2_F R PRCB to SCDB M302 drive direction control signal DF_M2_EN PRCB to SCDB M302 drive IC enable signal 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 DF M2 M1 PRCB to SCDB M302 drive control signal DF_M2_M2 PRCB to SCDB M302 drive control signal DF M2 11 PRCB to SCDB M302 drive electric current control signal DF M2 12 PRCB to SCDB M302 drive electric current control signal DF M2 RETURN PRCB to SCDB M302 return signal DF M RESET PRCB to SCDB M301 M302 drive r
188. er ENWW M709 DRV 1 M709 DRV 1 M709 DRV 1 M709 DRV 1 M709 DRV 2 M709 DRV 2 M709 DRV 2 M709 DRV 2 5V R LS SGND SGND M714 DRV 1 M714 DRV 1 M714 DRV 1 M714 DRV 1 M714 DRV 2 M714 DRV 2 M714 DRV 2 M714 DRV 2 5V M710 DRV F M710 DRV F M710 DRV R M710 DRV R M715 DRV F M715 DRV F M715 DRV R M715 DRV R The finisher CB finisher control board controls the operations of the four motors M709 M714 M710 and M715 The related signals are PS730 stapler hp PS R PS731 stapler hp F PS732 clincher hp R PS733 clincher hp F SW701 cartridge R SW703 cartridge F SW702 staple R and SW704 staple F Stapler section 53 Finisher unit explanation 1 Operation 2 Signals a Staple a Finisher CB input signals Upon completion of the alignment operation by the alignment plates M709 and M714 stapler R and F initiate the operation of pushing the needles into the paper After a predefined time period has elapsed M710 and M715 clincher R and F start bending of the needles The stapling operation finishes when PS732 clincher hp R and PS733 clincher hp F as well as PS730 stapler hp R and PS731 stapler hp F detect the clinchers and the staplers at their home positions off to on b Staple clogging detection During the stapling action if one or more signals from PS730 PS731 stapler hp R and F PS732 and
189. er CB Signal indicating whether the staplers F and R are in the home position L Not in the home position 52 Finisher unit explanation H In the home position 2 PS713 IN PS713 to RB to finisher CB Signal indicating whether the stapler R is in the home position L Not in the home position H In the home position 3 PS714 IN PS714 to RB to finisher CB Signal indicating whether the clincher R is in the home position L Not in the home position H In the home position b Finisher CB output signals 1 M704 DRVA A finisherCB to RB to M704 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase A of M704 2 M704 DRV B B finisherCB to RB to M704 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase B of M704 3 M706 DRV A A finisherCB to RB to M706 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase A of M706 4 M706 DRV B B finisherCB to RB to M706 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase B of M706 5 M711 DRV A A finisherCB to RB to M711 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase A of M711 6 M711 DRVB B finisherCB to RB to M711 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase B of M711 ENWW Staple control ka ee M709 CONT M709 CONT M709 F R M709 F R M714 CONT M714 F R M710 CONT M715 CONT MAIN BODY The stapling operation is performed using four motors M709 stapler R M714 stapler F M710 clincher R and M715 clincher F The stapler pushes out the staple which is bent by the clinch
190. er The scanning starts when the original registration PS PS306 turns on ENWW Registration roller aa an Conveyance roller The original is read when it passes over the ADF glass The original that has been read is ejected to the original exit section by the original exit roller passing along the circumference of the original exit guide The next original is pre fed if there is one Next original Original exit roller Original exit guide ADF glass Double side original copy mode single side copy double side copy The order by which the original is scanned is 25154 53 during the double side original copy mode the back side is scanned first then the front side The original set on the original feed tray is pre fed by the pick roller and feed roller until the original registration PS 1 PS304 turns on and original reaches the registration roller Then the reverse gate opens and the registration roller conveys the original to the ENWW reversal section The reversal roller and original exit reversal roller feed the original inside the reversal section Original registration PS 1 PS304 Original exit reversal Registration roller roller Reversal roller Reverse gate The original is conveyed to the edge of the reverse gate until it stops when the specified time has passed since the PS304 detects the trailing e
191. er control board according to the fuser web counter value The fuser web counter value is incremented together with the total counter in exit section of the MFP The relationship between the fuser web counter values and SD2 web is as follows Fuser web counter value SD2 drive count 1 to 12 000 Once per copy 12 001 to 30 000 Once per copy 1 30 001 to 60 000 Once per copy 2 60 001 to 125 000 Once per 2 copies 125 0001 to 260 000 Once per 3 copies 260 001 or more Once per 6 copies 4 SD2 is turned on once per copy but is not turned on once per six copies 2 SD is turned on once per copy but is not turned on once per three copies 3 Signals a PRCB input signal 1 FIXEXIT_PS PS30 to PRCB Detection signal of passage of paper at fuser unit exit L Detected H Not detected ENWW Fuser unit 113 MFP unit explanation Fuser temperature control FIXHT1_CONT FIXHT2_CONT FIXHT3_CONT AC C The fuser roller upper is heated by L2 fuser heater lamp 1 and L3 fuser heater lamp 2 and the fuser roller lower is heated by L4 fuser heater lamp 3 The PRCB printer control board detects the temperature of the fuser roller upper using TH1 fuser temperature sensor 1 and TH2 fuser temperature sensor 2 and controls L2 and L3 via DCPS DC power supply unit 1 Operation a Temperature control The PRCB printer control board turns on the fuser
192. er motor M707 Gate drive motor M712 ee Paper exit opening SD SD704 FNS conveyance motor M701 17 PI conveyance roller NJ Paper exit roller NG N Shift roller Entrance roller Conveyance roller A Conveyance roller B By pass gate SD SD705 By pass gate Intermediate conveyance roller ENWW Drive system diagram 7 Finisher overview Stacker drive Alignment plate U From paper exit roller motor M707 Paper exit arm Alignment motor U M705 Stacker entrance motor M713 Stacker entrance roller SER Flat stapling stopper Alignment motor L M716 Booklet stopper Alignment plate L Stopper motor M718 8 Finisher overview ENWW Staple drive Clincher Stapler R Stapler F Stapler movement motor M711 Clincher F Clincher rotation motor M704 Clincher R ENWW Drive system diagram 9 Finisher overview Tray drive Up down pulley U Main tray Up down wire Up down pulley L Tray up down motor M703 10 Finisher overview ENWW Folding drive Folding roller Three folding gate Folding knife Folding knife motor Three folding gate SD M719 SD706 F Three folding roller Fold
193. er passage detection signal for Tray 4 L Not detected H Detected 4 VF_DOOR_PS PS29 to PRCB Vertical conveyance section open close detection signal L Open H Closed b PRCB output signals 1 VFMC1_DRV PRCB to MC11 MC11 drive control signal L MC11 on H MC11 off 2 VFMC2 DRV PRCB to MC 12 MC12 drive control signal L MC12 on H MC12 off 94 MFP unit explanation ENWW Automatic duplex unit ADU Composition ADU conveyance roller 2 Conveyance belt Paper exit roller ADU conveyance roller 1 NO Ss gt gt Q Paper exit 7 N conveyance roller N Reverse exit gate Pre transfer roller Registration roller Reverse exit roller ADU gate ADU reverse roller Reverse gate SD SD7 Paper exit roller rotation knob Paper exit motor M7 Paper exit fan R FM7 Paper exit fan F FM6 Reverse exit roller rotation knob ADU drive board ADUDB ADU pre registration roller ADU conveyance roller 4 ADU conveyance roller 3 Reverse exit motor M8 FA Transfer separation cleaning motor M10 Fa YU f2 A 7S ff J TSL Conveyance motor M5 ADU deceleration MC MC2 ADU conveyance MC MC13 toh tt Registrat ller rotation k N egistration roller rotation knob Ng Ul
194. er unit 3 Remove the snap ring to detach the separation roller ENWW 4 Remove the separation roller rubber from 3 Remove the snap ring to detach the the roller pre registration MC 1 2 MC4 6 and feed MC 1 2 MC3 5 Paint mark Separation roller Separation roller rubber Cha y IA Ky sk E Snap ring Snap ring 5 Reinstall the above parts following the Feed MC 3 removal steps in reverse MC7 Snap ring CAUTION When reinstalling the Pre registration MC 3 separation roller pay MC8 attention to their Connector orientation CN851 Check that no grease or 4 Reinstall the above parts following the the like remains on the removal steps in reverse separation roller CAUTION When reinstalling each Replacing the pre registration MC fit the detent in the slit and feed clutches MCs in the MC Procedure 1 Remove the paper feed unit 2 Remove the four connectors CN810 811 830 831 ENWW Paper feed units of Trays 2and 3 175 MFP disassembly assembly Replacing the wires CAUTION After replacing or reinstalling the wires manually rotate the up down drive shaft to check that the tray moves up and down smoothly Be sure to install the wires so that they do not cross or ride over each other Procedure 1 Remove the paper feed unit 2 Remove three screws to remove the wire cover front and wire cover rear Wire cover rear Wire cover front Screws 6
195. ering to the inside of the developing unit and magnet roller Developing gear 5 Supply fresh developer evenly from the top of the developer supply screws 6 Rotate the developing gear until the developer enters the developing unit 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to supply all of the developer Developer Developing unit stopper roller 168 MFP disassembly assembly 8 Rotate the developing gear counterclockwise to check that the developer bristles along the entire length of the developing sleeve Developing sleeve Developing unit stopper roller Developing gear 9 Install the developing unit cover then install the developing unit in the drum unit CAUTION After installing the developing unit in the drum unit make sure the developing unit stopper roller is in contact with the developing unit stopper plate allocation of DSD Cleaning the developing unit bias shaft CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull out the drum unit from the MFP See Drum unit on page 152 2 Remove the developing unit from the drum unit ENWW 3 Wipe the dirt on the developing unit bias 3 After removing the toner bottle clean the shaft with a cleaning pad area around the toner bottle insertion hole Developing gear with a cleaning pad Toner bottle Developing sleeve Developing unit bias shaft Bottle A linsertion hole 4 Reinstall the above
196. es U and L switch the paper path to three directions the sub tray the main tray and the stacker section The upper and lower gates U and L are driven by the gate cam which is driven by the gate drive motor M712 ENWW Gate drive motor M712 N A Gate cam Y Gate L D Gate U The gate cam consists of two cams U and L on the same shaft The position of the cams determines the paper path Gate HP PS PS716 To sub tray c m am Cam L Sub tray paper exit Stacker section paper exit Main tray paper exit To main tray ENWW 2 Bypass gate The bypass gate is located on the path to the stacker This gate changes the conveyance path of the next sheet while the stapling is being performed saving time and improving performance This gate is used for small size papers A4 B5 and 8 5 by 11 The gate changes the feeding direction of the second sheet so that it is laid over the first sheet The first and second sheets will be conveyed to the stacker simultaneously The bypass gate SD SD705 drives the bypass gate Conveyance section 25 Finisher unit explanation 3 26 First paper of the second and subsequent sets First paper of the second and subsequent sets By pass gate SD SD705 Second paper of the second and subsequent sets First paper of the second and subsequent sets By pass gate Second paper of the second and subsequent sets By pass gate
197. eset signal DF FAN CONT PRCB to SCDB FM301 drive control signal DF CL CONT PRCB to SCDB MC301 drive control signal b Output signal 1 A A SCDB to M301 M301 A phase drive signal 2 B B SCDB to M301 M301 B phase drive signal 3 A A SCDB to M302 M302 A phase drive signal 4 B B SCDB to M302 M302 B phase drive signal 5 DRIVE SCDB to M301 MC301 ON OFF drive signal L MC301 on H MC301 off 6 FM CONT SCDB to FM301 FM301 ON OFF drive signal L FM301 off H FM301 on Original feed conveyance exit section 15 ADF unit explanation 7 DF_M2_MOI SCDB to PRCB M302 MOI signal 8 SIG SCDB a PRCB FM301 operation detection signal 9 PS301_SIG SCDB to PRCB See Input signal 10PS302_SIG SCDB to PRCB See Input signal 11PS303_SIG SCDB to PRCB See Input signal 12PS304_SIG SCDB to PRCB See Input signal 13PS305_SIG SCDB to PRCB See Input signal 14PS306_SIG SCDB to PRCB See Input signal 15PS307_SIG SCDB to PRCB See Input signal 16PS308_SIG SCDB to PRCB See Input signal 17PS311_SIG SCDB to PRCB See Input signal 16 ADF unit explanation Original reversal and conveyance control pota paa DF M1 CLK DF M1 F R DF M1 RETURN DF M2 CLK DF M2 F R DF M2 RETURN PS303 SIG P5304 SIG PS305 SIG DF SD1 CONT DF SD2 CONT DF SD3 CONT DF M RESET The original exit gate which switches the original exit path is driven by SD302 exit gate drive The reverse gate which switche
198. etected the trailing edge of the paper and a predefined time period has elapsed since then SD706 is deactivated 60 Finisher unit explanation 4 M720 F R finisher CB to RB to M720 Signal to control the rotation direction of M720 L CW H CCW SD706 CONT 24V SD706 5V PS725 IN GND PS725 ERE 2 Signals a Finisher CB output signals 1 SD706 CONT finisher CB to RB to SD706 Signal to activate deactivate SD706 L SD706 on H SD706 off ENWW ENWW Finisher disassembly assembly External secti n recensa ansehe na 62 Removing and reinstalling the booklet tray Q3634A only 62 Removing and reinstalling the top cover 1 62 Removing and reinstalling the top cover 2 63 Removing and reinstalling the side cover 63 Removing and reinstalling the front door 005 64 Removing and reinstalling the rear cover 0 00 000 64 Removing and reinstalling the main tray o ooo o oooo o 65 Removing and reinstalling the main paper exit opening cover 66 Removing and reinstalling the booklet paper exit opening cover Q3634A only cee 66 Conveyance Section a urn dae ea eed a aha i aaa ke 67 Replacing the paper exit roller sponge roller 67 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller sponge roller 68 Removing and reinstalling the paper exit opening
199. ett Packard could result in the product not meeting the Class A limits in which case the FCC could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Note Any changes or modifications to the MFP that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class A limits of Part 15 of the FCC Rules Safety information Safety circuits This MFP is provided with the following safety circuits to prevent MFP issues from resulting in serious accidents Overall protection circuit L2 and L3 fuser heater lamps overheating prevention circuit These safety circuits are described below to provide the service engineer with a renewed awareness of them in order to prevent servicing errors that may impair their functions 16 Safety ENWW Overall protection circuit CBR1 a gt Protection by CBR1 and CBR2 circuit breakers CBR1 and CBR interrupt the AC line instantaneously when an excessive current flows due to a short in the AC line CAUTION The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not be deactivated under any circumstances Protection by L2 L3 and L4 fuser heater lamps overheating prevention circuit Control section _ AC driver section Protection by software The output voltage from TH1 fuser temperature sensor 1 is read by the CPU If this voltage is abnormal L2 fuser heater lamp 1 L3 fuser heate
200. f the allow to remove each roller ENWW Paint mark Rubber Feed drive belt Pick roller Feed roller S GQ a Ca Snap ring Z m Na SU Bearing Q A Rubber 2 a Tang P Bearing J Actuator 1 1 1 1 4 When replacing the paper pick roller and pick roller for the lower tray open the upper tray and perform the steps 2 and 3 Top cover 5 Reinstall the above parts following the Release lever removal steps in reverse CAUTION Ensure that the mounting direction of each roller and rubber is correct Paper feed unit 19 Post insertion disassembly assembly Replacing the double feed prevent roller and torque limiter CAUTION Make sure that the power cord of the MFP is unplugged from the power outlet Procedure 1 When replacing the double feed prevent roller and the torque limiter for the upper tray detach the top cover 2 Detach the paper pick roller unit 3 Release the hooks on both sides remove the separation roller assembly by lifting up then pull out the shaft and remove the double feed prevention roller together with the feed reverse gear Separation roller 4 Separate the separation roller and the torque limiter from the separation roller assembly 20 Post insertion disassembly assembly Snap rings Separation roller Torque limiter Notch 5 When replacing the separation roller and the torque limiter for the lower tray open th
201. ff 2 DEVM_CLK PRCB to M3 M3 developing rotational speed control clock signal 3 DEVM_CW CCW PRCB to M3 M3 developing rotational direction indication signal H CW direction rotation L CCW direction rotation 4 EDVM GAIN PRCB to M3 M3 developing rotational speed range indication signal H High speed range L Low speed range 64 MFP unit explanation Developing bias control The developing bias voltage is supplied from HV high voltage unit and is controlled by PRCB printer control board The output level of the developing bias voltage is transmitted using 8 bit serial data This serial data includes the level information for all outputs driven by HV excluding the ON OFF control signal Accordingly a separate signal line is provided to turn on off only the developing bias 1 Operation Application of the developing bias voltage starts after a lapse of the specified time from turning on of the START button and stops after a lapse of the specified time from turning off of PS43 leading edge by the last copy paper Developing bias output range 300 V to 700V 2 Signals a Output signal 1 B CONT PRCB to HV Developing bias output ON OFF control signal L Developing bias on H Developing bias off ENWW Dmax maximum contrast control 12V 5V A GND P GND DMLED_CONT DRUM_CONT DM_MONI_EX DRUM_CLK DJLED_CONT CW CCW DM_SIG_EX DRUM_EM DRUM_JSIG_EX TNLED_REF TEMP 3 3V2
202. ff Thus paper skew is corrected by forming the loop before pre registration roller 84 MFP unit explanation T3FEED DRV T3PREMC DRV MC24V 1 MC24V_1 2 Start timing of printing of the second copy When the preceding paper turns off PS13 3 OFF timing When PS13 is turned on b Operating of the MC8 pre registration MC 3 1 ON timing After a specified time from the MC7 paper feed MC 5 2 OFF timing When PS13 paper feed 3 is turned off ENWW 2 Signals a PRCB input signals 1 T3PREM_PS PS13 to PRCB Paper passage detection signal Tray 4 L Detected H Not detected b PRCB output signals 1 T3FEED_DRV PRCB to MC7 MC7 drive control signal Tray 4 L MC7 on H MC7 off 2 T3PREM_PS PRCB to MC8 MC8 drive control signal Tray 4 L MC8 on H MC8 off ENWW Tray 4 paper feed unit 85 MFP unit explanation Paper up drive control T3RISEM 24 T3RISEM D Paper stacked in the tray is pushed up by transmitting the drive force of M18 tray up drive 3 to the up down plate in the tray via drive wires M18 is controlled by the PRCB printer control board Related signals are PS14 tray upper limit 3 and PS16 remaining paper 3 1 Operation a Paper up drive control When Tray 4 is loaded M18 tray up drive 3 turns on to lift the up down plate in the tray When PS14 tray upper limit 3 detects the upper limit of paper as the paper up down plate in the
203. fter formation of a paper loop by the registration roller thus writing the image on the back side c ADF lock control The ADU handle is locked by SD9 ADU lock PS47 ADU handle detects the handle position to determine whether the handle is locked or released 2 Signals a Input signals 1 ADU JAM PS41 to ADUSDB Detection signal of paper passage from exit of ADU conveyance roller 1 L Detected H Not detected 2 HD PS PS47 to ADUDB ADU handle position detection signal H Handle is released 3 ADUCR PS PS48 to ADUDB Detection signal of paper passage from exit of ADU conveyance roller 2 L Detected H Not detected Automatic duplex unit ADU 109 MFP unit explanation 4 ADUDN_PS PS49 to ADUDB Detection signal of paper passage from exit of ADU conveyance roller 3 L Detected H Not detected b Output signals 1 LOCK_SD ADUDB to SD9 SD9 ADU lock drive signal L SD9 on H SD9 off 2 ADUDN_MC ADUDB to MC2 MC2 ADU deceleration drive signal L MC2 on H MC2 off 3 ADUCR_MC ADUDB to MC13 MC13 ADU conveyance drive signal L MC13 on H MC13 off 110 MFP unit explanation ENWW Fuser unit Composition Fuser claw unit upper Fuser unit cover upper Pressure release lever Fuser heater lamp 2 L3 Cleaning web wind up shaft Pressure roller Cleaning web unwinding shaft Fuser claw upper Fuser roller upper Fuser heater lamp 1 L2 o NG Res
204. fuser 3 ADF conveyance Same as paper reverse exit c Reverse control M8 reverse exit starts when the START button is pressed and it stops when PS37 paper exit turns off at detection of the trailing edge of the last sheet of paper Its rotational speed and direction change when paper is ejected or reversed or is fed to ADU 1 Paper reverse exit The paper fed from the fuser unit is then fed to the reverse exit section via the reverse exit selection gate Normally M8 and M9 are rotating in the forward direction at a low speed feeding the paper to the ADU reverse section When PS30 fuser exit detects the trailing edge of paper and consequently turns off M8 and M9 start rotating in the forward direction at a high speed feeding paper to the ADU reverse section continuously When PS42 paper reverse detects the trailing edge of paper and consequently turns off M8 and M9 start rotating in the opposite direction at a high speed feeding the paper in the paper exit direction When PS45 ADU paper reverse detects the trailing edge of paper and consequently turns off M9 starts rotating in the forward direction ata low speed After a lapse of the specified time from detection of the trailing edge of paper by PS46 reverse exit M8 reverse exit starts Automatic duplex unit ADU 105 MFP unit explanation rotating in the forward direction at a low speed proceeding to feed the next sheet of paper 2 ADF conve
205. g an inspection read all relevant documentation service handbook technical notices and so forth and proceed with the inspection following the prescribed procedure in safety clothes using only the prescribed tools Do not make any adjustment not described in the documentation If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used the MFP may break and a risk of injury or fire exists e Before conducting an inspection be sure to disconnect the power cords from the MFP and optional accessories When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet some units are still powered even if the power switch is turned off A risk of electric shock exists ENWW Safety warnings 11 Safety A CAUTION Inspection before servicing The area around the fuser unit is hot You may get burned N WARNING Work performed with the MFP powered Be careful when making adjustments or performing an operation check with the MFP powered on If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached you may touch live or high voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt leading to a risk of injury Be careful when servicing with the external cover detached High voltage exists around the drum unit A risk of AY electric shock exists IN WARNING Safety checkpoints Check the exterior and frame for edges burrs and other damage Th
206. g glass FNS Finisher Fold Folding HCI left side door HCI door HCI lever HCI jam access lever HCI top door HCI top cover HP sensor Home position sensor Jig Adjustment tool Large Capacity Tray LCT Tray 5 HCI Left partition glass ADF glass LT driver board Magnetic clutch HCI control board Clutch Main switch SW1 Primary power switch Main tray or main bin Paper exit face down tray MC magnetic clutch CL clutch Measuring guides glass Alignment guides MS MT MTEM SW switch Motor motor error message OHP interleave Transparency interleave Oil less metal Bushing Operation panel Control panel Original feed tray ADF ADF input tray Original stopper plates Alignment guides scanner glass Output tray ADF Original exit tray ENWW Terminology cross reference for the MFP 229 Terminology cross reference Copy industry terminology HP terminology Paper up down plate Paper lift plate Platen glass Scanner glass Platen guide cover White board Power saver on off Sleep on off Print controller Formatter assembly when referring to contents of print kit Printer copier machine or main body MFP Proof output Proof and hold RADF ADF Relay connector Inline connector Resin ring Snap ring Resis or Resist Registration Saddle stitch
207. g paper quantity and display Stacked paper PS102 PS103 PS104 PS105 Remaining quantity Paper quantity display 0 to 700 OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 flashing 701 to 1200 ON OFF OFF OFF ton 1201 to 1700 ON ON OFF OFF 2on 1701 to 2200 ON ON ON OFF 2on 2201 to 2700 ON ON ON ON 3 on 2701 to 3200 OFF ON ON ON 3on 3201 to 3700 OFF OFF ON ON 4on 3701 or more OFF OFF OFF ON 4on Note The remaining paper quantity is indicated on the control panel with four horizontal bars Stacked paper quantity differs depending on the thickness of the paper b No paper detection control When there is no more paper inside the HCI PS108 HCI no paper detection turns on and a message is displayed on the MFP display 2 Signals a Input signals 1 SIG PS102 to HCIDB Remaining paper detection gear rotational position detection signal IL PS102 off H PS102 on Paper feed section 13 HCI unit explanation 2 SIG PS103 to HCIDB Remaining paper detection gear rotational position detection signal L PS103 off H PS103 on 3 SIG PS104 to HCIDB Remaining paper detection gear rotational position detection signal L PS104 off H PS104 on 4 SIG PS105 to HCIDB Remaining paper detection gear rotational position detection signal L PS105 off H PS105 on 5 0_PS PS108 to HCIDB HCI no paper detection signal L No paper H Paper present 14 HCl unit exp
208. g to a risk of loss of eyesight When replacing a lithium battery replace it with a new lithium battery specified in the parts guide manual Dispose of the used lithium battery using the method specified by local authority Improper replacement can cause explosion After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied for example optical lamp and fuser lamp be sure to check the installation state A risk of fire exists ND I AN S O SG SS gt ENWW Safety warnings 13 Safety N WARNING Safety checkpoints electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in the MFP for example when clearing a paper jam Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the interlock functions properly If the interlock does not function you may receive an Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges burrs or other pointed parts N Current can leak leading to a risk of electric shock aD oS or fire Make sure that all screws components wiring connectors and so forth that were removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled x pes in the original location Pay special attention to aD forgotten connectors pinched cables forgotten N IPO screws and so forth LL A risk of MFP trouble electric shock and fire exists NG Eg N WARNING Handling of service materials Unplug the
209. ge of the second paper feed section It turns off after a lapse of the 5 ACK1 PRCB to ADUDB specified time from detection of the trailing Reception acknowledgment signal It edge of copy paper is sent each time PRCB printer 2 Signals control board receives one byte data from ADUDB ADU drive board a Output signals When PRCB receives REQ1 and can 1 PCL CONT PRCB to PCL receive data this signal stands at the PCL ON OFF control signal Naa L PCL on 6 ERR OUT1 PRCB to ADUDB H PCL off This signal requires resending of data 2 TSL_DR ADUDB to TSL when PRCB printer control board 5 j has failed in data reception from TSL ON OFF control signal ADUDB ADU drive board due to an L TSL on Sen H TSL off PCL TSL control MC24V TSL_DR ADUDB LEDs are used for PCL pre charging exposure lamp and TSL transfer synchronization lamp PCL is driven by the 62 MFP unit explanation ENWW Developing unit Composition Developing unit cover Agitator screws Developing sleeve Developing regulation plate Mechanisms Mechanism Method Developing 2 component developer Developing bias DC bias Main agitator Auxiliary agitator Developer agitation 1 Developing drive The developing motor M3 drives the following parts via the gear unit at the back Developing sleeve Agitator wheel e Agitator screws 2 Flow of developer The developer inside the developing
210. ge of Dmax maximum contrast detection sensor PC1 on TCSB toner control sensor board Reference voltage 2 5 V 2 DM_MONI_EX TCSB to PRCB This signal monitors the light reflected by the drum surface without toner The voltage applied to the Dmax maximum contrast detection LED is corrected by TNLED_REF so that the output voltage becomes 1 9 V calibration Reference voltage 1 9 V lt Timing gt Before Dmax maximum contrast correction 3 DRUM_JSIG_EX TCSB to PRCB This signal detects a jam caused by paper wrapping around the drum A jam is detected when the voltage becomes 4 0 V or more 4 TEMP 3 3V2 TCSB to PRCB Drum temperature detection signal b Output signals 1 DMLED CONT PRCB to TCSB 66 MFP unit explanation ENWW Gradation correction control 5V P GND DRUM_CONT DRUM_CLK CW CCW DRUM_EM 5V P GND DEVM_CONT DEVM_CLK DEVM_CW CCW DEVM_GAIN DEVM_EM PRCB Gradation correction control is performed by a TCSB toner control sensor board M2 drum M3 developing and so on under the control of PRCB printer control board 1 Operation The gradation characteristics of the toner density versus exposure amount at the image forming section drum area are detected to obtain a linear relation between the image density on adocument and the copying image density ENWW MS1 MS2 00 0 0 Method Exposure is performed with the laser PW
211. gt 4 gt 3 during the double sided original copy Original image read position At the ADF glass section Machine data Power source DC24V 5V supplied from the MFP Maximum power consumption Less than 120 VA Weight Approximately 11 5 kg ENWW Machine dimensions 570 600 roa o LO Maintenance Maintenance Same as the MFP Operating environment Temperature 10 C to 30 C 50 F to 86 F Humidity 10 percent to 80 percent RH Note The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice ENWW Automatic document feeder product specifications 3 ADF overview Center cross sectional drawing Separation roller Feed roller Pick roller Registration roller Original pressing board Original feed tray Original exit reversal roller Reversal roller Reverse gate Original exit tray Original conveyance roller 1 Original exit roller Original conveyance roller 2 Original exit gate 4 ADF overview ENWW Drive system diagram Original feed MC MC301 Conveyance roller2 Conveyance roller1 ENWW riginal feed motor M301 Feed roller Pick roller Separation roller Original exit reversal roller Original pressing board Pressure roller release SD SD303 Exit gate drive SD SD
212. h Punch Kit product specifications Type Functions Applicable paper Punch kit data Maintenance Operating environment Center cross sectional view Drive system diagram Punch section Moving section Punching process kit overview Movement of the standby position of the punch unit Formation of a registration A e AN NAA AA Correction of the punch position a Punch aa Punch kit overview Punch Kit product specifications Type Self contained puncher Functions Punching method Reciprocating type punching Number of holes Inch 2 holes 3 holes for inch area 4 holes Swedish 4 holes for metric area and 2 holes for Japan 1 Hole diameter 46 5 mm 2 holes 4 holes Swedish 4 holes 68 0 mm 3 holes Inch 2 holes Hole pitch 80 mm 2 holes 4 holes 108 mm 3 holes 70 mm Inch 2 holes 21 mm 70 mm 21 mm Swedish 4 holes Hole positions lt 2 holes Inch 2 holes gt 2 holes 10 5 mm adjustable Inch 2 holes 9 5 mm adjustable 2 holes 80 mm not adjustable Inch 2 holes 70 mm not adjustable Longitudinal positions of holes Paper center adjustable 2 Punch kit overview lt 3 holes gt 9 5 mm adjustable lt Longitudinal positions of holes Paper center adjustable 108 mm not adjustable lt 4 holes gt
213. h a metal ball Insert wire A in the up down shaft attach a pulley and secure the pulley with an E ring Insert wire C in the pulleys then attach a metal ball Wire A Wire B Wind wire A around the Up down pulley by 6 turns in such shaft a manner that the wire can be pulled from over Insert wire A in the up down shaft attach a pulley and the pulley secure the pulley with an E ring ingertwire Diinithe a Wind wire A around the pulley 6 up down shaft attach PG turns by 6 turns in such a manner pulleys then pull wire that the wire can be pulled D from under the from over the pulley pulleys 2 SI 4 BY Insert wire B in the up down shaft attach a 6 turns pulley and wind wire B Insert wire C in the up down around the pulley by six Insert wire B in the up down shaft shaft attach a pulley and turns in such a manner attach a pulley and wind wire B secure the pulley with E rings that the wire can be around the pulley by six turns in pulled from over the such a manner that the wire can Pull wire C from under the pulley be pulled from over the pulley pulleys K aa ENWW Paper feed section 29 HCI disassembly assembly 18 After installing the up down wires check 22 Attach the other gears gear cover and whether they are engaged with the external covers following the removal pulleys properly and whether they do not steps in reverse ride over the p
214. he MFP s START button If MS701 interlock is off at this time however the finisher transmits an error signal to the MFP s PRCB and does not begin this control b M701 finisher conveyance control When the position of the START button is on and the paper exit speed is high ON from PS37 MFP paper exit sets the speed to low and ON from PS704 28 Finisher unit explanation finisher entrance sets the speed to high after a predefined time period For the main tray paper exit operation PS704 detects the end of the paper and after a predefined time period the speed mode switches to medium to match the paper exit speed of the finisher Then after a predefined time the mode returns to the high speed to prepare for the next conveyance of paper 2 Signals a Input signals 1 SRXD MFP to finisher CB Serial data line transmits the operating status of the MFP s CB to the finisher CB 2 SCTS MFP to finisher CB Acknowledgment signal sent from the MFP to the finisher allows the finisher to send data to the MFP 3 24V IN MS701 to finisher CB Interlock signal H Front cover is closed L Front cover is open 4 PS704 IN PS704 to finisher CB Signal indicating whether the paper passes through the entrance The front and rear ends of the paper are detected H paper does not exists L paper exists b Output signals 1 SRTS finisher CB to MFP Acknowledgment signal sent from the finishe
215. he ADF mode FM9 scanner cooling is installed in the read section 2 Signals a Output signals 1 EXP_CONT PRCB to SCDB L1 exposure lamp ON OFF control signal L L1 on H L1 off 2 CONT SCDB to L1 INVB L1 exposure lamp ON OFF control signal L L1 on H L1 off 48 MFP unit explanation Original read control Original read control is performed by ADB A D converter board and CCD sensor installed in ADB 1 Operation The light reflected by the exposed original is input to the CCD sensor through the lens The analog voltage corresponding to the quantity of the input light is A D converted in the ADB A D converter board being output to the ICB image control board ENWW a Original read The original read timing is as follows 1 Platen mode After lapse of the specified interval since the exposure unit turned PS61 scanner HP off 2 ADF mode After lapse of the specified interval since the original s leading edge turned PS306 original conveyance on APS control S GND APC_CONT KA COVER SIG APS TIM PS51 APS 1_SIG 5V APS 2_SIG S GND APS 3_SIG APS 1 PS63 ICB APS_5V S GND APS 2 PS64 serie pro Ba PS S GND SIZE_PS_S APS 3 PS65 SIZE ANA APS 5V S G A PS309 24V1 REAL PS310 P GND VR301 DCPS The APS method used in the platen mode is different from that used in the ADF mode The signal read by the APS sensor or ADF s original size detecti
216. he position of the rotor detected by the position sensor magnetic sensor in the motor This motor rotates the polygon mirror to scan the laser beams from LDB laser driver board in the axial direction of the drum Its rotation is held constant by PLL control b Rotational speed M15 is powered by 24 VDC and its rotational speed is as follows Rotational Linear speed 9055 9065 speed 37 795 rpm 320 mm s normal 33 070 rpm 280 mm s normal 21 850 rpm 185 mm s thick paper ENWW 2 Signals a Input signals 1 POLM_LOCK PMDB to PRCB This signal indicates the clock synchronization state of M15 polygon L Synchronous normal H Asynchronous abnormal b Output signals 1 POLM_CONT PRCB to PMDB This signal turns on off M15 L M15 on H M15 off 2 POLM CLK PRCB to PMDB This is a reference clock signal for PLL controlling M15 in PMDB Image write control INDPR GND VIDEO2 NIDEO2 GND The analog image data from the CCD sensor is A D converted by the ADB A D converter board then sent to the ICB image control board for data processing The processed image data is converted into a laser beam on the LDB laser driver board and then the Laser scanner unit 53 MFP unit explanation beams are radiated onto the drum surface Two beams are emitted per laser diode Two lines of image data is written per scan The write start reference p
217. he separation claws when reinstalling them CAUTION Do not touch the cleaning blade and drum with bare hands Procedure 1 Remove the drum unit from the MFP 2 Remove the drum 3 Remove the connector CN363 and separation swing spring 4 Remove two screws and detach the separation guide plate assembly Screws Connector CN363 Separation swing spring Separation guide plate assembly 5 Remove the snap ring slide the shaft and remove the three separation claws 156 MFP disassembly assembly Separation claw Clean the shaft with drum cleaner and acleaning pad when installing The separator claws cannot move smoothly if they are installed with toner remaining on the shaft When installing insert the retaining ring between the ribs After installing the separation claws check that they move smoothly Rib ENWW 6 Remove two screws and remove the separator claw solenoid assembly Separation claw solenoid assembly 7 Remove two screws and detach the separation claw SD SD1 Separation claw SD SD1 Screws 8 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION When installing the separation claw unit match the pin and guide hole shown in the figure ENWW Drum unit Separation guide plate assembly Note When removing the separation claw solenoid Normally it should not be removed except when replacing
218. ified time after the actuation of the paper feed PS 1 PS1 and PS 2 PS7 causing a paper loop to form against the pre registration rollers which are not turning In this way paper skew is corrected Pre registration roller Paper feed PS 1 PS1 2 PS7 Pick roller Feed roller ENWW First paper feed control FEEDM_CONT FEEDM_CLK FEEDM_F E FEEDM_EM 5V P GND The 1st paper feed from Tray 2 3 takes place as the result of the transmission of the drive force from M1 paper feed to each pick roller by MC3 5 paper feed MC 1 2 and MC4 6 pre registration MC 1 2 The feed roller picks up paper using its own weight The above operations are controlled by the PRCB printer control board Related signals are PS1 7 paper feed 1 2 and PS25 26 vertical conveyance 1 2 issued from the vertical conveyance section 1 Operation a Operation of the MC3 5 paper feed MC 1 2 1 Start timing of printing of the first copy MC3 5 paper feed MC 1 2 turns on at the timing that is determined by the P Counter from when copying starts and turns off after a lapse of the specified time from PS1 7 paper feed 1 7 turning off Thus paper skew is corrected by forming the loop before pre registration roller ENWW TIFEED DRV MC24V_1 TIPREMC_DRV Tray 2 MC24V_1 Cc MC24_1 T2PREMC DRV Tray 3 MC24V 1 2 Start timing of printing of the second copy When the preceding paper turns
219. in tray H Paper exists in tray 88 MFP unit explanation ENWW Tray 1 bypass tray Composition Feed roller Loop roller K Paper up down plate Mechanisms Mechanism Method First paper feed Tray 1 feed roller Paper lift up 1 Paper up down plate Up down motor BP M20 Upper lower limit detection sensor Double feed prevention Torque limiter No paper detection Photo sensor actuator Paper size detection 2 Width VR Length Photo sensor actuators two 1 Paper lift up The up down motor BP M20 drives the paper up down plate via gears Paper is automatically pushed up to the paper feed position when the print start button is pressed When paper is removed or exhausted M20 will drive down the up down plate ENWW Up down motor BP M20 Pick roller Bypass tray Paper size detection The paper size is automatically detected by the following three sensors e Lateral Paper size detection VR BP e Longitudinal Paper size PS 1 2 BP Tray 1 bypass tray 89 MFP unit explanation Paper size VR BP VR5 Paper size PS 2 BP PS32 Paper size PS 1 BP PS31 By pass tray First paper feed control Second paper feed unit The first paper feed from Tray 1 takes place as the result of the transmission of the drive force from M6 loop roller to the pick roller M6 is controlled by PRCB printer control board The related signal i
220. ing Iconveyance motor M720 ENWW Drive system diagram 11 Finisher overview Paper conveyance path The finisher consists of five paper paths as shown in the diagram below Sheets are turned over by the MFP s exit page inverter and then passed to the finisher The finisher has two paper entrance connections one from the MFP and the other from PI 110 optional Main tray Booklet tray Upper tray Post inserter Ao yv O docs N NI Paper conveyance path Finishing mode 1 Non sort sort and group modes Upper tray Staple mode Booklet mode Q3634A only oj A jN Tri folding mode Q3634A only 12 Finisher overview Main body ENWW Non sort mode In the non sort mode the gate is set to the position to carry paper to the main tray Each sheet delivered from the MFP is carried to the main tray through the gate Entrance roller Main tray CRE Paper exit roller Conveyance roller A ENWW Paper conveyance path 13 Finisher overview Sort and group modes In the sort and group modes the gate is set to the position to carry paper to the main tray Each sheet delivered from the MFP is conveyed to the main tray while the sheet is shifted by 30 mm to the rear The shift roller of the shift unit performs the shift action In the sort mode even pages are offset In the group mode even numbered
221. ing capacity Up to 200 sheets when using 128 g m or 28 Ib equivalent paper to maximum height of 30 mm Paper curling Maximum 10 mm 5 sheets Amount of curl WO amp I Power weight dimensions Power source 24 VDC 5 VDC supplied from finisher Maximum power 30 VA Weight Maximum 10 5 kg External dimensions Approximately 511 mm W by 620 mm D by 220 mm H ENWW Maintenance Maintenance Same as the MFP Service life Same as the MFP Operating environment Temperature 10 C to 30 C 50 F to 86 F Humidity 10 percent to 80 percent RH Note Ue The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice Center cross section Up down plate U Up down plate L Tray up down motor L M202 ENWW Side guide plate Pick roller Feed roller Tray up down motor U o M201 Conveyance roller U Feed roller Conveyance roller L Pick roller Separation roller Center cross section 3 Post insertion overview Drive system diagram Feed roller Sheet feed SD U SD201 Conveyance MC U MC201 Pick roller Pick roller Separation roller Conveyance MC L MC202 Conveyance roller U Registration MC MC203 PI conveyance motor M203 Sheet feed SD L SD202 Separation roller Conveyance roller L Feed roller Sheet feed SD U L SD201 SD202 Pick roller Tray up down motor U
222. ing to the shift position L to H Straight position H to L Shift position b Finisher CB output signals 1 M702 DRV finisher CB to M702 Signal to drive control M702 L M702 on H M702 off M707 paper exit roller control 5V M707 P S M707 CLK M707 F R M707 LD MAIN BODY M707 paper exit roller drives the main tray paper exit roller and the paper exit belt of the stacker section The finisher CB finisher control board controls M707 ENWW The related signals are PS704 finisher entrance PS706 main tray paper exit PS709 paper exit belt HP and PS712 paper exit opening HP 1 Operation a Straight sort and group modes When PS704 finisher entrance detects the leading edge of the paper M707 starts to rotate at a high speed When PS704 has detected the trailing edge of the paper and a predefined time period has elapsed the rotation of M707 changes to low Then the paper delivery action is performed When P5706 main tray paper exit has detected the trailing edge of the paper preparation for the next paper conveyance and a predefined time period has elapsed the rotation speed of M707 returns to high When P5704 has detected the last paper and a predefined time period has elapsed M707 ceases to rotate b Staple mode for papers whose length in the feeding direction is smaller than B5R The finisher operation signal from the MFP lets M707 paper exit roller rotate
223. inisher CB output signals 1 PS705 DRV finisher CB to SD705 Signal to drive control the SD705 H SD705 is on L SD705 is off Finisher unit explanation M702 shift control 24V M702 DRV 5V PS704 IN GND PS704 5V PS718 IN GND PS718 Hae MAIN BODY M702 shift performs the paper offset operation in the sort or group mode The finisher CB finisher control board controls M702 The related signals are PS704 finisher entrance and PS718 shift HP 1 Operation In the sort or group mode PS704 finisher entrance detects the rear end of the paper After a predefined time period M702 shift operates Its rotation triggers the shift travel of the shift moving section The shift roller rotated by M701 finisher conveyance carries the paper while the shift operation is being performed The completion of the shift operation is detected by the change of PS718 shift HP signal from off to on and then M702 is deactivated After a predefined time period has elapsed since M702 was deactivated it is activated again M702 stops when PS718 shift HP signal changes from on to off This operation allows the shift moving section to return to its original position to wait for the next paper to be shifted This sequence of actions is repeated for each sheet to achieve offsetting of paper ENWW 2 Signals a Finisher CB input signals 1 PS718 IN PS718 to finisher CB Signal relat
224. ion 0 0 0 0 0 seen 28 Drum drive Section esida aterea eee ee teen enone 29 Developing drive section 00 ccc eee 29 Paper feed vertical conveyance tray up drive sections 30 Tray 1 paper feed automatic duplex unit ADU pre registration AVE SECO wrea ae ngan Kb GG NG a NGANGA 31 Charging and transfer separation wire cleaning drive section 32 Automatic Duplex Unit ADU conveyance drive section 33 Paper exit drive section 2 2 2 0 0002 ccc eee 34 Toner supply drive section 00000 cee eee 34 Optics drive section n seen nennen nennen 35 23 MFP overview Overview of system Cover sheet feeder Q3636A Punch kit a Finisher Q3633A Cover sheet feeder Q3636A Punch kit Finisher Q3634A 24 MFP overview Printer controller Q3639A B U Key counter O Copy Controller hard disk Q3642A Paper exit tray E Y 1 a HCl na Q3637A gt L Iza HCI Q3638A ENWW hp LaserJet 9055mfp 9065mfp product specifications Type Installation type Console type floor mounted Copying method Indirect electrostatic method Document tray type Fixed Photosensitive material OPC Sensitizing method Laser writing Paper feed trays Three stacked trays two for 500 sheets of 80 g m or 20 Ib paper one for 1500 sheets of 80 g m or 20 Ib paper Tray 1 tray for various paper sizes 100 sheets of 80 g m or 20 Ib
225. ion with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors For this reason unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited The points listed below are not exhaustive but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy JN WARNING Prohibited actions Donot use any cables or power cord not specified by HP e Donot use any fuse or thermostat not specified by HP e Safety will not be assured leading to a risk of fire O eS and injury LI Do not disable fuse functions or bridge fuse terminals with wire metal clips solder or similar S object P ska O ENWW Safety warnings 5 Safety N WARNING Prohibited actions e Donot disable relay functions such as wedging paper between relay contacts e Donot disable safety functions interlocks safety circuits and so forth Safety will not be assured leading to a risk of fire and injury e Donot make any modification to the MFP unless instructed by HP Do not use parts not specified by HP Note Only qualified service personnel should disable relay functions and safety functions when it is necessary to solve problems Checkpoints when performing on site service HP MFPs are extensively tested before shipping to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met and to protect the customer and customer engineer hereaf
226. ion of the movement from the side edge reference position to the punch position classified by paper sizes is as follows Frontward A5 ASR B5R Ad A4R B4 A3 Letter 8 5 by 14 5 5 by 8 5 5 5 by 8 5R 8K 16K 16KR Backward B5 F4 Letter R Ledger The series of movement from c Detecting the side edge reference position to d Moving the punch position is performed per each paper and these movements correct the punch position 14 Punch kit unit explanation e Forming a registration loop M701 finisher conveyance turns off temporarily a specified time after PS37 paper exit detects the leading edge of the paper to form a loop at the entrance roller If punching is performed for the paper conveyed from PI the loop will be formed on the PI s side Punch movement When finisher entrance PS PS704 detects the trailing edge of the paper M801 punch runs and performs the punch movement For some paper sizes the punch movement is executed before completing the correction of the punch position for the punch unit To avoid this switch the conveyance speed on finisher to a low speed only for such paper size Paper size Conveyance speed A5 5 5 by 8 5R 345 mm s Other sizes 670 mm s If punching is performed for the paper conveyed from PI the time when the trailing edge of the paper is detected by PS206 PI passage L is the starting point g Paper edge sen
227. is signal selected 8 CPF SIGO CPF mode selection signal Output when copy or printer mode is selected 9 CPF SIG1 10 P GND Power ground ENWW Other kinds of control 127 MFP unit explanation 128 MFP unit explanation ENWW ENWW MFP disassembly assembly External Section e a 2 occa NANANG KA AD do aca Replacing the ozone filter 000 00 cee eee Replacing the developing suction filter Removing and reinstalling the external covers Changing the control panel attachment angle and removing reinstalling 000 0c e eee eee ee eee Resetting the circuit breaker 0 00000 e eee neces Drivesecti N ciao tata rd een DAA Removing and reinstalling the drum motor M2 Removing and reinstalling the fusing input gear Scaner SECO nna a ccd ra doe edo a i ended dead Screws that must not be removed 00000000 eee Removing and reinstalling the CCD unit Replacing the exposure lamp 0c eee eee eee Removing and reinstalling the exposure unit Installing the optics Wire 2 2 0 0 0 2 eee Cleaning the ADF glass and scanner glass Replacing the scanner motor M11 eee eeee Laser scanner unit 2m a Pia Pewee eee eae Removing and reinstalling the laser scanner assembly Cleaning the dust proof glass
228. istration and feed clutches MCs Procedure 1 Remove the paper feed unit 2 Remove two connectors CN850 851 ENWW 3 Remove two snap rings to detach the pre registration MC 3 MC8 and feed MC 3 MC7 a Connector CN850 Snap ring Feed MC 3 MC7 Snap ring Pre registration MC 3 MC8 Connector CN851 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION When reinstalling each MC fit the detent in the slit in the MC Paper feed unit of Tray3 181 MFP disassembly assembly Replacing the wires CAUTION After replacing or reinstalling the wires manually rotate the up down drive shaft to check that the tray moves up and down smoothly Be sure to install the wires so that they do not cross or ride over each other Procedure 1 Remove the paper feed unit 2 Remove two claws to remove the tray front cover 3 Remove two screws to remover shaft supporting plate 4 Remove three screws to remove the wire cover front and wire cover rear Screws Wire cover rear Screws sg Pa Wire cover front ES Shaft supporting plate SF Screws 5 Remove the front and rear wires according to steps 1 to 7 below 182 MFP disassembly assembly ENWW 2 4 Remove the E ring to detach 1 Remove two E rings to slide out the the wire restraining cover drive pulley and pulley Wire D Wire C white black Wire restraining cover Wire
229. istration roller 201 Removing and reinstalling the ADU conveyance roller 3 and4 202 Removing and reinstalling the ADU conveyance roller 1 and2 205 Removing and reinstalling the paper reverse exit roller 207 ENWW Removing and reinstalling the fuser 2 2222 aaa 208 Removing and reinstalling the fuser top 208 Removing and reinstalling the web cover 209 Removing and reinstalling the cleaning web 210 Replacing the fusing heater lamps L2 L3 a 210 Replacing the fusing heater lamp L4 0 000000 212 Removing and reinstalling the fusing separation claw upper unit and fusing separation claws upper 2 2 22222 213 Removing and reinstalling the fusing separation claw lower unit and fusing separation claws lower 222222220 214 Removing and reinstalling the fusing upper roller 214 Removing and reinstalling the fusing lower roller 215 Removing and reinstalling the decurler roller 216 Removing and reinstalling the fusing temperature sensors 1 and 2 217 Removing and reinstalling the thermostat U TS1 218 Removing and reinstalling the thermostat L TS2 220 131 MFP disassembly assembly External section Replacing the ozone filter CAUTION Procedure Be sure the power cord has been unplugg
230. it 1 2 detects the upper limit of paper as the paper up down plate in the tray goes up it turns on and consequently M16 17 goes off causing the tray to stop going up When PS2 8 turns off after paper is fed M16 17 goes on again to move the paper up down plate upward The up down plate in the tray is lowered mechanically by its own weight ENWW b Paper up drive timing 1 ON timing M16 17 tray up drive 1 2 is turned on when loading of a tray is detected by shorting wires at both ends of the drawer connector 2 OFF timing One of M16 17 tray up drive 1 2 is turned off when PS2 8 tray upper limit 1 2 is turned on Remaining paper detection control The level of paper remaining in each tray is detected according to the time that M16 17 tray up drive 1 2 requires to lift up the up down plate when the tray is set This lift up time operation time of M16 17 is saved in the PRCB printer control board After this the remaining paper is detected using the paper feed counter The detected remaining paper level is displayed on the control panel in five steps PS4 10 Tray 2 3 paper feed unit 79 MFP unit explanation remaining paper 1 2 are used to detect the remaining paper level when it lowers below about 10 percent 2 Signals a PRCB input signals 1 TIUP_PS PS2 to PRCB Paper upper limit detection signal Tray 2 L Not detected H Detected 2 TIRM_PS PS4 to PRCB Remaining paper detecti
231. it F FM7 paper exit R and FM8 main cooling 2 ENWW 1 ON timing At the start of copying starts rotating at a constant speed 2 OFF timing Turned off when M7 paper exit is turned on e FM9 scanner cooling 1 ON timing Turned on when L1 exposure lamp is turned on 2 OFF timing Turned off when L1 exposure lamp is turned off f FM10 ADU reverse motor cooling 1 ON timing Starts rotating at a constant speed when M9 ADU reverse is turned on OFF timing Turned off when M9 ADU reverse is turned off g FM13 power supply cooling 1 ON timing Starts rotating at a constant speed when SW1 main power is turned on 2 OFF timing Not turned off until SW1 main power is turned off h Fan air flow Other kinds of control 119 MFP unit explanation FM9 FM8 Main body cooling fan 2 FM3 Power supply cooling fan FM6 Paper exit fan F FM7 Paper exit fan R 2 Signals a Input signals 1 MAINFAN EM FM1 to PRCB FM1 MFP cooling 1 abnormality detection signal H Abnormality is detected 2 WRFAN1 EM FM2 to PRCB FM2 writing section cooling abnormality detection signal H Abnormality is detected 3 CLFABN EM FM5 to PRCB FM5 cleaner cooling abnormality detection signal H Abnormality is detected 4 FIXFAN3 EM FM6 to PRCB FM6 paper exit F abnormality detection signal L FM6 is normal H FM6 is abnormal 120 MFP unit explanation
232. it PS PS707 Tray upper limit PS PS702 Tray up down motor M703 Paper detection The distance between the top surface of the piled sheets on the main tray the top surface of the main tray if there s no sheet on the tray and the paper exit opening is monitored using the tray upper limit PS PS702 and the stapler paper exit upper limit PS PS707 This distance is kept constant to avoid misalignment of delivered sheets The counting program built in the finisher counts the number of delivered sheets on the main tray during continuous copying When the total number of delivered sheets reaches a maximum values are predefined depending on type size of paper the copying operation is suspended ENWW However when some delivered sheets are removed the main tray is raised and the counter reset PS is activated This resets the current sheet counter This enables limitless delivery The tray lower limit PS PS703 detects the bottom of the main tray The number of delivered sheets on the main tray is not counted by the software counter during non continuous copying PS703 is used for the limitation of the number M703 tray up down control M703 DRV_F 5V GND PS702 IN PS702 5V GND PS703 IN PS703 5V GND PS706 IN PS706 5V GND PS707 IN PS707 5V GND PS715 IN PS715 FNS CB M703 tray up down raises or lowers the main t
233. itch SW1 off and unplug the power cord from the power outlet ENWW 3 Insert the end of the blade screwdriver into the slot in the sponge roller and twist the screwdriver to pry apart Paper exit roller Sponge roller 4 Place the two components of a new sponge roller around the roller shaft so that the tabs of the components are aligned with the dents on the shaft Press the components together firmly until you hear the two click sounds y Align Wg 5 To reattach the sponge roller shaft perform the same procedure in reverse order Conveyance section 67 Finisher disassembly assembly Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller sponge roller CAUTION Make sure that the power cord of the main tray is unplugged from the power outlet When replacing the sponge rollers all of the two pairs four components must be replaced Procedure 1 Open the front door 2 Remove two screws and a bearing and detach the intermediate conveyance rollers Bearing Intermediate conveyance N roller 3 Insert the end of the blade screwdriver into the slot in the sponge roller and twist the screwdriver to pry apart Conveyance roller Sponge roller 68 Finisher disassembly assembly 4 Place the two components of a new sponge roller around the roller shaft so that the tabs of the components are aligned with the dents on the shaft Press the components together firmly until you hear th
234. ive the cleaning web wind up shaft via the ratchet mechanism and gears thus supplying cleaning web from the cleaning web unwinding shaft SD2 is controlled according to the copy count and cleaning web supplied about 0 025 to 0 05 mm copy Cleaning web containing silicon oil is pressed against the fuser roller upper by the pressure roller Pressure roller Cleaning web unwinding shaft Web SD SD2 Cleaning web wind up shaft Ratchet 3 Decurler The paper guided by the reverse exit selection gate is decurled while it passes between the decurler roller and restriction shafts The decurler roller is driven by the fuser roller upper via gears 112 MFP unit explanation Fuser roller upper Decurler roller Restriction shafts 4 Jam detection When a jam occurs in the fuser exit section the paper exit guide plate lower is pressed down causing the fuser exit PS PS30 to detect a jam via the jam detection plate and actuator Actuator Exit guide plate lower DAO Jam detection Jb Fixing exit PS PS30 plate Wy eS SRA ENWW M16 web drive control b PRCB output signal ern 1 WEBSC_DRV PRCB to SD2 SD2 web drive control signal MC24V_2 L SD2 on WEBSC_DRV H SD2 off PRCB SD2 web is controlled by PRCB printer control board The related signal is PS30 fuser exit 1 Operation When PS30 is turned on by passage of paper SD2 is controlled by PRCB print
235. l size 2 Platen mode When the ADF is closed and PS51 APS timing turns on L1 exposure lamp turns on and the CCD detects the reflected light to detect the original size in the main scanning direction Since ADF is still open at this time the black level of the sky shot outside the original and the white level of the original inside the original are detected according to whether an original is present At this time the original size in the sub scanning direction is detected using PS63 to PS65 APS 1 to APS 3 When the ADF is closed completely and PS311 ADF open close turns on CCD reads the white level of the platen cover and the black level in the original Among the two original sizes detected as discussed above the larger size is determined as the original size in the main scanning direction 2 Signals a Input signals 1 APS_TIM PS51 to SCDB ADF open close detection signal L ADF is closed H ADF is open 2 APS 1 APS 1_SIG PS63 to SCDB to ICB Paper size detection signal L Paper is detected H Paper is not detected 3 APS 2 APS 2_SIG PS64 to SCDB to ICB Paper size detection signal L Paper is detected H Paper is not detected 50 MFP unit explanation 4 APS3 APS 3 SIG PS65 to SCDB to ICB Paper size detection signal L Paper is detected H Paper is not detected 5 SIZE PS L PS309 to SCDB to ICB Paper size detection signal L Paper is detected H Paper is
236. l 51 APS control 49 B black stripe creation control 74 blade setting mode 74 bypass tray Tray 1 removing and reinstalling 185 theory of operation 89 Cc CCD unit 141 central cross sectional view diagram 27 charge control plate 160 charger cleaning M14 control 60 charging and transfer drive section diagram 32 charging control 58 charging corona unit 159 charging corona unit PCL 163 charging wire cleaning unit 161 charging wires 160 checkpoints on site service 6 safety 12 circuit breaker 137 circuits safety 16 cleaning blade 170 ENWW cleaning unit removing and reinstalling 170 theory of operation 73 cleaning web 210 comparison product 224 continuous copy count 25 speed 25 control panel 136 control panel control 122 cooling fan control 118 copy density selection 25 copy paper sizes 25 types 26 copying method 25 corona unit 159 corona unit section 58 counter control 124 coupling 154 D decurler roller 216 developer 167 developing M3 control 63 developing bias control 64 developing drive section diagram 29 developing suction FM4 control 69 developing suction filter 133 developing unit removing and reinstalling 166 theory of operation 63 developing unit bias shaft 168 dimensions machine 26 Dmax control 65 document tray type 25 documents sizes 25 types 25 dot diameter correction control 68 drive section removing and reinstalling 138 theory of operation 41 drive system diagram 28 Index
237. l starts The original that has been scanned passes under the original exit gate and is ejected to the original exit section by the original exit roller The next original is conveyed to the reversal section if there is one 8 ADF overview Reversal roller Registration roller Original exit Next original reversal roller Original exit roller Conveyance roller Mixed original copy mode The mixed original copy mode supports both the same series original and different series originals and the size of the original is determined by the ON interval of the original registration PS 1 PS304 In single side original copy mode with out AMS and double side original copy mode the conveyance path of original is same as normal conveyance path In single side original copy mode with AMS the conveyance path of original is same as that in double side original copy mode For details on size detection refer to the section Original size detection control Z fold original copy mode In the Z fold original copy mode the length of the original is determined by the ON interval of the original registration PS 1 PS304 The length is detected for the first sheet of original The conveyance path of the original is the same as the single side original copy mode and the double side original copy mode ENWW ENWW ADF unit explanation Extermal Sectiont ovinos teas ee LEG wee es 10 Composite aca oa este AE
238. labels on the MFPs Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on in the MFP When accessing these areas for maintenance repair or adjustment special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock A CAUTION AATTENTION A CAUTION msa QS DO NOT INSERT your finger into the v o two RADF hinge ACAUTION A WARNING portions This area generates otherwise you may high voltage If touched be injured APRECAUCION gt electrical shock may occur DO NOT TOUCH A ATTENTION A VORSICHT A PRECAUCION A ATTENZIONE a A CAUTION A ATTENTION E72 A VORSICHT UN CAUTION A PRECAUCION A ATTENTION AJVORSICHT Y A PRECAUCION Wy A ATTENZIONE Z CAUTION KE WIL Z CAUTION DO NOT put your hand between the main body and developing Z CAUTION The fixing unit is very hot To avoide The conveyance fixing unit is heavy Use care and draw it out gently getting burned DO NOT TOUCH fixing unit otherwise you may be injured otherwis
239. lanation ENWW ENWW HCI disassembly assembly Explanatio ice as ool ged date be ty coding edie a aE ae wars 16 Paper feed section 0 00 c cette nee 16 Cleaning the paper dust removing brush 20 55 16 Cleaning the HCI feed PS PS106 HCI first paper feed PS PS107 17 Removing and reinstalling the pick roller unit 17 Replacing the pick roller rubber feed roller rubber 18 Replacing the separation roller rubber 20000 000 19 Replacing the HCI feed MC MC101 HCI first paper feed MC MC102 20 Replacing the Q3637A up down wires a 21 Replacing the Q3638A up down wires 0 a 25 15 HCI disassembly assembly Explanation This section explains how to disassemble and reassemble the MFP When disassembling and reassembling the MFP follow the precautions given below CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet The disassembled parts must be reassembled following the disassembly procedure in reverse unless otherwise specified Care should be taken not to lose small parts Care should also be taken not to install small parts in wrong places Do not operate the MFP before installing all the disassembled parts completely Removal of some screws is prohibited in this section Never loosen them Paper feed section Cleaning the paper dust removing brush CAUTION If HCI is connected to the M
240. ller 67 power consumption 4 power source 4 product specifications 2 R rear cover 64 S SD704 paper exit opening solenoid control 33 SD705 bypass gate control 29 SD706 tri folding gate control 60 service life 5 shift M702 control 30 side cover 63 sort mode 14 sort offsetting 3 specifications product 2 sponge roller intermediate conveyance roller 68 paper exit roller 67 stacker drive 8 stacker entrance M713 control 46 stacker section 39 74 stacker unit 74 stacker unit cover 74 stacking capacity paper 3 staple control 53 staple drive 9 staple mode paper stacking capacity 3 specifications 4 theory of operation 16 82 stapler 78 stapler movement control 51 stapler section removing and reinstalling 76 theory of operation 48 stapler unit cover 76 sub tray exit mode 3 sub tray mode 15 T temperature 5 top cover 1 62 top cover 2 63 tray drive 10 tray up down M703 control 37 tray up down motor M703 70 tri folding gate SD706 control 60 tri folding mode specifications 4 theory of operation 19 tri folding section 56 U up down wire 70 upper tray paper exit M721 control 34 W weight machine 4 ENWW hp LaserJet 9055mfp 9065mfp post insertion kit Q3636A Contents 1 Post insertion overview Post insertion kit Q3636A product specificatiONS o ooooooooooo 2 LA 2 Functi ns iii a tay ead oe 2 Copy Paper 2 222 eee eee 2 Power weight dimensions
241. lse signal 5 B B ADUDB to M8 M8 reverse exit B phase drive control pulse signal ENWW Automatic duplex unit ADU 107 MFP unit explanation ADF paper conveyance feed control IO DTXD IO DCLK ADU LATCH IO UCLK REQ1 IO URXD ACK1 ERR OUT1 2NDM_CLK PRCB 108 MFP unit explanation 5V PGND START STOP ADU_JAM S GND 5V2 ADU_REV S GND 5V2 REV_PS S GND 5V2 HD_PS S GND 5V2 ADUCR_PS S GND 5V2 ADUDN_PS S GND 5V2 ADUEXIT_PS S GND MC24V LOCK_SD MC24V ADUDN_MC MC24V ADUCR_MC ADUDB PS46 PS48 PS49 PS50 BANAS e SD9 e MC2 MC13 Y ENWW The paper fed from the ADU paper reversal section is fed by transmitting the drive force of M5 conveyance to ADU conveyance rollers 1 to 4 Paper is then fed to the second paper feed section by the drive force of M6 loop roller In the ADU conveyance section pre loop control is performed to correct paper skew forcibly To perform this control MC2 ADU deceleration and MC13 ADU conveyance are provided Related signals are PS41 ADU conveyance 1 PS45 ADU paper reverse PS46 reverse exit PS48 ADU paper conveyance 2 PS49 ADU deceleration and PS50 ADU pre registration SD9 ADU lock is provided to lock the handle of the ADU 1 Operation a ADF conveyance control The paper fed from the ADU paper reversal section is fed to ADU pre registration rollers at a high spee
242. ly 4 When making the adjustment make sure that the thermostat U does not ride on the positioning tool C 5 Apply screw lock agent to the screw securing the thermostat U 6 Reverse the removal procedure to install other parts Removing and reinstalling the thermostat L TS2 CAUTION This is an important safety part P N SP00 0010 Be sure to observe the following cautions and steps when removing or reinstalling After reinstalling the thermostat L make sure that its wires do not touch the fusing lower roller When reinstalling the thermostat L adjust its position using the positioning tool 56AEJG011 and secure it with screws Be sure to apply screw lock agent to the screws This adjustment should be made in a pressured state 220 MFP disassembly assembly Removal procedure 1 Remove the fusing lower roller 2 Close the fusing cover top 3 Remove the two Faston terminals of the thermostat L through the fusing entrance side ee Faston SI 4 Open the fusing cover top 5 Remove two screws to remove the thermostat L Screws N Thermostat L ENWW Reinstallation procedure 1 Seta part a thermostat L positioning tool 56AEJG011 between the thermostat L and the fusing lower roller and secure the thermostat L with two screws so that the distance between the thermostat L and roller is equal to the thickness of the tool Screws Positioning tool 56
243. ly control 2 2 2 0 0 0000 72 Cleaning toner recycle unit 00 cece eee 73 COMPOSITION pa Ka kak kph nt Ave cereal tea ban ager dol antral Sew 73 Mechanisms u onto e KANG KG aaa Papa et ee NG 73 Toner guide roller TGR control cece eee eee 74 Other control Sicilias ated A eres a 74 Tray 2 3 paper feed unit 2 0000 e eee 75 COMPOSITION zitierten age deb ane derail oe 75 MechaniS MS maan na a Seng coins Raed rin ag ON NARS 75 First paper feed control 0 0000 cece eee 77 Paper up drive control 0 2 2 0 0000 79 Paper size detection control 000 cece eee eee 80 No paper detection control 0c eee eee eee 81 Tray 4 paper feed unit 22 0c cee 82 Composition Mr een 82 Mechanisms u Na ee an ne 82 First paper feed control 222 000 sense eee 84 Paper up drive control ooccocccc 86 Paper size detection control 0c eee eee 87 No paper detection control 0c eects 87 Tray 1 BYPASS AY an a man a A ear were rar mpa 89 Compositions maana KG yee a NADYA LAGA ansehe dae ied 89 Mechanisms sisi sieaa PAG AA la haa 89 First paper feed control A oem seen nennen eee 90 Paper up down control cece eet eee eee 90 Paper size detection control 0 00 0c eee eee eee 91 No paper detection control 0c cee eee 92 Vertical conveyance section eee 93 Compositions mma gd h3 ra ad Kayan pha 93 Me
244. m the position where PS61 scanner HP was turned on it stops This position is the exposure position for ADF copy operation Then ADF copy operation is performed After completion of the ADF copy operation L1 exposure lamp is turned off to start searching for the exposure unit home position PS61 Y Platen APS read position First white correction a Second white correction Home position search EN Original read position f Platen scanner glass copy operation Platen copy operation is performed in different ways depending on whether AE control is performed After completion of the shading correction started by pressing the START button AE scanning is performed in the paper feed direction if the AE mode has been selected Then exposure scanning is performed at the speed corresponding to the specified magnification by the distance corresponding to the original size thus searching for the home position ENWW 1 Operation with AE b PRCB output signal 1 SCAN_CLK PRCB to SCDB PS61 Platen APS Y Read position M11 scanner clock signal i 2 SCAN_F R PRCB to SCDB First white correction paang h Second M11 scanner rotational direction Pa white correction switchover signal AE scanning L The exposure unit is moved toward the paper exit side H The exposure unit is moved toward the paper feed side 3 MODET1 to 3 PRCB to SCDB M11 scanner energize switchover signals
245. mbly for at least two minutes after turning off the primary power switch CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Remove the left side cover See External section on page 132 2 Remove nine screws to detach the fan holder assembly Screws 3 Remove the inline connector CN338 4 Remove the three connectors CN185 187 188 Move the connectors out of the way to allow for easy removal of the laser scanner unit 150 MFP disassembly assembly ENWW 5 Loosen the screw to pull out and remove the laser scanner assembly Connector CN187 Connector CN185 Connector CN188 Screw Laser scanner assembly 6 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Cleaning the dust proof glass CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Remove the laser scanner assembly 2 Clean the dust proof glass at the bottom of the laser scanner assembly with a cleaning pad and blower brush Laser scanner assembly 3 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse Laser scanner unit 151 MFP disassembly assembly Drum unit Removing and reinstalling the drum unit CAUTION Procedure Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Be sure to put a drum cover over the removed d
246. moval steps in reverse External section 65 Finisher disassembly assembly Removing and reinstalling the main paper exit opening cover CAUTION Make sure that the power cord of the MFP is unplugged from the power outlet Procedure 1 Remove the following parts Top cover 1 or optional PI if installed Top cover 2 Side cover Rear cover Main tray 2 Remove four screws and detach the main paper exit opening cover Screws Main paper exit opening cover Screws 3 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse 66 Finisher disassembly assembly Removing and reinstalling the booklet paper exit opening cover Q3634A only Procedure 1 Remove the booklet tray 2 Remove two screws and detach the booklet paper exit opening cover a Booklet paper opening cover Screws 3 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Conveyance section Replacing the paper exit roller sponge roller CAUTION After you have lowered the main tray be sure to unplug the power cord of the MFP from the power outlet When replacing the sponge rollers all of the five pairs 10 components must be replaced Procedure 1 Push up the actuator of the main tray exit with your finger to lower the main tray m IR DEN HR exit roller Paper exit roller sponge roller Main tray 2 Turn the MFP s main power sw
247. move the E ring to remove the up down gear 11 Remove the detent pin for up down gear from the up down pulley shaft 12 Remove the E ring to remove gear D 13 Remove the E ring to remove the remaining paper detection gear 26 HCI disassembly assembly 14 Remove four relay connectors CN780 CN781 CN782 and CN783 to disconnect the wiring harness from the up down motor mounting assembly Relay Relay connector connector CN782 CN781 Relay connector CN780 Remaining paper Up down l detection gear motor mounting assembly connector CN783 Bearing E ring Up down pulley shaft 15 Remove the E ring to remove the bearing 16 Remove the six screws to remove the up down motor mounting assembly Up down motor mounting assembly Screws Bearing E ring Screws ENWW 17 Replace the up down wires following the instructions in Removing the up down wires on page 28 and Installing the up down wires on page 29 CAUTION Wire A Wire B Wire C Wire D ENWW Two sets of four up down wires with different lengths one set at the front and the other at the back are used Wires with the same length can be used either at the front or back if they are used in the same location 1057 3mm Se TO 692 1m lt Do 1321 7mm gt 50 1303 1mm E Paper feed section 27 HCI disassembly assembly Removing the up down wires 2 Release the met
248. ms 2000004 93 Vertical conveyance control 93 Automatic duplex unit ADU 95 Composition 00005 95 Mechanisms 2222222 96 Loop second paper feed control 101 Paper conveyance control 103 Paper reverse and exit control 104 ADF paper conveyance feed control 108 Fuser Unit au le 111 Composition 222er 111 Mechanisms ooooooooo o 111 M16 web drive control 113 Fuser temperature control 114 Other kinds of control 116 Parts energized when SW1 main power is off 116 Parts that operate when SW1 main power SW2 secondary power IS ON iia ond whens PW de wins 117 Cooling fan control 118 Control panel control 122 Counter control 124 Option control a 126 5 MFP disassembly assembly External section 0 004 132 Replacing the ozone filter 132 Replacing the developing suction filter 133 Removing and reinstalling the external covers 133 Changing the control panel attachment angle and removing reinstalling 136 Resetting the circuit breaker 137 Drive section aaa 138 Removing and reinstalling the drum motor M2 138 Removing and reinstalling the fusing input gear aa 140 Scanner section aa 141 S
249. n of the remaining paper detection gear and since this is linked with the up down position of the up down plate the remaining paper quantity in the HCI can be determined by monitoring the on off of each sensor The remaining paper quantity detected with the four sensors is displayed on the MFP display a Q3637A LT remaining paper LT up down motor M100 detection PS1 PS102 LT remaining paper detection PS2 PS103 Actuator pS SE ZB LT remaining a paper detection PS3 PS104 Gear for M100 LT remaining paper Remaining detection PS4 PS105 paper detection gear ENWW b Q3638A LT remaining paper detection PS2 PS103 LT remaining paper LT remaining paper detection PS3 PS104 detection PS1 PS102 Gear for M100 LT remaining paper MP detection PS4 PS105 Remaining paper detection gear Paper feed section 9 HCI unit explanation First paper feed control V 5 HCIDB upoppsk PS100 S GND 5v CONV_PS fe PS106 S GND J PR PS fe PS107 SIDOP_PS fe PS110 24V CONT gt MC101 24V A MAIN BODY CONT gt l MC102 24V CONT fa GG EHE SD100 MS101 MS102 RAN LCTM_CONT o LCTM_CLK LCTM_F R LCM EM 4 o Do ZZu 5502 The first paper is fed by the pick roller and the feed roller driven by M101 HCI paper feed via MC101 HCI feed
250. n this mode is used toner adheres on the drum and then the blade cleans the drum preventing blade peeling 2 Black stripe creation control To improve durability of the blade stabilize load and stabilize paper dust crushing a black stripe of toner is adhered on the drum once every 10 copies and then cleaned Changeable with the 25 mode DIP SW ENWW Tray 2 3 paper feed unit Composition Tray up drive motor 1 2 M16 17 End stopper Paper size PS 2 1 2 2 PS6 12 Note Mechanisms Drive pulley for wire C D Pick roller Feed roller Separation roller Side guide Drive pulley for wire A B Paper size VR 1 2 VR1 2 Paper size PS 1 1 1 2 PS5 11 Trays 2 and 3 have the same shape and mechanisms Mechanism Method Paper lift up 1 Up Driven by wires Down Falls down by its own weight Tray loading Front loading Double feed prevention Torque limiter 1st paper feed Pick roller No paper detection Photosensor Actuator Paper size detection 2 Universal Width VR Length Photosensor actuators two 1st paper feed paper loop mechanism 3 Photosensor Actuator clutch 1 Paper lift up a Hoisting of up down plate Paper feed trays are driven by wires When a paper tray is loaded the tray up drive motor 1 M16 2 M17 rotates to wind the wires around the drive pulleys and consequently the
251. nal from the clincher hp PS F indicating whether the clincher F is in the home position L In the home position H Not in the home position 5 R_CST SW701 to RB to finisher CB Signal from the cartridge SW R indicating whether the cartridge is properly installed L Properly installed H Not properly installed 6 R LS SW702 to RB to finisher CB Signal from the staple SW R indicating the remaining volume of needles L Sufficient staples H Out of staples ENWW 7 F_CST SW703 to RB to finisher CB Signal from the cartridge SW F indicating whether the cartridge is properly installed L Properly installed H Not properly installed 8 F_LS SW704 to RB to finisher CB Signal from the staple SW F indicating the remaining volume of staples L Sufficient staples H Out of staples b Finisher CB output signals 1 M709 CONT finisher CB to RB Signal to activate or deactivate M709 L M709 on H M709 off 2 M709 F R finisher CB to RB Signal to control the rotation direction of M709 L CW H CCW 3 M710 CONT finisher CB to RB Signal to activate or deactivate M710 L M710 on H M710 off 4 M714 CONT finisher CB to RB Signal to activate or deactivate M714 L M714 on H M714 off 5 M714 F R finisher CB to RB Signal to control the rotation direction of M714 L CW H CCW ENWW 6 M715 CONT finisher CB to RB Signal to activate or deactivate M715 L M
252. nch mode The above operation is not generally performed in the non punch mode however for the paper sizes shown below the punch unit is moved to the position located inside of the side edge of paper by 10 mm in order to secure the easy feeding of paper when conveyed 2 holes 4 holes Inch 2 holes Swedish 4 holes MFPs B6 16K 3 holes MFP Letter 8 5 by 14 5 5 by 8 5R A5R A4 Punch section 13 Punch kit unit explanation c Detecting the side edge reference position When the finisher entrance PS PS704 detects the leading edge of paper M802 punch shift runs again to move the punch unit backward temporarily until the paper edge sensor detects the side edge of the paper If punching is performed for the paper conveyed from Pl the time when PS201 PI passage U or PS206 PI passage L detects the leading edge of the paper is the starting point Subsequently M802 runs inversely to move the punch unit frontward until the paper edge sensor re detects the side edge of the paper This position becomes the side edge reference position d Moving the punch position When the side edge reference position is detected M802 punch shift moves the punch unit again so that the center of punch edges is positioned to the center of paper The distance and direction of this movement differ from paper sizes Only when moving backward the punch unit makes a stop at the side edge reference position The direct
253. ner bottle If the no toner state is detected by TLD toner level detection after M13 has been held on for a specified period of time the toner bottle is assumed to be empty 2 Signals a Input signals 1 TONER SIG TLD to PRCB When the level of toner in the toner supply unit becomes low this signal goes low L displaying a message on the LCD connected to OB1 operation board 1 2 TONERM EM M13 to PRCB M13 toner bottle abnormality detection signal L M13 is normal H M13 is abnormal b Output signals 1 T SENSE CONT PRCB to TLD TLD toner level detection sensor power control signal The TLD is powered only when it is detecting the toner level Toner supply unit 71 MFP unit explanation 2 TONERM_CONT PRCB to M13 M13 toner bottle control signal L M13 on H M13 off 3 TONERM_CLK PRCB to M13 M13 toner bottle rotation speed control clock signal 4 TONERM CW CCW PRCB to M13 M13 toner bottle rotational direction indication signal H CW direction rotation L CCW direction rotation M12 toner supply control TNSM24V 12V A GND DMLED_CONT DM_MONI_EX DJLED CONT DM_SIG_EX DRUM_JSIG_EX TNLED_REF M12 toner supply is controlled by the PRCB printer control board Toner density is detected by TCSB toner control sensor board 72 MFP unit explanation 1 Operation a Toner density detection The Dmax maximum contrast sensor PD1 on th
254. ng block Removing and reinstalling the TSL unit Developing unit ananuna Screws that must not be removed Removing and reinstalling the developing unit Replacing the developer Cleaning the developing unit bias shaft Toner supply unit 00 Replacing and cleaning the toner A uak Cleaning toner recycle unit Removing and reinstalling the cleaning blade Removing and reinstalling the toner guide roller TGR Paper feed units of Trays 2 and 3 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit aaa aaa Removing and reinstalling the paper feed Trays2 and3 Removing and reinstalling the paper pick roller and pick roller rubber Removing and reinstalling the separation roller rubber Replacing the pre registration and feed clutches MCs Replacing the wires Wire lengths a Installing WiresS o o o ENWW Paper feed unit of Tray 3 179 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit ur near 179 Removing and reinstalling paper feed Tray onen aloe apne mene 179 Removing and reinstalling the paper pick roller and pick roller rubber 179 Removing and reinstalling the separation roller rubber 180 Replacing the pre registration and feed clutches MCs 181 Replacing the wires
255. ng block CAUTION Be careful not to drop and lose the support rubber when removing the wire Transfer wire Separation wire gt Support rubber ENWW 7 Turn the transfer separation corona unit upside down remove the snap rings and remove the transfer wire cleaning block and separation wire cleaning block from the front side Snap rings Coupling Transfer wire EZ AO cleaning block TA Separation wire cleaning block 8 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION When installing the transfer separation wires check that the coupling of the cleaning pad drive gear is engaged correctly Corona unit 165 MFP disassembly assembly Removing and reinstalling the TSL unit CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull the ADU frame from the MFP See Pulling out and reinstalling the ADU stand on page 188 2 Remove the transfer separation corona unit 3 Remove the inline connector CN463 CAUTION Ainline connector consists of two male sides and one female side Be sure to remove only the male side shown below of the CN463 connector 4 Remove the three screws and remove the TSL unit TSL unit Relay connector CN463 Screws 5 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse 166 MFP disassembly assembly Developing unit Screws that must not be rem
256. ng the removal steps in reverse CAUTION To install the coupling see Installing the coupling on page 154 Drum unit 153 MFP disassembly assembly Installing the coupling CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Clean the outer surface of the drum coupling and drum shaft coupling with drum cleaner and a cleaning pad 2 Insert the drum coupling aligning the protrusions on the drum coupling with the notches in the drum Drum notches HE Drum coupling Protrusions 154 MFP disassembly assembly 3 Insert the drum shaft coupling so that the D cut section of the drum shaft coupling matches the drum shaft Drum coupling Drum shaft D cut section Drum shaft coupling 4 Turn the head of the drum coupling clockwise so that the flange section on the drum shaft coupling is flush Flange section Drum shaft coupling 5 Tighten with a screw ENWW Removing cleaning and reinstalling the drum CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Be careful not to touch the drum or the cleaning blade with bare hands or damage them When leaving the drum be sure to put the drum cover over the drum and store it in a dark place When reinstalling the drum cleaning blade and toner guide roller apply setting powder to the entire surface of th
257. nit the finisher may fall due to the weight of the stacker unit This may cause injury Procedure 1 Remove the following parts Booklet tray Side cover Front door Rear cover 2 Detach the finisher from the MFP 3 Pull the handle and draw the stacker unit 4 Disconnect the three connectors CN1 CN2 and CN3 from the relay board RB Q3633A has two connectors CN1 and CN2 5 Remove each cable from wire guide ENWW 6 Remove the E ring to remove the shaft then fold up the arm and secure it using tape or other materials 7 Remove two screws and further pull stacker unit out CAUTION Place something under the drawn stacker unit to prevent the finisher from falling due to the weight of the unit KAN Support preventing the falling of the FNS ENWW 8 Remove two screws Lift the stacker unit to detach from the guide rail WARNING Guide rail Take care of your posture when servicing to avoid damage to your back or other joints NO 9 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION Make sure that the hook in the guide rail is inserted into the mounting hole of the stacker unit and then tighten the securing screw Stacker section 75 Finisher disassembly assembly Stapler section Removing and reinstalling the stapler unit cover CAUTION Make sure that the power cord of the MFP is unplugged
258. nner section removing and reinstalling 141 theory of operation 44 second paper feed control 101 second paper feed unit registration assembly 191 secondary power parts operational when on 117 sensitizing method 25 separation claw control 57 separation claw solenoid 156 separation claws 156 separation control 59 separation roller rubber Tray 1 186 Tray 3 180 Trays 2 and 3 174 separation wire cleaning drive section diagram 32 service checkpoints 6 service life 26 service material handling warnings 14 servicing warnings 11 sizes copy paper 25 documents 25 special paper 26 special ratio magnifications 25 specifications product 25 speed continuous copy 25 system overview 24 T temperature specifications 26 warnings 10 terminology cross reference 228 thermostat L TS2 220 thermostat U TS1 218 toner bottle 169 toner control sensor board 158 toner density control 69 toner guide roller TGR 171 toner guide roller TGR control 74 toner level detection control 71 toner recycle unit removing and reinstalling 170 theory of operation 73 toner supply M12 control 72 toner supply drive section diagram 34 toner supply unit cleaning and replacing 169 theory of operation 70 transfer control 59 transfer separation cleaning M10 control 61 236 Index transfer separation corona unit 163 transfer separation wire cleaning block 164 transfer separation wires 164 Tray 1 bypass tray removing and reinstalling 185 theory of oper
259. not detected 6 SIZE PS S PS310 to SCDB to ICB Paper size detection signal L Paper is detected H Paper is not detected 7 SIZE ANA PS301 to SCDB to ICB Paper size detection signal L Paper is detected H Paper is not detected 8 COVER SIG SCDB to ICB Same as APS TIM signal 9 APS TIMING SCDB to PRCB Same as APS TIM signal b Output signals 1 APS CONT This signal controls on off states of APS 5V power for driving P563 PS64 and PS65 APS1 to APS3 IL APS_5V off H APS_5V on ENWW AE control The CCD sensor detects the image density on an original during AE scanning to select the optimum copy gamma correction curve AE processing is controlled by the ICB image control board 1 Operation a AE detection 1 ENWW Platen mode The image density on an original is measured during AE scanning preceding the exposure scanning that is carried out after depression of the START button lt AE sampling area 1 Normal copy 10 mm inside the perimeter of the original detected by APS 2 Non image area erasure mode Entire original area detected during pre scanning ADF mode The image at the leading edge of the original is read when the PRINT button is pressed The read data is used to measure the image density on the original lt AE sampling area 1 Main scanning direction 10 mm area inside the original detected by APS 2 Sub scanning direction 2 to 4 mm area from
260. nt the drum from _ _ _ being scratched the swing Auxiliary en 1 Separation claws mechanism slides the separation Transport assistance 2 Ratchet wheel claws about 8 mm back and forth in The drum unit is an integral assembly parallel with the drum surface consisting of a drum charging corona unit developing unit cleaning toner recycle unit PCL and separation claws Separation claw SD SD1 1 Auxiliary separation To prevent paper jamming three separation claws are used to separate paper from the drum forcibly These separation claws are pressed against the drum or detached from it by turning on off the separation Separation claws claw solenoid SD1 56 MFP unit explanation ENWW 2 Transport assistance The thick paper conveyance ability has been improved by the use of ratchets star wheels Separation claw control MC24V 2 MS1 MS2 OO Separation claws are driven by SD1 separation claw Separation claws are swung by M2 drum SD1 is controlled by PRCB printer control board 1 Operation a Separation claw ON OFF control SD1 separation claw is a pull type solenoid powered by 24 VDC It turns on to press separation claws against the drum to help image copied paper separate 1 SD1 separation claw operation timing SD1 turns on after a lapse of specified time from turning on of PS43 leading edge of the second paper feed section It turns off after a lapse of the time
261. ntrolled by PRCB printer control board 1 Operation a ON timing FM4 developing suction is turned on when M2 drum is turned on b OFF timing FM4 developing suction is turned off after a lapse of the specified time from turning off of M2 drum 2 Signals a Input signal 1 FM2 EM FM4 to PRCB FM4 developing suction abnormality detection signal L FM4 is normal H FM4 is abnormal b Output signal 1 SUCTFAN D ACDB to FM4 FM4 developing suction drive signal L FM4 off H FM4 on Developing unit 69 MFP unit explanation Toner supply unit Composition Toner bottle Toner bottle motor M13 Toner supply motor M12 Mechanisms Mechanism Method Toner supply Supply by screw Toner level detection Piezoelectric method 100 25g Toner agitation 1 Agitator plate Toner bottle 2 Rotary cartridge Capacity 1000 g Toner leakage prevention Toner supply shutter 1 Toner agitation Toner agitator plates are driven by the following two motors through the gear unit a Toner supply motor M12 Drives the toner supply screws b Toner bottle motor M13 Drives the toner bottle 70 MFP unit explanation ial Toner level detection sensor TLD Toner supply screws The agitator plates prevent toner from solidifying and collecting on the toner level detection sensor TLD Toner bottle Toner bo
262. nveyance roller upper Vertical conveyance roller lower of M1 paper feed to the vertical conveyance roller upper and vertical conveyance roller lower via MC11 vertical conveyance MC 1 and MC12 vertical conveyance MC 2 The above parts are controlled by PRCB printer control board Related signals are PS25 to PS27 vertical conveyance 1 to 3 and PS29 vertical conveyance door open close 1 Operation Paper fed from Tray 2 is then fed to the second paper feed unit directly without passing through vertical conveyance rollers When paper is fed from Tray 3 or 4 PS26 vertical conveyance 2 is used to feed paper to the standby position When PS26 is turned off by the preceding paper MC11 and MC12 vertical conveyance MC 1 and MC 2 are turned on and the paper fed from Tray 3 or 4 is fed to the standby position where PS26 was turned on by the drive force of M1 paper feed MC11 and MC12 are turned on after lapse of the specified time from restart of Vertical conveyance section 93 MFP unit explanation registration of the preceding paper to rotate all vertical conveyance rollers thus feeding paper to the second paper unit 2 Signals a PRCB input signals 1 TIPASS PS PS25 to PRCB Paper passage detection signal for Tray 2 L Not detected H Detected 2 T2PASS_PS PS26 to PRCB Paper passage detection signal for Tray 3 L Not detected H Detected 3 T3PASS_PS PS27 to PRCB Pap
263. o are oon LJ 7 CJ E 5 Es 5 1 a r J Registration MC MC1 IT E I Mis centering PS PS70 ENWW Paper dust cleaning brush Automatic duplex unit ADU 95 MFP unit explanation Mechanisms Mechanisms Method Second paper feed paper loop 1 Loop roller trays 1 3 HCl feed roller Q3640A ADU pre registration roller ADU Image position correction 2 Second paper feed auxiliary mechanism 3 Image position is corrected according to the information detected by PS43 leading edge and PS70 paper mis centering Pre transfer roller Second paper feed paper conveyance Conveyance motor M5 drive Second paper feed jam removal mechanism Opening closing of jam removal section of pre transfer section Registration roller rotation knob Conveyance section paper conveyance Conveyance section paper suction mechanism 4 Conveyance belts two Conveyance suction fan FM3 suction duct Reverse exit section paper path selection 5 Reverse exit selection gate reverse gate SD SD7 drive paper is automatically guided owing to the paper guide shape Reverse exit section paper conveyance Reverse exit roller ADU reverse roller Reverse exit section paper conveyance drive Reverse exit motor M8 drive ADU reverse motor M9 drive Reverse exit section jam removal mechanism Paper exit guide plate opening closing ADU bottom plate assembly opening closing
264. off PS1 7 3 OFF timing When PS1 7 is turned on b Operation of the MC4 6 pre registration MC1 2 1 ON timing After a specified time from MC3 5 paper feed MC 1 2 turning on 2 OFF timing When PS1 7 paper feed 1 2 is turned off 2 Signals a PRCB input signals 1 TIPRE_PS PS1 to PRCB Paper passage detection signal Tray 2 L Detected H Not detected Tray 2 3 paper feed unit 77 MFP unit explanation 2 T2PRE PS PS7 to PRCB Paper passage detection signal Tray 3 L Detected H Not detected b PRCB output signals 1 TIFEED DRV PRCB to MC3 MC3 drive control signal Tray 2 L MC3 on H MC3 off 2 TIPREMC DRV PRCB to MC4 MC4 drive control signal Tray 2 L MC4 on H MC4 off 3 T2FEED DRV PRCB to MC5 MC5 drive control signal Tray 3 L MC5 on H MC5 off 4 T2PREMC DRV PRCB to MC6 MC6 drive control signal Tray 3 L MC6 on H MC6 off 78 MFP unit explanation ENWW Paper up drive control T2RISEM 24 T2RISEM D Paper stacked in the tray is pushed up by transmitting the drive force of M16 17 tray up drive 1 2 to the up down plate in the tray via drive wires M16 17 are controlled by the PRCB printer control board Related signals are PS2 8 tray upper limit 1 2 and PS4 10 remaining paper 1 2 1 Operation a Paper up drive control When Tray 2 3 is loaded M16 17 tray up drive 1 2 turns on to lift the up down plate in the tray When PS2 8 tray upper lim
265. olding stitch and fold and tri folding M721 upper tray paper exit controlled by modes the finisher CB finisher control board drives the upper tray paper exit roller The ON signal from the MFP s START button lets M708 paper exit opening rotate causing the paper exit opening to The related signals are PS701 upper tray paper exit PS704 finisher entrance and PS719 upper tray full be opened When PS725 folding paper exit or 1 Operation PS729 folding full PS has detected the a M721 upper tray paper exit control trailing edge of the last sheet and a predefined time period has elapsed since then M708 again rotates to start the closing operation of the paper exit opening When PS712 paper exit opening HP detects the position When PS704 finisher entrance has closed M708 stops detected the trailing edge of the paper and a predefined time period has M721 upper tray paper exit starts its high speed rotation when PS701 upper tray paper exit detects the leading edge of the paper Amigas elapsed since then the rotation of M721 a Finisher CB output signals changes to low 1 M708 DRV finisher CB to M708 When PS701 detects the trailing edge of the paper and a predefined time Signal to drive control M708 period has elapsed M721 stops L M708 on H M708 off 34 Finisher unit explanation ENWW b Upper tray full detection When the papers ejected to upper tray reach to specified height PS719
266. olled by switching between the drive current directions of two signals Status CHGM A CHGM B Forward stroke of H L cleaning Backward stroke of L H cleaning Stop L L ENWW M10 transfer separation cleaning control IO DTXD IO DCLK SEP_CLM_M A SEP_CLM_M B M10 transfer separation cleaning is a DC motor powered by 24 VDC and is controlled by PRCB printer control board via ADUDB ADU drive board Between PRCB and ADUDB signals are exchanged using serial data 1 Operation a Purpose of driving M10 transfer separation cleaning used to drive the transfer separation wire cleaning pads b Operation timing The transfer separation wires are cleaned when SW2 sub power is turned on or when the fuser temperature is lower than 50 C It is also carried out after the specified copy count is reached Changeable with the 25 mode DIP SW c Cleaning operation Normally the transfer separation wire cleaning pads are on the front side of the machine They move back and forth to clean the transfer and separation wires The movement direction is changed by changing the rotational direction of M10 transfer separation cleaning ENWW The rotational direction of M10 and the position of the cleaner are detected by monitoring the current value of M10 with PRCB printer control board 2 Signals a Input signals 1 O URXD ADUDB to PRCB Serial data used to report
267. oller LCT Registration roller 2 WO Loop roller 1 lt By pass tray gt Loop formation point Feed roller Registration roller lt ADU gt Registration roller Loop formation point ADU pre registration roller Image position correction A leading edge PS PS43 and paper mis centering PS PS70 are provided at the exit of the registration roller thus enhancing the positional accuracy of the copy image The paper position information detected by PS43 and PS70 is processed by the image processor to correct the image ENWW 3 4 write position in such a manner that the document scanned image position match the copy paper position The leading edge PS PS43 is used to correct the write position in the sub scanning direction and the mis centering PS PS70 is used to correct the write position in the main scanning direction Second paper feed auxiliary mechanism The distance between the registration roller and the transfer and separation corona unit is made long to achieve the time required for correcting the image position To assist conveyance of paper between the registration roller and the image transfer and separation corona unit a pre transfer roller is provided just before the transfer and separation corona unit Leading edge PS PS43 rear Paper mis centering PS Pre transfer roller Transfer and separation corona unit Registration roller Conveyanc
268. on When the side edge reference position is detected the punch unit is again moved to position the center of punch edges to the center of the paper The distance and direction of this movement differ from paper sizes Only when moving backward the punch unit makes a stop at the side edge reference position 8 Punch kit overview Paper edge sensor Center of punch edges Punch unit Punch edge Front a gt Back Moving direction of punch unit Direction of paper conveyance o o Paper center Paper Punch In the punch mode the finisher conveyance motor M701 turns off to stop the paper conveyance temporarily when the specified time has passed since the finisher entrance PS PS704 detected the trailing edge of the paper and holes are punched During punching the drive force of the punch motor M801 is transferred to the shaft to rotate the shaft once As the shaft rotates the eccentric cams at both ends of the shaft rotate to lower the punch edges making holes in the paper After the punch is finished the punch unit moves to the side edge reference position when the specified time has passed since the trailing edge of the paper is detected by PS704 which makes a standby status for the punch process for the following paper ENWW ay Eccentric cam Top position HP ENWW Punch edges Eccentric cam Bottom position Punching process 9 Punch kit overview 10
269. on Next M11 moves the exposure unit toward the paper exit side After being driven by the specified number of steps M11 performs the second white correction Then L1 is turned off for black correction searching for the home position of the exposure unit In each of the first and second shading correction processes the CCD 1 line data is read to compare brightness levels between pixels The brighter data is used as white correction data PS61 Platen APS read position i V i First white correction l 1 kaan A 4 white correction Y t Black correction Home position search When the START button is on L1 exposure lamp turns on Next M11 scanner moves the exposure unit toward the paper exit side After being driven by the specified number of steps M11 scanner stops thus reading the light reflected by the white reference plate installed underneath the glass stopper plate and performing the first white correction Next M11 moves the exposure unit toward the paper exit side After being driven by the specified number of steps M11 performs the second white correction Then M11 proceeds to the ADF copy operation or platen copy operation 46 MFP unit explanation e ADF copy operation After completion of the shading correction started by pressing the START button M11 scanner moves the exposure unit toward the paper exit side After being driven by the specified number of steps fro
270. on gate into the reverse exit section just like the reverse exit operation Then the paper is fed to the ADU by the reverse exit roller and ADU reverse roller These rollers do not rotate in the opposite direction even when the paper reverse PS PS42 detects the trailing edge of the paper allowing the paper to be fed until the reverse exit PS PS46 turns off ENWW Reverse exit gate Reverse exit selection gate Fuser roller upper als fo A Fuser roller Ng ANY eS lower n O Reverse exit PS 8 PS46 O Z A CO N Cc gt ADU reverse roller ADU gate Reverse exit roller Paper reverse PS PS42 Non stack paper feed mechanism In the two sided copy mode the ADU reverse roller starts rotating in the opposite direction when the reverse exit PS PS46 detects the trailing edge of paper and consequently it turns off The paper is fed toward the reverse exit section However since the ADU gate is closed the paper is fed to the ADU conveyance roller 1 through the path above this gate Thus the paper is reversed and fed to the ADU exit without being stacked in the ADU The reversed paper is fed by ADU conveyance rollers 1 4 Automatic duplex unit ADU 99 MFP unit explanation Reverse exit roller ADU conveyance roller 1 ADU reverse roller ADU conveyance roller 2 ADU conveyance roller 3 ADU conveyance roller 4 8 o 8 7 ADU pre registration mechanism In the ADU pa
271. on sensor is processed by ICB image control board via SCDB scanner drive board 1 Operation a APS detection 1 ADF mode The paper size is detected according to the combination of on off states of PS309 original size 2 and PS310 original size 1 of the ADF s original feed tray and the resistance value of VR301 original paper size 2 Platen mode The paper size is detected according to the combination of on off states of PS63 APS 1 PS64 APS 2 and ENWW PS65 APS 3 and the signal read by the CCD sensor PS63 to PS65 are used to detect the original size in the sub scanning direction and the CCD sensor is used to detect the original size in the main scanning direction Paper exit side amp a PS65 PS63 PS64 Photo sensor O LED Relationships between sensors and paper sizes are as follows Sensor PS65 PS63 PS64 Paper size Min size O O O B5R e O O B5 O O O B4 o o o A4R o o O A4 O O o A3 o o o 8 5 by 11R o O O 8 5 by 11 O O O 8 5 by 14 o o o 11x 17 o o o e ON O OFF b APS detection timing The APS detection timing differs between the platen mode and DF mode 1 ADF mode When the ADF mode is selected or an original is set on the ADF original feed tray APS detection takes place using Scamner section 49 MFP unit explanation PS309 original size 2 PS310 original size 1 and VR301 origina
272. on signal Tray 2 L Not detected H Detected 3 TIUP_PS PS8 to PRCB Paper upper limit detection signal Tray 3 L Not detected H Detected 4 TIRM_PS PS10 to PRCB Remaining paper detection signal Tray 3 L Not detected H Detected b PRCB output signals 1 TIRISEM 24V PRCB to M16 M16 ON OFF control signal Tray 2 2 T2RISEM 24 PRCB to M17 M17 ON OFF control signal Tray 3 80 MFP unit explanation Paper size detection control The paper size in Tray 2 3 is detected using PS5 6 11 12 paper size 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 and VR1 2 paper size 1 2 Based on the detection signals the PRCB printer control board judges the paper size 1 Operation The length of paper is detected using PS5 6 11 12 paper size 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 Variable resistors VR1 2 interlocked with the guide position are installed at the bottom of the tray to detect the width of paper The relationships between the sensors and paper sizes lengths are as follows Paper size 8 5 by 11 A4Rto F4 or Sensor or less B5R larger PS5 11 OFF ON ON PS6 12 OFF OFF ON ENWW 2 Signals a PRCB input signals 3 TISIZE S PS PS5 to PRCB Paper size detection signal Tray 2 L Paper does not exist H Paper exists 4 TISIZE L PS PS6 to PRCB Paper size detection signal Tray 2 L Paper does not exist H Paper exists 5 T2SIZE L PS PS11 to PRCB Paper size detection signal Tray 3 L Paper
273. ontrol 51 Staple control aaa 53 Folding Tri folding section Q3634A only 56 Composition 0005 56 Mechanism 0 eee 57 M719 folding knife control 58 M720 folding conveyance control 59 SD706 tri folding gate control 60 3 Finisher disassembly assembly External section 0 0000 62 Removing and reinstalling the booklet tray Q3634A only 62 Removing and reinstalling the top COVENT aa na ate nena ee 62 Removing and reinstalling the top COVE 2 an HG warheads 63 Removing and reinstalling the side COVER a Kan maana detect 63 Removing and reinstalling the front eee ea ai a 64 Removing and reinstalling the rear COVER kaan ne iia pete 64 Removing and reinstalling the main tray dee 65 iii Contents Removing and reinstalling the main paper exit opening cover 66 Removing and reinstalling the booklet paper exit opening cover Q3634A only 66 Conveyance section 5 67 Replacing the paper exit roller sponge roller 67 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller sponge roller 68 Removing and reinstalling the paper exit opening unit 69 Main tray section aan 70 Replacing the tray up down motor MZOS 2 2222 70 Replacing the up down wire 70 Stacker section 0000 74 Removing and
274. ooling is driven by DCPS DC power supply unit 118 MFP unit explanation 1 Operation I ADUFAN_EM 1 ADU FAN 1 P GND ADUDB a FM1 MFP cooling 1 1 ON timing A 24 VDC motor is used for each cooling During warm up starts rotating at a low speed when M2 drum is turned on ENWW During copying held rotating at a high speed When copying is completed rotates at a high speed for the specified time according to the temperature in the machine then starts rotating at a low speed 2 OFF timing During warm up stops when M2 drum is turned off After completion of warm up not turned off until SW2 sub power is turned off b FM2 writing section cooling 1 ON timing Turned on when M15 polygon is turned on During copying held rotating at a high speed in sync with M2 drum When not copying held rotating at a low speed 2 OFF timing Not turned off until SW2 sub power is turned off c FM5 cleaner cooling 1 ON timing Turned on when SW2 sub power is turned on During coping held rotating at a high speed When copying is completed starts rotating at a low speed after a lapse of the specified time from turning off of M7 paper exit After this switching between high and low speed operations takes place according to the temperature in the machine 2 OFF timing Not turned off until SW2 sub power is turned off d FM6 paper ex
275. op 2 Signals a Input signal 1 DRUM_EM M2 to PRCB M2 drum rotation abnormality detection signal H Rotation error when motor speed changes by 6 5 percent more or less than the motor speed specified value L Normal rotation 42 MFP unit explanation b Output signals 1 DRUM_CONT PRCB to M2 M2 drum ON OFF control signal L M2 on H M2 off 2 CW CCW PRCB to M4 M2 drum rotational direction switchover signal L CW rotation H CCW rotation 3 DRUM CLK PRCB to M2 M2 drum rotational speed control clock signal M4 fuser control 5V P GND MAINM_CONT MAINM_CLK MAINM_F R MAINM_EM PRCB MS1 MS2 24V2 OO O O P GND DCPS M4 fuser is controlled by PRCB printer control board and the motor drive power is supplied from DCPS DC power supply unit 1 Operation M4 fuser is a motor driven by 24 VDC It drives the fuser roller M4 starts rotating when the START button is pressed and stops when the last copied paper has been ejected During the warm up operation M4 rotates to rotate the fuser roller ENWW 2 Signals a Input signal 1 MAINM EM M4 to PRCB M4 fuser rotation error detection signal H Rotation error when motor speed changes by 6 5 percent more or less than the motor speed specified value L Normal rotation b Output signals 1 MAINM CONT PRCB to M4 M4 fuser ON OFF control signal L M4 on H M4 off 2 MAINM F R
276. or CAUTION 15 Remove one screw to remove the wiring harness for CN404 ADF unit 205 MFP disassembly assembly 16 Remove eight screws three front five rear and turn over the fusing attachment rail assembly to the paper exit side Screws Relay connector gt CN417 Fixing stachment GE F BS rail assembly A ANY EEL El LIN wiring CN404 Relay connector Screws CN403 17 Remove the E ring from ADU conveyance roller 2 shaft 18 Remove the front E ring two belt holding collars ADU conveyance belt 2 and two ADU conveyance pulleys 206 MFP disassembly assembly 19 Remove the pin from the shaft of each roller 20 Remove the E ring and bearing inside the ADU conveyance pulley 21 Remove the rear E ring and bearing and remove the ADU conveyance roller 1 and ADU conveyance roller 2 by sliding them back and forth Belt holding collars Automatic document feeder transport pulleys E ring bearing E ringS Automatic document feeder Automatic document feeder conveyance roller 2 shaft conveyance belt 2 Automatic document feeder Automatic document feeder conveyance roller 1 conveyance roller 2 E rings 22 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Removing and reinstalling the paper reverse exit roller WARNING The interlock which is turned off when the front right or left door opens or closes should neve
277. or PS733 clincher hp R and F do not return to on within a predefined time period since they have changed to off the MFP recognizes that a needle clogging error has occurred In this case M709 M714 stapler R and F M710 and M715 clincher R and F initiate reverse rotations to return the staplers and the clinchers to their home positions Cartridge detection SW701 and SW703 cartridge R and F in the staplers detects whether the cartridges are properly installed or not If the cartridge is not found or is considered to be improperly installed an error message will be displayed on the LCD of the MFP d Staple detection control When SW702 staple R or SW704 staple F detects the state of no needle remaining staples an error message will be displayed on the LCD of the MFP 54 Finisher unit explanation 1 R_Dhp P8730 to RB to finisher CB Signal from the stapler hp PS R indicating whether the stapler R is in the home position L In the home position H Not in the home position 2 F_Dhp PS731 to RB to finisher CB Signal from the stapler hp PS F indicating whether the stapler F is in the home position L In the home position H Not in the home position 3 R_Chp PS732 to RB to finisher CB Signal from the clincher hp PS R indicating whether the clincher R is in the home position L In the home position H Not in the home position 4 F_Chp PS733 to RB to finisher CB Sig
278. osition is detected by the index sensor board The ICB has an E RDH function to store digitized image data Various editing functions can be performed based on this data 1 Operation a Image processing The following processing is performed by the ICB image control board 1 Automatic offset control AOCI The IC on the A D converter board ADB automatically adjusts the analog offset voltage of the CCD sensor output so that it is at the lower limit of the A D converter level 2 Automatic gain control AGC During shading correction the white reference plate is read to adjust the analog amplification factor of the CCD sensor output so that the read level is at the upper limit of the A D converter level 3 Shading correction lt Timing gt When SW2 sub power is on Atjob start 4 Brightness density conversion 5 AE processing 6 Text dot pattern judgment 7 Filtering 8 Magnification change processing 9 Copy gamma correction 10 Skew correction 11 Error diffusion processing 12 Data compression expansion processing 13 Write density control 54 MPP unit explanation b Write The image control board ICB sends image data on a pixel basis to laser driver board LDB according to the control signals from the PRCB printer control board LDB causes the laser light to be emitted for a period corresponding to the image data This laser light is radiated onto the drum surface 1 Maximum power control
279. osition of the booklet stopper The booklet stopper is interlocked with the flat stapling stopper When the booklet stopper is at its home position the flat stapling stopper is in the position to support the paper by the pressure of the spring With this configuration stapling is performed in the staple mode ENWW Folding stopper motor M718 Spring Booklet stopper Stopper HP PS PS723 When the booklet stopper lowers the 4 flat stapling stopper is released via the link mechanism The booklet stopper catches the paper that falls J Release Flat stapling stopper LC I iu I Booklet stopper One flat stapling stopper is fixed on each of two clinchers R and F When the two clinchers move away from each other the two stoppers also become remote ENWW Flat stapling stoppers Clincher R Clincher F Paper alignment U In the staple flat stapling mode the paper alignment plate U front and rear oscillate to align the sheets The oscillation of the paper alignment plate U is achieved by the normal and reverse rotations of the alignment motor U M705 The alignment hp PS U PS708 detects the home position of the paper alignment plate U Paper alignment L Q3634A only In the stitch and fold folding tri folding modes both the paper alignment plate U and the paper alignmen
280. oved Procedure 1 Two screws securing the toner transfer regulation plate 2 One screw securing the magnet angle adjusting knob Screws that must not be removed Screw that must not be removed Removing and reinstalling the developing unit CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull out the drum unit from the MFP See Drum unit on page 152 2 Release the toner supply pipe 3 Release the developing unit push pressure lever ENWW 4 Supporting the developing unit at the positions shown below with both hands remove it from the drum unit Toner supply pipe Developing unit 5 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse Replacing the developer CAUTION When replacing the developer in the developing unit take care not to allow dirt to get into it To rotate the developing sleeve rotate the developing gear counterclockwise Never rotate the developing gear clockwise ENWW Developing gear Procedure 1 Pull out the drum unit from the MFP See Drum unit on page 152 2 Remove the developing unit from the drum unit 3 Release the hook of the developing unit cover and remove it upward Developing unit cover Hooks Developing unit 167 MFP disassembly assembly 4 Tilt the developing unit about 45 degrees and rotate the developing gear counterclockwise to discharge all of the developer adh
281. over 1 Procedure Procedure 1 Remove two screws to detach the booklet 1 Remove the two caps tray 2 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse Booklet tray Screws a Ug Caps Screws Pa 2 Open the front door and remove five ee screws to detach the top cover 1 u Top cover 1 E ma 3 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse 62 Finisher disassembly assembly ENWW Removing and reinstalling the top cover 2 CAUTION Make sure that the power cord of the MFP is unplugged from the power outlet Uninstall the PI optional if installed Procedure 1 Remove the top cover 1 2 Open the front door 3 Remove four screws and pull out the upper tray Then remove the top cover 2 Screws Upper tray Top cover 2 g Front door LS f gt 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Removing and reinstalling the side cover CAUTION Make sure that the power cord of the MFP is unplugged from the power outlet Procedure 1 Open the front door 2 Remove three screws and remove the side cover Side cover Screws 3 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse External section 63 Finisher disassembly assembly Removing and rein
282. owing the removal steps in reverse 160 MFP disassembly assembly Replacing the charging wires CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Remove the charging corona unit 2 Remove the charge control plate 3 Remove the spark arrester plates front and rear Spark arrester plate front a Spark arrester plate rear F I 4 Remove the charge control plate cleaner ENWW 5 Remove the spring and remove the Removing and reinstalling the charging wire charging wire cleaning unit Charge control plate cleaner CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Remove the charging wire 2 Remove the snap ring and remove the charging wire cleaning pad CAUTION When removing the charging wire cleaning pad be careful not to drop the two collars l Charging E wire 6 Reinstall the above parts following the Charging wire cleaning pad removal steps in reverse ENWW Corona unit 161 MFP disassembly assembly CAUTION When installing the charging wire cleaning pad install the pad in the orientation shown below Also do not forget to attach the two collars Charging wire cleaning pad IRAN 3 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse 162 MFP disassembly assembly Removing
283. own pulley the pin falls Be careful not to lose the pin 7 ad ag Be Up down gt Up down pulley L D 00 IN Lo IN MA or NG O Up down wire bracket Up down stay Sear NG E ring A CAUTION Temporarily attach the wire bracket to the up down stay with two screws The wire bracket must be installed with the longer portion of the wire facing upward ENWW Main tray section 71 Finisher disassembly assembly 7 Hook the up down wire around the up down pulley U Wind the wire tightly around the up down pulley L 2 turns from inside to outside Secure the end of the wire to another wire end outside of the Longer portion of wire up down pulley L Up down stay I Shorter portion of wire 6 Secure the end of a new up down wire to 2 turns the wire end of the up down pulley L Wind Up down puller L the wire tightly around the up down pulley L approx 5 turns from inside to 8 Insert the pin into the hole in the shaft Put outside Insert the pulley L into the shaft the gear into the shaft and fix the gear with so that the slots on the pulley L align with the E ring the lock pin on the shaft Lock pin Wire end 72 Finisher disassembly assembly ENWW 9 Attach a spring scale to the hole on the top of the belt tensioner Pull the spring scale upward until a tension of 2 5 0 25 kg is indicated Tighten the two screws A 2 5 0 25kg Belt tensioner
284. paper Q3637A 4000 sheets of 80 g m or 20 Ib paper optional Q3638A 4000 sheets of 80 g m or 20 Ib paper optional Functions Applicable document types Sheets books and solid objects Document size A3 11 by 17 maximum Copy paper size e Metric area A3 to A6R F4 e Inch area 11 by 17 to 8 5 by 5 5 Wide paper up to 314 mm by 459 mm maximum Magnifications Fixed magnifications Metric area x1 00 x2 00 x1 41 x1 22 x1 15 x0 86 0 82 x0 71 x0 50 Inch area x1 00 x2 00 x1 55 x1 29 x1 21 x0 93 0 77 x0 65 x0 50 Special ratio magnifications 3 modes Zoom magnifications x0 25 to x4 00 in 1 percent steps Vertical magnifications x0 25 to x4 00 in 1 percent steps Horizontal magnifications x0 25 to x4 00 in 1 percent steps Warm up time 20 C rated voltage 9055 20 C rated voltage 9065 5 5 minutes maximum 6 minutes maximum First copy out time FCOT Mode A4 8 5 by 11 Manual 3 4 seconds or shorter 9055 3 1 seconds or shorter 9065 Straight paper ejection platen mode life size non AE or AES without finisher and paper feed from Tray 2 Continuous copy speed life size copies min Size cpm A4 8 5 by 11 55 9055 65 9065 Continuous copy count 1 to 9999 Copy density selection AE or AES manual 9 steps Arbitrary density 2 modes ENWW hp LaserJet 9055mfp 9065mfp product specifications 25 MFP overvie
285. paper feed drive section 4 paper feed section removing and reinstalling 16 theory of operation 8 ENWW pick roller rubber 18 pick roller unit 17 power consumption 2 power source 2 product specifications 2 PS106 HCI feed PS 17 PS107 HCI first paper feed PS 17 Q Q3637A up down wires 21 Q3638A up down wires 25 R remaining paper detection control 13 S separation roller rubber 19 specifications product 2 stacked paper up down wire drive section 5 standard paper sizes 2 T temperature 2 U up down plate drive control 12 up down wires Q3637A 21 Q3638A 25 W weight machine 2 31 Index 32 Index ENWW hp LaserJet 9055mfp 9065mfp stapler stacker Q3633A multifunction finisher Q3634A Contents 1 Finisher overview Stapler stacker Q3633A and multifunction finisher Q3634A product specifications 2 A a a e ae 2 FUNCHONS au re rn 2 Staple mode a 4 Booklet mode Q3634A only 4 Tri folding mode Q3634A only 4 Option AA 4 Machine specifications 4 Maintenance a 5 Operating environment 5 Cross section diagram 2 222220 6 Drive system diagram 7 Paper conveyance drive 7 Stacker drive oooommooommm oo 8 Staple dri Veee ta eei nea eaae ia 9 Tray dve oia rial la 10 Folding drive ooooocoocooo oo 11 Paper conveyance path
286. parts following the 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse removal steps in reverse Toner supply unit Replacing and cleaning the toner bottle Procedure 1 Open the toner supply door and pull the toner supply unit forward Toner supply door Toner supply unit 2 Remove the toner bottle ENWW Toner supply unit 169 MFP disassembly assembly Cleaning toner recycle unit Removing and reinstalling the cleaning blade CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Be sure to replace the following parts at the same time Cleaning blade Toner guide roller TGR Do not touch the edges of the cleaning blade with bare hands When reinstalling the cleaning blade apply setting powder to the entire surface of the drum and cleaning blade regardless of whether the drum and cleaning blade are new or old When you have applied setting powderto the drum perform the following before installing the drum unit on the MFP To ensure accurate toner concentration wipe scattered setting powder off the y sensor and Dmax maximum contrast JAM sensor on the toner control sensor board with a rag moistened with alcohol With the charging corona unit and developing unit removed turn the drum once to prevent setting powder from scattering onto the charging corona unit and to prevent image defects 170 MFP disassembly assembly Procedure 1 Remo
287. passage U L PS202 PS207 No sheet U L PS203 PS208 Sheet setting U L PS204 PS209 Tray upper limit U L PS205 PS210 Tray lower limit U L PS212 Sheet size L and VR201 VR202 Sheet size U L 1 Operation a Automatic sheet feeding online 1 When the MFP s START button turns on M201 M202 tray up down U L are driven in forward which lifts the up down plate U L until PS204 PS209 tray upper limit U L are activated 2 Concurrently while M203 PI conveyance is driven at low speed D201 SD202 sheet feed U L and MC201 MC202 conveyance U L comes on and sheets are fed into the finisher stacker 3 When the last sheet on the up down plate U L is fed and PS203 PS208 sheet setting U L comes off the no sheet signal is sent to the MFP causing the first feed of MFP to stop After that when PS202 PS207 no sheet U L comes off M201 M202 tray up down U L are driven in reverse which lowers the up down plate U L until PS205 PS210 tray lower limit U L are activated ENWW MC201 conveyance U M203 PI conveyance M201 MC202 Conveyance L PS210 tray lower limit L tray up down U PS205 ae PS202 no sheet U tray lower limit U PS204 tray upper limit U tray up down L sheet feed L PS207 SD201 no sheet L sheet feed U PS208 PS209 tray upper limit L sheet setting L PS203 sheet setting U b Manual sheet feeding offline Only the lower tray is allowed
288. per is looped by the ADU pre registration roller to correct paper inclination in the conveyance section The ADU pre registration roller stops when the loop roller motor M6 stops however the ADU conveyance roller continues to feed paper at a constant speed forming a paper loop between the ADU pre registration roller and ADU conveyance roller As a result paper inclination is corrected When M6 starts the ADU pre registration roller starts rotating to feed the paper to the second feed section An ADU conveyance MC MC13 is provided to turn on off the drive force of ADU conveyance rollers 1 and 2 in order to stop the looped paper temporarily and to adjust the loop size In addition an ADU deceleration MC MC2 is provided to turn on off the drive force of ADU conveyance rollers 3 and 4 The ADU conveyance MC MC13 is turned on off only when the paper length is 325 mm or longer If the paper length is less than 325 mm it stays on during copying 100 MFP unit explanation ADU conveyance roller 3 ADU conveyance roller 4 Pre registration loop formation point ADU pre registration roller Thick paper conveyance mechanism To enhance reliability of thick paper copying the conveyance motor M5 paper exit motor M7 reverse exit motor M8 and ADU reverse motor M9 are switched as shown below according to the paper type selected in the key operator mode Paper type Linear speed Thick paper 185 mm s
289. peration signal from the MFP lets M716 alignment L rotate so that the space between the two alignment plates L will become narrower The rotation of M716 stops when the plates reach their waiting positions that provide a little wider space for the paper to be accommodated When PS705 stacker entrance has detected the rear end of the paper and a predefined time period has elapsed the alignment plates L horizontally oscillate to align the paper The oscillation is provided by the normal and reverse rotations of ENWW M716 DRV A DD vu M716 DRVA M716 DRV B M716 DRV B 5V PS705 IN PS705 GND 5V PS724 IN PS724 GND M716 This paper alignment action is repeated each time a sheet of paper is fed 2 Signals a Finisher CB input signals 1 PS724 IN PS724 to RB to finisher CB Signal relating to the detection of the home position of the alignment plate L L Not in the home position H In the home position b Finisher CB output signals 1 M716 DRV A A finisher CB to RB to M716 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase A of M716 2 M716 DRV B B finisher CB to RB to M716 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase B of M716 Stacker section 43 Finisher unit explanation M718 folding stopper control Q3634A only 24V oe M718 CLK M718 RESET M718 F R M718 CONT MAIN BODY M718 folding stopper moves the booklet stopper The link mechanism releases the flat
290. ping unit bias shaft 168 Toner Supply Unites ratas lt ee I A 169 Replacing and cleaning the toner bottle 169 Cleaning toner recycle unit 000 cee eee 170 Removing and reinstalling the cleaning blade 170 Removing and reinstalling the toner guide roller TGR 171 Paper feed units of Trays 2 and3 000 cece eee 173 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit 173 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed Trays 2and3 173 Removing and reinstalling the paper pick roller and pick r llerir bber ii ta aa dau nn 174 Removing and reinstalling the separation roller rubber 174 Replacing the pre registration and feed clutches MCs 175 Replacing the wires 000 cece eee eee ee 176 Wir slengihs lt mie vette doe ane athe wo ee Ae ee ete 178 Installing Wir S a icon in ii dee ede ea wd ads Pk ast 178 Paper feed unit of Tray3B ooococccccocco 179 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit 179 Removing and reinstalling paper feed Tray 3 179 Removing and reinstalling the paper pick roller and pick roller rubbers e cocoa YN 20 ad Sa BAWA hae dace sigh acne 179 Removing and reinstalling the separation roller rubber 180 Replacing the pre registration and feed clutches MCs 181 Replacing the wires 00 00 cee cee eee eee 1
291. pling stopper 16 Finisher overview ENWW For sheets of A4 B5 and 8 5 by 11 1 The first set is stapled and delivered to the main tray in the same manner as sheets of all size except A4 B5 and 8 5 by 11 2 As the front of the first set is being discharged the stacker entrance roller stops and the bypass gate opens The first sheet of the second set and subsequent sets is conveyed to the stacker entrance 3 The bypass gate closes and a second sheet is laid over the first sheet which is fixed by the stacker entrance roller 4 When the front of the first set has been delivered the stacker entrance roller starts to rotate The first and second sheets are conveyed to the stacker 5 The alignment plate U lines up each sheet in the widthwise direction 6 When all sheets are stacked they are stapled with the stapler and the clincher 7 The set of stapled sheets is delivered by the paper exit arm to the main tray 8 Steps 2 through 7 are repeated for each set of sheets Paper exit opening unit Entrance roller Main tray N Alignment plate U NG N p By pass gate Paper exit belt p Intermediate conveyance roller Stacker entrance roller D Intermediate conveyance roller Stapler Clincher Paper exit arm Flat stapling stopper ENWW Paper conveyance path 17 Finisher overview Booklet mode 1 The gates are set to the position to carry paper to the stacker 2 The paper exit opening opens 3 The booklet
292. pper plate left 15 Open the front right door and front left door 16 Remove one screw to remove the front open close stopper 17 Remove two screws to remove the front right door open close hinge lower and front right door ENWW 18 Remove two screws and remove the front left door hinge lower and the front left door Front open close stopper Screws Front left door 19 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse External section 135 MFP disassembly assembly Changing the control panel attachment angle and removing reinstalling CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Open the front left door and front right door 2 Remove two screws to remove the control panel cover middle Control panel cover middle Screws 3 Remove two screws to unlock the control panel Control panel Screw Screw MEL Lj pg If N o Cl Attachment holes when changing the control panel angle 136 MFP disassembly assembly 4 When changing the control panel attachment angle align the control panel stopper with the stopper hole at the front side on the bottom of the control panel and fasten using two screws in the operation cover attachment holes CAUTI
293. pplies 5 VDC and 12 VDC to the status management and control circuit on ICB image control board HD 105 and Q3639A ICB supplies 5 VDC to OB1 operation board 1 b Operation performed when SW2 sub power is on If SW2 sub power is turned on when SW1 main power is already on DCPS supplies 24 DVC for driving various loads Thus all boards are energized and initialization of this machine starts ENWW 1 REM 2 3 ICB to DCPS The DC voltage output from DCPS DC power supply unit is controlled according to the combination of levels of two signals REM 2 REM 3 Output H H 5V1 12V1 L H 5V1 12V1 5V2 12V2 24V1 5V1 L L 5V1 12V1 5V2 12V2 24V1 5V1 24V2 2 AC_OFF IN ICB to DCPS RL1 main relay control signal L RL1 on H RL1 off Other kinds of control 117 MFP unit explanation Cooling fan control FM1 MFP cooling 1 FM2 laser scanner unit cooling FM5 cleaner cooling FM6 paper exit F FM7 paper exit R and FM8 MAINFAN_EM FIXFAN_D FIXFAN2_EM FIXFAN_D FIXFAN1 EM P GND SCANFAN CONT 18 SCANFAN_EM lIO DTXD IO DCLK ADU LATCH IO UCLK REQ1 IO URXD ACK1 ERR OUT1 fan main cooling 2 are controlled by PRCB printer control board directly FM9 scanner cooling is driven by SCDB scanner drive board FM10 ADU reverse motor cooling is driven by ADUDB ADU drive board and is controlled by PRCB FM13 power supply c
294. ps when the PS37 paper exit turns off at detection of the trailing edge of the last sheet of paper b FM3 conveyance suction operation FM3 is turned on off in sync with M2 drum 2 Signals a Input signals 1 MAINEXIT_PS PS37 to PRCB MFP exit section paper passage detection signal L Detected H Not detected 2 SUC_EM FM3 to ADUSDB FM3 conveyance suction fault detection signal L FM3 is normal H FM3 is abnormal b Output signal 1 MAINEXIT_PS ADUDB to FM3 FM3 conveyance suction drive signal L FM3 off H FM3 on Automatic duplex unit ADU 103 MFP unit explanation Paper reverse and exit control 5V P GND MAINM_CONT MAINM_CLK MAINM_F R MAINM_EM 24V 24V A IA B IB 5V2 S GND 5V MAINEXIT_PS S GND IO DTXD IO DCLK ADU LATCH 24V IO USLE PER 24V a baa A IO URXD IA ACK1 B ERR OUT1 IB 2NDM CLK 5V2 DECUR_PS S GND PRCB 5V2 ADU_REV S GND 5V2 REV_PS SOOO S GND E 24V2 r GATE_DR m ADUDB he SD7 104 MFP unit explanation ENWW The reserve exit selection gate in the fuser unit determines whether the paper fed from the fuser unit is to be ejected straight or reversed The reverse exit selection gate is driven by SD7 reverse gate The decurler roller is driven by M4 fuser and the reverse exit roller is driven by M8 reverse exit The ADU reverse roller is driven by M9 ADU re
295. r be turned on forcibly with the ADU stand pulled out Removal and reinstallation of the ADU stand involve carrying a heavy load so it should be performed by two persons WARNING CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull out the ADU stand from the MFP 2 Remove the fuser See Fuser on page 208 3 Remove the transfer separation corona unit See Corona unit on page 159 4 Remove the second paper feed unit 5 Remove the ADU stand 6 Remove the conveyance unit 7 Remove the ADU conveyance roller 1 8 Remove the screw to remove the paper reverse exit roller rotation knob 9 Remove the front E ring and remove the bearing 10 Remove the rear E ring to remove the paper exit reverse gear 1 and pin 11 Remove the E ring and remove the bearing ENWW 12 Remove the paper reverse exit roller by sliding it back and forth E ring Bearing Paper reverse exit Paper exit roller YA reverse gear 1 gt Bearing E ring Paper reverse exit roller rotation knob 13 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ADF unit 207 MFP disassembly assembly Fuser Removing and reinstalling the fuser WARNING Do not touch the fuser immediately after turning off the main power switch because it is very hot and you may suffer burns Wait until the fuser has cooled down sufficiently before working on it C
296. r lamp 2 L4 fuser heater lamp 3 and RL1 main relay are turned off CAUTION Do not change the gap between the roller and TH1 When replacing TH1 check the specified mounting dimensions The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances ENWW Safety information 17 Safety Protection by the hardware circuit The output voltages from TH1 and TH2 fuser temperature sensors are compared with the abnormality judgment reference value in the comparator circuit If the output voltage from TH1 or TH2 exceeds the reference value L2 fuser heater lamp 1 L3 fuser heater lamp 2 L4 fuser heater lamp 3 and RL1 main relay are turned off CAUTION Periodically check the TH2 face contacting the roller and replace TH2 if any abnormality is detected Since TH1 fuser temperature sensor face does not contact the roller check the distance from the roller and the sensor orientation if any abnormality is detected The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances Protection by TS1 thermostat U and TS2 thermostat L When the temperature of the fuser roller upper lower exceeds the specified value TSs are turned off thus interrupting the power to L2 fuser heater lamp 1 L3 fuser heater lamp 2 and L4 fuser heater lamp 3 directly CAUTION Do not use any other electrical conductor in place of TS1 and TS2 Do not change the distance between the roller and TS thermostat 18 Safety ENWW Safety
297. r to the MFP allows the MFP to send data to the finisher 2 STXD finisher CB to MFP Serial data line transmits the operating status of the finisher to the MFP s CB ENWW 3 M701 DRVA A finisher CB to M701 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase A of M701 4 M701 DRV B B finisher CB to M701 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase B of M701 M712 gate drive control M712 DRV B M712 DRV B 5V PS716 IN SGND MAIN BODY M712 gate drive performs the paper conveyance path switching between the sub tray main tray or stacker section The finisher CB finisher control board controls the operation of M712 The related signal is PS716 gate HP 1 Operation M712 gate drive is activated by the finisher operation signal from the MFP selecting one of the three positions depending on the paper exit destinations the sub tray home position main tray or stacker However when the current paper exit destination is the sub tray M712 is not activated it is already in the home position After the operation M712 returns to its home position based on PS716 gate HP ENWW 2 Signals a Finisher CB input signals PS716 IN PS716 to finisher CB Signal relating to the gate home position H HP L Non HP b Finisher CB output signals 1 M712 DRV A A finisher CB to M712 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase A of M712 2 M712 DRV B B finisher CB to M712 Pulse signal to drive
298. ray by a normal or reverse rotation The finisher CB finisher control board controls the operation of M703 The related signals are PS702 tray upper limit PS703 tray lower limit PS707 stapler exit upper limit PS715 counter reset and PS706 main tray paper exit 1 Operation a Non sort sort and group modes ENWW According to the finisher operation signal from the MFP M703 tray up down elevates the main tray until PS702 tray upper limit responds on When PS706 main tray paper exit detects the paper M703 lowers the tray When the signal from PS702 has changed to off and a predefined time period has elapsed M703 raises the tray again M703 stops with PS702 signal on b Staple mode When M707 paper exit roller has started rotating and a predefined time period has elapsed M703 tray up down lowers the main tray The rotation of M703 is reversed to raise the main tray when PS706 main tray paper exit detects the trailing edge of the paper stack on the tray M703 stops when the signal from PS707 stapler paper exit upper limit changes from on to off 2 Signals a Finisher CB input signals 1 PS702 IN PS702 to finisher CB Signal relating to the main tray upper limit position L Non upper limit position H Upper limit position 2 PS703 IN PS703 to finisher CB Signal relating to the main tray lower limit position L Non lower limit position H Lower limit position 3 PS707 IN PS707 to
299. res A and B from inside the drive shaft hole push in the drive pulley and secure with E ring Next install the drive pulley holder AS Mo C black Na 1 Pass wire D through the up down plate Up down plate Wire A Wire B black white N a holder we OD 6 Repeat steps 1 to 4 to install Drive pulley wire A and wire B Y Wire B white 178 MFP disassembly assembly ENWW Paper feed unit of Tray 3 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull out paper feed Tray 3 2 Loosen the securing shaft screw and remove one screw 3 Disconnect the inline connector CN854 and remove the paper feed unit by lifting Relay connector CN854 Securing shaft screw Paper feed unit N 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse Removing and reinstalling paper feed Tray 3 WARNING When removing the tray stand in a proper position so that you do not hurt your back and waist If the tray contains paper remove all paper before removing the tray ENWW CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull out paper feed Tray 3 2 Remove the paper feed unit 3 Remove four screws and remove Tray 3 by lifting Screws 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in
300. reversal section at high speed passing through the reverse gate M301 stops when a specified time has passed after PS304 has detected the trailing edge of the original The original is conveyed to the reversal section until the trailing edge crosses over the reverse gate During this time SD301 turns off and the reverse gate closes 2 Second and subsequent original When PS305 original registration 2 detects the trailing edge of the front side of the first original SD301 reverse gate drive turns on to open the reverse gate The second and ENWW subsequent originals are thus conveyed to the reversal section in the same manner as the first original c Feeding the back side When the reversal operation for the double side copy mode described above has completed high speed backward rotation of M301 original feed MC301 original feed MC is off conveys the original to the read section by the action of the reversal roller and the original exit reversal roller When M301 rotates backward SD302 exit gate drive turns on to lower the original exit gate and the original exit path switches from the original exit tray to the reversal exit When the specified time has passed since PS305 original registration 2 is turned on by detecting the leading edge of the original SD303 pressure roller release SD turns on temporarily according to the original size By SD303 s turning on the pressure on the original exit reversal
301. reverse Removing and reinstalling the paper pick roller and pick roller rubber Procedure 1 Remove the paper feed unit 2 Remove two snap rings and slide the two bearings outward Paper feed unit of Tray3 179 MFP disassembly assembly 3 Release the pick roller axis from the holder slit to detach the paper pick roller unit Roller unit Bearing Snap ring 4 Remove two snap rings from the paper pick roller unit to detach the paper pick roller and pick roller 5 Remove the rubber from each roller Paint mark Feed roller Pick roller Pick roller rubber Snap rings 180 MFP disassembly assembly 6 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION When reinstalling the rollers pay attention to their orientation Check that no grease or the like remains on each roller Removing and reinstalling the separation roller rubber Procedure 1 Remove the paper feed unit 2 Remove the paper pick roller unit 3 Remove the snap ring to detach the separation roller 4 Remove the separation roller rubber from the roller Paint mark Separation roller Separation roller rubber E y IG Snap ring ENWW 5 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION When reinstalling the separation roller pay attention to their orientation Check that no grease or the like remains on the separation roller Replacing the pre reg
302. reverse exit roller rotation knob Paper exit section jam removal mechanism Paper exit roller rotation knob Paper exit conveyance Paper exit motor M7 drive ADU paper feed 6 ADU reverse paper conveyance path selection Nonstack Paper is automatically guided owing to ADU gate operation and the paper guide shape ADU paper conveyance ADU reverse roller ADU conveyance rollers 1 and 2 ADU pre registration mechanism 7 ADU pre registration roller ADU conveyance rollers 3 and 4 Thick paper conveyance 8 Conveyance motor M5 paper exit motor M7 reverse exit motor M8 ADU reverse motor M9 linear velocity selection ADU paper conveyance drive Conveyance motor M5 reverse exit motor M8 ADU reverse motor M9 loop roller motor M6 ADU jam removal mechanism ADU bottom plate assembly opening closing exit guide plate opening closing 4 Second paper feed paper loop mechanism A paper loop is formed before the registration roller to correct mis centering of paper during second paper feed The paper loop is formed by pushing the fed paper against the registration roller for the prescribed time The paper loop mechanism differs between paper feed paths Trays 2 4 HCI paper feed Loop roller Tray 1 Tray 1 feed roller ADU ADU pre registration roller 96 MFP unit explanation ENWW 2 lt Trays 2 4 HCI gt Loop formation point Feed r
303. rews 0 Screws D Rear cover 6 Remove the five relay connectors CN749 CN780 CN781 CN782 CN783 to disconnect the wiring harness from the up down motor mounting assembly 7 Remove the E ring to detach the up down gear 8 Pull the pin from the shaft 9 Remove the E ring to detach the bearing 10 Remove three screws to detach the up down motor assembly 22 HCI disassembly assembly Relay connector Relay Up down CN749 connector motor mounting CN780 assembly Relay connector CN781 IS Relay si connector CN782 Relay g connector WO gt CN783 A Screw Ss Ao Bearing GEES E ring ILA Up d Shaft x Ve a Up down Screw gt OL gear Q E ring Pin 11 Replace the up down wire following the instructions in Removing the up down wires on page 23 and Installing the up down wires on page 24 CAUTION Two sets of four up down wires with different length one set at the front and the other at the back are used Wires with the same length can be used either at the front or back if they are used in the same location 1323 6mm j m __D Wire A 1250 3mm ki Wire B Se VO 769 3mm at ip Wire C E 0 661mm Wire D oO ENWW Removing the up down wires Up down plate 14 Release the metal ball to remove wire A 7 Release the metal ball to remove wire C 9 Release the metal ball to remove wire D
304. roller and MFP exit roller which are driven by M7 paper exit rotating at a high speed After a lapse of the specified time from turning off of PS42 paper reverse at detection of the trailing edge of paper M7 paper exit starts rotating at a low speed to even up the edges of paper in the exit tray When PS37 paper exit is turned off at detection of the trailing edge of paper M7 starts rotating at a high speed again proceeding to eject the next sheet of paper When PS37 detects the trailing edge of the last sheet of paper M7 paper exit stops If finisher is provided M7 is always rotating at a high speed 2 Signals a Input signals 1 FIXEXIT_PS PS30 to PRCB Detection signal of paper passage at fuser unit exit L Detected H Not detected 2 DECUR_PS PS42 to ADUDB Reverse exit gate open close detection signal L Gate is open H Gate is closed 3 ADU_REV PS45 to ADUDB ADU reverse section paper passage detection signal L Detected H Not detected 4 REV_PS PS46 to ADUDB ADU gate open close detection signal L Gate is open H Gate is closed ENWW b Output signals 1 GATE_DR ADUDB to SD7 SD7 reverse gate ON OFF drive signal L SD7 on H SD7 off 2 A JA PRCB to M7 M7 paper exit A phase drive control pulse signal 3 B B PRCB to M7 M7 paper exit B phase drive control pulse signal 4 A A ADUDB to M8 M8 reverse exit A phase drive control pu
305. roller is released This enables the leading edge and the trailing edge of the original to pass each other When a specified time has passed since the back side of the original starts to be scanned SD303 turns off at the same time M301 has been switched to low speed forward rotation MC301 is off The original exit reversal roller rotates in the reverse direction and the original is conveyed to the reversal exit again As soon as scanning of the back side of the original has completed SD302 turns off and after the predefined time M301 is switched to high speed rotation It stops after the specified interval d Feeding the front side of the original The original which is conveyed to the reversal section is conveyed to the read section again in order to scan the front side Since SD302 exit gate drive is off the scanned original is ejected to the original exit tray Original feed conveyance exit section 17 ADF unit explanation 2 Signals a Input signals 1 DF SD1 CONT PRCB to SCDB SD301 ON OFF control signal L SD301 on H SD301 off 2 DF SD2 CONT PRCB to SCDB SD302 ON OFF control signal L SD302 on H SD302 off 3 DF SD3 CONT PRCB to SCDB SD303 ON OFF control signal L SD303 on H SD303 off b Output signal 1 DRIVE SCDB to SD301 SD301 ON OFF drive signal L SD301 on H SD301 off 2 DRIVE SCDB to SD302 SD302 ON OFF drive signal L SD302 on H SD302 off 3 DRIVE SCDB to SD303
306. rotations of M705 This paper alignment action is repeated each time a sheet of paper is fed 42 Finisher unit explanation M705 DRVA M705 DRVA M705 DRV B M705 DRV B 5V PS705 IN GND 5V PS708 IN GND 2 Signals a Finisher CB input signals 1 PS705 IN PS705 to RB to finisher CB Signal relating to the detection of the paper by the stacker entrance sensor L Paper not detected H Paper detected 2 PS708 IN PS708 to RB to finisher CB Signal relating to the detection of the home position of the alignment plate U L Not in the home position H In the home position b Finisher CB output signals 1 M705 DRV A A finisher CB to RB to M705 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase A of M705 2 M705 DRV B B finisher CB to RB to M705 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase B of M705 ENWW M716 alignment L control Q3634A only M718 DRVA M718 DRVA M718 DRV B M718 DRV B MAIN BODY In the folding stitch and fold tri folding modes the widthwise alignment operation of the paper carried into the stacker section is performed by the alignment plate L The space between the two alignment plates L extends or shrinks by means of the rotation of M716 alignment L The finisher CB finisher control board controls the operation of M716 through the RB relay board The related signals are PS705 stacker entrance and PS724 alignment HP L 1 Operation The finisher o
307. rum unit and store the drum unit in a dark place When installing or removing the drum unit do not rotate it in the direction opposite to the specified one Rotating the drum unit in the opposite direction during copy operation could damage the cleaning blade When installing or removing the drum unit take care not to touch the separation claw 1 Open the left and right front doors 2 While pressing the solenoid release lever on top of the ADU rack to the left flip the ADU rack pullout lever to the left 152 MFP disassembly assembly 3 Loosen three screws to remove the drum cover Drum cover Screws gt AN 4 Loosen one screw and slide the blade fusing component in the direction of the arrow until it stops to release the crimp of the cleaning blade ENWW 5 Loosen the screw of the blade fusing component wy ye g Y 6 Remove the two screws securing the drum unit 7 Release the toner supply pipe in the direction of the arrow 8 Remove the screw securing the coupling to detach the drum shaft coupling and drum coupling ENWW 9 Hold the two sections shown in the figure and pull out the drum unit Screws Toner supply pipe Drum unit be QU A Drum shaft coupling 10 Reinstall the above parts followi
308. s back and forth ENWW Corona unit Screws that must not be removed Five screws securing the transfer entrance guide plate Screws that must not be removed qc u ts F 4 TIA 7 X E Transfer entrance guide plate Do not strain the transfer entrance guide plate and guide rollers for example pressing down on them strongly CAUTION Take care not to damage the edge of the transfer entrance guide plate since it is deformed easily ENWW Removing and reinstalling the charging corona unit CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet When removing the charging corona unit do not touch the mesh of the charging corona unit control plate Procedure 1 Remove the drum unit from the MFP See Drum unit on page 152 2 Disconnect the two connectors CN364 365 Remove the charging corona unit by holding it at the positions shown below with both hands Charging corona unit Connector CN364 Connector CN365 3 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse Corona unit 159 MFP disassembly assembly Removing and reinstalling the charge control plate CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Remove the charging corona unit 2 Remove the two springs and remove the charge control plate t Charge control plate 3 Reinstall the above parts foll
309. s disconnected from the power outlet With the power held on press the HCI tray down switch SW100 to move the up down plate down to the bottom in advance 1 Remove the pick roller unit 2 Remove two screws to detach the separation roller unit cover Separation roller Separation roller unit cover Screws 3 Remove two screws to detach the separation roller unit CAUTION ENWW When reinstalling the separation roller unit tighten the screws on the rear side first Separation roller unit Screws 4 Remove two snap rings fit the shaft into the D cut in the fitting and remove the separation roller together with the shaft Snap ring Paper feed section 19 HCI disassembly assembly 5 Remove the separation roller rubber from the separation roller Paint mark Separation roller Shaft Separation roller rubber 6 Reinstall the separation roller in the reverse order of the removal procedure CAUTION Make sure the separation roller rubber is oriented properly when reinstalling it Check whether scratches are visible on the pet cover for the drive gear Check whether grease is present on separation roller 20 HCI disassembly assembly Replacing the HCI feed MC MC101 HCI first paper feed MC MC102 Procedure 1 Open the top cover 2 Remove the spring from the pick roller unit 3 Remove two screws to detach the top cover CAUTION Ifthe top cover is removed
310. s PS36 loop 1 Operation a When printing of the first copy starts M6 loop is turned on at the timing that is determined by the P counter that starts when printing starts thus starting feed of paper M6 is stopped temporarily after lapse of a specified time from turning on of PS44 registration by the leading edge of 90 MFP unit explanation paper a loop is formed by registration rollers and the paper is fed to the transfer unit b When printing of the second or subsequent copy After lapse of the specified time from turning off of PS44 registration by the trailing edge of the preceding paper 2 Signals a PRCB input signals 1 LOOP_PS PS36 to PRCB Paper passage detection signal L Paper does not exist H Paper exist 2 2ND_PS PS44 to PRCB Second paper feed reference timing detection signal L Paper exists H Paper does not exist b PRCB output signals 1 A and A PRCB to M6 A phase drive control pulse signal for M6 2 B and B PRCB to M6 B phase drive control pulse signal for M6 Paper up down control Paper in Tray 1 is pushed up down by M20 up down motor BP M20 is controlled by PRCB printer control board Related signals are PS34 tray upper limit BP and PS35 tray lower limit BP ENWW 1 Operation b PRCB output signal a Paper up down control 1 BPUDM_A B PRCB to M20 M20 up down motor BP is turned on to M20 drive control signal push up paper When PS34 tray
311. s equipped with HTR101 HCI internal heater to protect the paper from humidity HTR101 is directly controlled by the MFP PRCB printer control board rather than by the HCIDB HCI drive board 2 Signals a Input signals 1 UPOP_PS PS100 to HCIDB Top cover open close detection signal L Cover opened H Cover closed ENWW 2 CONV_PS PS106 to HCIDB Conveyance roller exit paper detection signal L Paper detected H Paper not detected 3 PR_PS PS107 to HCIDB Conveyance roller entrance pre registration position paper detection signal L Paper detected H Paper not detected 4 SIDOP_PS PS110 to HCIDB Jam access door open close detection signal L Door opened H Door closed 5 HCIM_EM M101 to HCIDB M101 rotation error detection signal L M101 rotating H M101 not rotating 6 IO_DTXD MFP to HCIDB Serial data to transmit MFP PRCB printer control board operating status to HCIDB 7 HCI LATCH MFP to HCIDB lO DTXD signal latch signal 8 IO_DCLK MFP to HCIDB lO DTXD signal clock signal 9 ERR_OUT4 MFP to HCIDB Signal to notify HCIDB HCI drive board when there is error in the MFP 10ACK4 MFP to HCIDB Serial data transmission enable signal from HCI to MFP PRCB printer control board ENWW b Output signals 1 8 CONT HCIDB to MC 101 MC101 HCI feed MC ON OFF drive signal IL MC101 on H MC101 off CONT HCIDB to MC102 MC102 HCI first paper feed MC
312. s following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Removing and reinstalling the ADU stand WARNING The interlock which is turned off when the front right or left door opens or closes should never be turned on forcibly with the ADU stand pulled out Removal and reinstallation of the ADU stand involve carrying a heavy load so it should be performed by two persons CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the 6 Remove one screw to remove the wall outlet connector cover 7 Remove the screw to loosen the stay Procedure 1 Pull out the ADU stand from the MFP 2 Remove the fuser See Fuser on page 208 3 Remove the transfer separation corona unit See Corona unit on page 159 4 Remove the second paper feed unit 5 Remove the front right door and the front left door See External section on page 132 ENWW ADF unit 199 MFP disassembly assembly 8 Disconnect the three inline connectors CN445 446 447 CAUTION Disconnect each connector on the ADU stand Screw Connector H eS cover Stay Relay connector connector CN445 CN447 9 Remove one screw to release the lock of the handle right 10 Remove the two screws securing the guide rails on the paper feed side and paper exit side CAUTION Do not mistake the screws securing the guide rails for screws black that must not be removed Black screws must not be removed 200 MFP disa
313. s on to restart conveying the paper The above operation is not performed when conveying a large paper 220 mm and longer in direction of conveyance and in the non punching mode When punching the paper conveyed from PI the loop is formed on the PI s side For details refer to Q3636A SHB Belt Guide shafts L Punch shift motor M802 FRONT O Ru Main body Entrance roller Paper edge sensor Punch unit 5mm or O gt Punch edge Homm N Sal ad o o o o LAA el ENWW Punching process 7 Punch kit overview Correction of the punch position The punch unit positioned inside of the side edge of paper by 5mm or 10 mm performs the following procedures to correct the punch position so that the punch is always centered on the paper The punch position is corrected by moving the punch unit to and fro during conveyance of the paper When finisher entrance PS PS704 detects the leading edge of the paper the punch unit is moved backward temporarily until the paper edge sensor detects the side edge of the paper If punching is performed for the paper conveyed from PI the time when PI passage PS U PS201 or PI passage PS L PS206 detects the leading edge of the paper becomes the starting point Subsequently the punch unit moves back frontward until the paper edge sensor re detects the side edge of the paper Detection of side edge reference positi
314. s the original feed path during double side original copy mode is driven by SD301 reverse gate drive SD303 pressure roller release releases the pressure on the original exit reversal roller Ejection of the original and conveyance to the reversal exit are performed by M302 original conveyance which rotates the conveyance roller and original exit roller M301 original feed drives the reversal roller ENWW and original exit reversal roller to convey the original to the reversal section Each of these features is controlled by PRCB printer control board and driven by SCDB scanner drive board 1 Operation a Original ejection operation During the single side copy mode and when copying the front side in the double side copy mode the original exit gate lifts upward because SD302 exit gate drive SD is turned off Therefore scanned original is ejected to the original exit tray by the action of the original exit roller PS303 original exit PS detects the original ejection b Reversal operation for double side original copy 1 The first sheet of original When PS304 original registration 1 turns on and pre feed of the original has completed SD301 reverse gate drive receives a signal from the MFP and turns on to open the reverse gate M301 original feed rotates forward MC301 original feed MC is on and the registration roller reversal roller and original exit reversal roller convey the original to the
315. set by PRCB printer control board b Separation claw swing control Separation claws are swung by M2 drum via the cam mechanism ENWW 2 Signals a Output signal 1 SPSD DRV PRCB to DCDB SD1 separation claw drive control signal L SD1 on H SD1 off Paper guide plate control GP CONT MS1 MS2 OO To prevent toner from adhering to the paper guide plate a constant voltage is applied to the paper guide plate This voltage is supplied from HV high voltage unit and is controlled by PRCB printer control board 1 Operation a ON OFF timing Turning ON OFF in sync with M2 drum b Applied voltage 500 VDC 2 Signal a Output signal 1 GP CONT PRCB to HV This signal controls turning ON OFF the voltage application to the paper guide plate L Voltage applied H Voltage not applied Drum unit 57 MFP unit explanation Corona unit section Composition lt Charging corona unit gt Charging control plate Charging corona wire PCL Charging wire cleaning motor M14 Mechanisms Plunging prevention plate rear Mechanism _ Method Charging Scorotron DC negative corona discharge Discharging wire Tungsten 0 06 mm diameter gold plated skin path with automatic wire cleaner Grid control Gold plated stainless plate Transfer DC positive corona discharge Discharging wire Oxide film tungsten 0 06 mm diameter with automatic wire cleaner
316. side original copy mode M301 original feed rotates backward at high speed MC301 original feed MC is on the prefeeding of the next original starts During the double side original copy mode M301 rotates backward at high speed after a specified time when the scanning of the back side of the first sheet of original has completed and the prefeeding of the next original starts M301 stops after a specified time after the original has turned PS304 on b Original conveyance operation When the control signal is received from the MFP after the pre feeding operation of the original has completed M301 original feed rotates forward at high speed MC301 original feed MC is on The registration roller rotates and the original is conveyed at high speed ENWW The forward rotation of M301 releases the pressure on the original pressing plate During the single side original copy the conveyance switches to low speed when the specified time has passed after PS305 original registration 2 has turned on During the double side original copy the reverse gate opens and the original passes through the reverse gate to be conveyed to the reversal section at high speed For details on reverse and conveyance control refer to Original reverse and conveyance control c Scan operation 1 Single side original copy mode The low speed rotation of M302 original conveyance motor starts in the same timing as the conveyance procedure
317. so be taken not to install small parts in wrong places Do not operate the MFP before installing all the disassembled parts completely Removal of some screws is prohibited in this section Never loosen them External section Removing reinstalling the external covers CAUTION Make sure that the power cord of the MFP is unplugged from the power outlet Procedure 1 Remove cap on the top cover 2 Remove four screws to detach the top cover Screws Top cover 3 Remove one screw to detach the connector cover 18 Post insertion disassembly assembly 4 Remove three screws to detach the lower cover Screws Lower cover 5 Remove two screws disconnect the inline connector CN232 and detach the control panel cover Relay connector CN232 Screw Control panel cover 6 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Paper feed unit Replacing the paper pick roller and pick roller CAUTION Make sure that the power cord of the MFP is unplugged from the power outlet Procedure 1 When replacing the paper pick roller and pick roller for the upper tray detach the top cover 2 Remove the two snap rings then shift the left and right bearings outside and remove the pick roller unit Snap Bearing Snap rin ring Q 69 Pick roller unit 3 Remove actuator three snap rings three bearings of the pick roller unit then slide the roller shaft in the direction o
318. sor To detect the side edge of the paper the paper edge sensor mounted on the punch unit is used The paper edge sensor consists of 5 sensors shown in the below figure Which sensor is used depends on the paper sizes Paper edge sensor Direction of paper conveyance 00000 ENWW 2 Signals a Input signals 1 PS801 IN PS801 to PKDB Punch drive HP detection signal 3 PKSET PKSET2 PKDB to finisher CB Connection signal of PK L Connected H Not connected 4 OUT 1 to 10 PKDB to finisher CB Status informing signal from PK to finisher CB L Other than HP H HP 2 PS803 IN PS803 to PKDB Punch unit HP detection signal L Other than HP H HP 3 IN1 to 5 PAPER EDGE SENSOR to PKDB IN1 to 5 paper edge sensors L Without paper H With paper 4 M801 CONT finisher CB to PKDB on off control signal for M801 punch L M801 ON H M801 OF Foffoff 5 M801 F R finisher CB to PKDB Signal for switching the direction of rotation for M801 punch L Forward direction H Reverse direction 6 SIG_1 to 10 finisher CB to PKDB PK control signal from finisher CB b Output signals 1 M801 DRV 1 2 PKDB to M801 Drive signal for M801 punch 2 M802 DRVA A B B PKDB to M802 Drive signal for M802 punch shift A phase B phase ENWW Punch section 15 Punch kit unit explanation Punch waste box section Composition Punch unit Punch scraps full PS PS802
319. ssembly assembly 11 To remove the ADU stand one person holds the handle right on the paper feed side and the other holds the the handle left on the fuser Then they lift up the ADU stand Screws Handle left Handle right Automatic document Uj feeder stand Guide rail PP Handle right EF Both the left and right black screws must not be removed 12 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Removing and reinstalling the 6 Slide the ADU pre registration roller back pre registration roller and forth to remove E ring 8 WARNING The interlock which is aag xy E ring 6 turned off when the front Registration L or right or left door opens or spring closes should never be turned on forcibly with the ADU stand pulled out WARNING Removal and reinstallation of the ADU stand involve carrying a heavy load so it Bearing should be performed by two persons Cleaner coupling CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Remove the front and rear registration springs CAUTION When reinstalling pay attention to the location of the registration spring hook 2 Remove the E ring 66 3 Press the cleaner coupling and pull out the pin 7 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse 4 Remove the spring 5 Remove the front and rear E rings 8 and remove each bearing ENWW ADF uni
320. stalling the front door CAUTION Procedure Make sure that the power cord of the MFP is unplugged from the power outlet 1 Open the front door 2 Remove the two mounting screws holding the hinge plate at the bottom and remove the front door Front door IF se I Screws CS KIN Dp y Hinge plate o ON 3 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse 64 Finisher disassembly assembly Removing and reinstalling the rear Cover CAUTION Procedure Make sure that the power cord of the MFP is unplugged from the power outlet 1 Remove the six mounting screws and detach the rear cover Rear cover 2 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Removing and reinstalling the main tray CAUTION After you have lowered the main tray be sure to unplug the power cord of the MFP from the power outlet Procedure 1 Push up the actuator of the main tray exit with your finger to lower the main tray Actuator we DE Paper exit roller Paper exit roller Main tray 2 Turn the MFP s main power switch SW1 off and unplug the power cord from the power outlet 3 Remove the two mounting screws ENWW 4 Lift the main tray and detach it from the hooks of the up down stay Main tray f Up down stay 5 Reinstall the above parts following the re
321. stapling stopper when the booklet stopper comes down The finisher CB finisher control board controls the operation of M718 through the RB relay board The signals or sensors related to this component include PS723 folding stopper HP PS725 folding paper exit and PS729 folding full PS 1 Operation a Folding mode The finisher operation signal from the MFP lets M718 folding stopper drive to lower the booklet stopper The booklet stopper comes down to the appropriate alignment position that fits the size of the paper to be handled When the last sheet has been aligned M718 rotates to lower it to the folding position When the folding has been completed and the trailing edge of the set has been detected by PS725 folding paper exit M718 is activated The booklet stopper 44 Finisher unit explanation PS723 IN PS725 IN M718 DRVA M718 DRVA M718 DRV B M718 DRV B PS723 IN GND PS725 IN is raised to the paper size specific position The machine waits for the sheet of the next set b Stitch and fold mode The finisher operation signal from the MFP lets M718 folding stopper drive to lower the booklet stopper The booklet stopper comes down to the appropriate stitch and fold position that fits the size of the paper When the stapling has been completed M718 rotates to lower the paper to the folding position When the folding has been completed and the trailing edge of the set has been de
322. sult WARNING Ground lead Check whether the MFP is grounded properly If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded MFP you may suffer electric shock while operating the MFP Connect the ground lead to one of the following points a Ground terminal of wall outlet b Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done Pay attention to the point where the ground lead is connected Connecting the ground lead to an improper point as listed below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock a Gas pipe A risk of explosion or fire exists b Lightning rod A risk of electric shock or fire exists c Telephone line ground A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the case of lightning d Water pipe or faucet It may include a plastic portion ENWW Safety warnings 9 Safety Installation requirements A WARNING Prohibited installation place e Do not place the MFP near flammable materials such as curtains or volatile materials that may catch fire A risk of fire exists Do not place the MFP in a place exposed to water such as rain water A risk of fire and electric shock exists WARNING Non operational handling When the MFP is not used over an extended period of time holidays and so forth turn it off and unplug the power cord Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire CAUTION Temperature and humidi
323. t 201 MFP disassembly assembly Removing and reinstalling the ADU conveyance roller 3 and 4 WARNING The interlock which is turned off when the front right or left door opens or closes should never be turned on forcibly with the ADU stand pulled out Removal and reinstallation of the ADU stand involve carrying a heavy load so it should be performed by two persons CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull out the ADU stand from the MFP 2 Remove the fuser See Fuser on page 208 3 Remove the transfer separation corona unit See Corona unit on page 159 4 Remove the second paper feed unit 5 Remove the ADU stand 202 MFP disassembly assembly 6 Remove two screws to detach the conveyance duct rear assembly Conveyance duct rear assembly Screws 7 Remove two screws to release the high voltage supply unit 1 8 Disconnect the two connectors CN460 461 CAUTION Each inline connector consists of two male sides and one female side Be sure to remove only the male side shown below of the connector ENWW 9 Remove two screws to remove the conveyance unit Relay connector High voltage Screws CN460 supply unit 1 connector CN461 Conveyance 10 Disconnect the three connectors CN421 426 427 CAUTION Each inline connector consists of two male sides and one female side Be sure to remove only th
324. t aoe as f an inclination of 70 degrees The Paper exit belt 2 Timing belt driven by g coupling connection corrugation roller is employed for the Booklet stopper 3 Driven by timing belt using stacker entrance roller which facilitates stepping motor the flat a smooth paper delivery to the stacker stapling stopper is Th ink der it ight released by the e paper sinks un er its own weigt interlocking mechanism into the stacker of which lower end is Paper alignment U 4 Stepping motor supported by the swing belt Paper alignment L 5 Stepping motor ENWW Stacker section 39 Finisher unit explanation Stacker entrance motor M713 Susa entrance PS gt PS705 Swing belt Stacker no paper PS ree 70 degrees A 2 Paper exit belt The paper exit arm delivers the paper to the main tray in the staple mode or to the folding section in the tri folding mode The paper exit arm is driven by the paper exit belt which is in turn driven by the paper exit roller motor M707 through the coupling connection The paper exit belt hp PS PS709 detects the home position of the paper pl exit arm 3 40 Finisher unit explanation Paper exit roller motor M707 Coupling pin Paper exit belt HP PS PS709 Paper exit arm Paper exit belt O y Booklet stopper Q3634A only The folding stopper motor M718 operates the booklet stopper The folding stopper hp PS PS723 detects the home p
325. t plate L oscillate to align the sheets The oscillation of the paper alignment plate L is achieved by the normal and reverse rotations of the alignment motor L M716 The alignment hp PS L PS724 detects the home position of the paper alignment plate L Stacker section 41 Finisher unit explanation M705 alignment U control 24V SA AS M705 DRV A M705 DRV A M705 DRV B M705 DRV B PS705 IN PS708 IN MAIN BODY In the staple folding stitch and fold tri folding modes the widthwise alignment operation of the paper carried into the stacker section is performed by the alignment plate U The space between the two alignment plates U extends or shrinks by means of the rotation of the M705 alignment U The finisher CB finisher control board controls the operation of M705 through the RB relay board The related signals are PS705 stacker entrance and PS708 alignment HP U 1 Operation The finisher operation signal from the MFP lets M705 alignment U rotate so that the space between the two alignment plates U will become narrower The rotation of M705 stops when the plates reach their waiting positions that provide a little wider space for the paper to be accommodated When PS705 stacker entrance has detected the trailing edge of the paper and a predefined time period has elapsed the alignment plates U horizontally oscillate to align the paper The oscillation is provided by the normal and reverse
326. tected by PS725 folding paper exit M718 is activated The booklet stopper is raised to the paper size specific position The machine waits for the sheet of the next set c Tri folding mode The finisher operation signal from the MFP lets M718 folding stopper drive to lower the booklet stopper The booklet ENWW stopper comes down to the appropriate alignment position that fits the size of the paper When the last sheet has been aligned M718 operates to lower it to the first folding position for tri folding When the folding has been completed and the trailing edge of the set has been detected by PS729 folding full PS M718 is activated The booklet stopper is raised to the paper size specific position The machine waits for the sheet of the next set 2 Signals a Finisher CB input signals 1 PS723 IN PS723 to RB to finisher CB Signal relating to the detection of the booklet stopper s home position L Not in the home position H In the home position 2 PS725 IN PS725 to RB to finisher CB Signal relating to the detection of the paper at the folding paper exit position L paper not detected H paper detected b Finisher CB output signals 1 M718 CLK finisher CB to RB Signal relating to the clock for controlling the rotation speed of the M718 2 M718 Reset finisher CB to RB Reset signal for the M718 3 M718 F R finisher CB to RB Signal to control the rotation direction of the M718
327. ter called the CE from the risk of injury However in daily use any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure In order to maintain safety and reliability the CE must perform regular safety checks 6 Safety ENWW Power supply IN WARNING Wall outlet Check that main voltage is as specified Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption If excessive current flows in the wall outlet fire may result If two or more power cords are plugged into the wall outlet the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet If excessive current flows in the wall outlet fire may result GD JN WARNING Power plug and cord Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely Contact problems may lead to increased resistance overheating and the risk of fire Check whether the power cord is damaged Check whether the sheath is damaged If the power plug cord or sheath is damaged replace with a new power cord with plugs on both ends specified by HP Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or electric shock When using the power cord inlet type that came with this MFP be sure to observe the following precautions a Make sure the MFP side power plug is securely inserted in the socket on the rear panel of the MFP Secure the cord with a fixture properly b If the power
328. the stapler clincher at angles of 0 degrees or 45 degrees ENWW Stapler section 49 Finisher unit explanation ENWW 50 Finisher unit explanation Stapler movement control M704 DRVA M704 DRVA M704 DRV B M704 DRV B PS714 IN M706 DRV A M706 DRV A M706 DRV B M706 DRV B PS713 IN M711 DRV A M711 DRV M711 DRV B M711 DRV B PS711 IN MAIN BODY The stapler F and the stapler R move horizontally in opposite directions each other In addition the stapler R rotates up to 45 degrees according to the current staple mode The horizontal movement of the staplers is performed by M711 stapler movement whereas the rotation is performed by M704 clincher rotation and M706 staple rotation The finisher CB finisher control board controls the operations of M711 M704 and M706 through the RB relay board ENWW M704 DRV A M704 DRV A M704 DRV B M704 DRV B 5V PS714 IN GND M706 DRVA M706 DRVA M706 DRV B M706 DRV B 5V PS713 IN GND M711 DRV A M711 DRVA M711 DRV B M711 DRV B 5V PS711 IN GND RB The related signals are PS711 stapler movement HP PS713 stapler rotation HP and PS714 clincher rotation HP 1 Operation a Single staple front The finisher operation signal from the MFP activates M711 stapler movement to carry the staplers to extend the distance between the staplers and the clinchers and then
329. the CCD unit Screws Marking CCD unit Marking CAUTION Mark the place where the CCD unitis installed before removing it 5 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse 142 MFP disassembly assembly Replacing the exposure lamp CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Do not touch the exposure lamp with bare hands Be sure to check the image after installing the exposure lamp Procedure 1 Remove the original stopper plates left and rear scanner glass and top cover right middle front and middle rear See External section on page 132 2 Move the exposure unit to the notch in the MFP frame on the paper exit side ENWW 3 Remove the connector and two screws then remove the exposure lamp Exposure lamp Connector a Screw N Exposu tm I 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW CAUTION CAUTION Removing and reinstalling the exposure unit Besurethepowercordhas been unplugged from the wall outlet When installing the exposure unit use the optics unit positioning tool Be sure to perform image adjustment after installing the exposure unit Procedure 1 Remove the right side cover top left side cover original stopper plates left and rear scanner glass and top cover right left front center and rear center See Extern
330. the separation corona unit L Normal H Abnormal b PRCB output signals 1 T CONT PRCB to HV This signal turns on off the voltage applied to the transfer wire L Transfer voltage on H Transfer voltage off 2 S CONT PRCB to HV This signal turns on off the voltage applied to the separation wire L Separation voltage on H Separation voltage off M14 charger cleaning control M14 charger cleaning is a DC motor powered by 24 VDC and is controlled by PRCB printer control board 1 Operation a Purpose of driving M14 charger cleaning is used to drive the charging wire cleaning unit 60 MFP unit explanation b Operation timing The charging wires are cleaned when SW2 sub power is turned on and when the fuser temperature is lower than 50 C They are also cleaned after the specified copy count is reached Changeable with the 25 mode DIP SW c Cleaning operation Normally the charging wire cleaning unit is on the front side of the machine It moves back and forth to clean the charging wires The movement direction is changed by changing the rotational direction of M14 charge cleaning The rotational direction of M14 and the position of the cleaner are detected by monitoring the current value of M14 with PRCB printer control board 2 Signals a Output signal 1 CHGM A B PRCB to M14 M14 charger cleaning drive control signal The drive direction of M14 is contr
331. tion The folding full LED LES729 and the folding full PS PS729 which consist of a pair of translucent sensors detect the booklet tray full condition If a predefined time period has elapsed since the paper shielded the sensor light a booklet full condition is reported Folding Tri folding section Q3634A only 57 Finisher unit explanation M719 folding knife control 24V M719 DRV 1 M719 DRV 2 PS722 IN PS725 IN PS726 IN MAIN BODY M719 folding knife drives the folding knife This knife is used when the mode is folding stitch and fold or tri folding The finisher CB finisher control board controls the operation of M719 The related signals are PS722 folding knife HP PS725 folding paper exit and PS726 folding passage 1 Operation PS726 folding passage detects the paper and the booklet stopper stops at the folding position After a predefined time period has elapsed since then M719 folding knife is activated letting the folding knife protrude toward the paper The operation of PS726 ends when the folding knife returns and the signal from PS722 folding knife HP changes from H to L a Finisher CB input signals 1 PS722 IN PS722 to RB to finisher CB 58 Finisher unit explanation 24V M719 DRV 5V PS722 IN GND 5V PS725 IN GND 5V PS726 IN GND Signal indicating whether the folding knife is in the home position L In the home position H
332. tion speed H Operating at a speed other thana specified rotation speed b Finisher CB output signals 1 M707 P S finisher CB to M707 Signal relating to rotation stop of M707 L M707 on H M707 off 2 M707 CLK finisher CB to M707 Signal relating to the clock for controlling the rotation speed of M707 ENWW 3 M707 F R finisher CB to M707 Signal to control the rotation direction of M707 L CCW H CW SD704 paper exit opening solenoid control 24V SD704 DRV SD704 5V P8704 IN PS704 GND 5V PS706 IN PS706 GND SD704 paper exit opening drives the nip moving section This solenoid allows the nip paper exit roller to firmly contact the main tray paper exit roller for nipping the paper The finisher CB finisher control board controls the operation of SD704 The related signals are PS704 finisher entrance and PS706 main tray paper exit 1 Operation a SD704 on 1 Straight sort and group modes When PS704 finisher entrance has detected the rear end of the paper and a predefined time period has elapsed SD704 is activated on 2 Staple mode When the stapling operation has been completed and a predefined time period has elapsed SD704 is activated on for nipping the paper ENWW b SD704 OFF In each mode when PS706 main tray paper exit has detected the paper and a predefined time period has elapsed SD704 is deactivated off 2 Signals a Finisher CB outp
333. tion board 1 When this signal is at the high level H OB1 stops sending the S IN2 signal 3 DTR2 ICB to OB1 Acknowledgment signal which is returned each time ICB image control board receives one byte data from OB1 operation board 1 ENWW Other kinds of control 123 MFP unit explanation Counter control MC24V_3 TC_DRV KEYC_DRV S GND KEYC SET MC24V_3 5V MAINEXIT_PS S GND This machine has the following counters C T Total counter C K Key counter These counters are controlled by the PRCB printer control board The related signal is PS37 paper exit 1 Operation This machine counts copies using a software counter a Paper exit counter 124 MFP unit explanation C K OB1 The count increases by 1 each time PS37 paper exit which has been on is turned off two counts in the dual sided document copy mode lt Operation of each counter gt 1 Copy quantity display counter on OB Displays the count of ejected papers 2 C K This counter counts in sync with the paper exit counter 3 C T This counter counts in sync with the paper exit counter ENWW 2 Signals a PRCB input signals 1 KSYC SET C K to PRCB Signal indicating the state of 24 V power supply to C K L 24V power is not supplied b Output signals 1 TC DRV PRCB to C T C T drive control signal L C T on 2 KEYC DRV PRCB to C K C K drive control signal L C
334. to sensor PS108 actuator Remaining paper detection 2 Remaining paper detection gear photo sensor PS102 PS103 PS104 PS105 Roller conveyance Paper conveyance 4 Paper lifting a Up down plate lifting drive operation The up down plate is lifted with the up down wires When the top cover closes HCI up down motor M100 rotates and the up down plate connected to the up down wires rises 8 HCI unit explanation the other side wire as well In the following diagram LT refers to the high capacity input HCI LT first paper feed SD SD100 Paper dust removing brush LT feed PS PS106 Conveyance LT first paper feed PS PS107 Up down plate LT tray down drive switch SW 100 a Up down plate down drive operation The up down plate automatically lowers by 120 mm when the top cover is opened Subsequently it is lowered by 120 mm each time HCI tray down drive switch SW100 is pressed 2 Remaining paper detection The HCI is equipped with a remaining paper detection gear which rotates together with HCI up down motor M100 driving the up down plate The remaining paper detection gear has an actuator to turn on off HCI remaining paper detection PS1 PS102 HCI remaining paper detection PS2 ENWW PS103 HCI remaining paper detection PS3 PS104 and HCI remaining paper detection PS4 PS105 Each sensor is turned on off according to the rotating positio
335. tor CN422 Clutch cover 7 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse ENWW Removing and reinstalling the second paper feed unit registration assembly WARNING The interlock which is turned off when the front right or left door opens or closes should never be turned on forcibly with the ADU stand pulled out CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull out the ADU stand from the MFP 2 Detach the ADU cover 3 Disconnect the two inline connectors CN420 422 and disconnect the inline connector from the wiring harness Each inline connector consists of two male sides and one female side Be sure to remove only the male side shown below of the connector CAUTION ADF unit 191 MFP disassembly assembly Registration MC MC1 Relay connector CN420 Relay connector CN422 4 Remove five screws to remove the second paper feed unit Second paper feed unit 5 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse 192 MFP disassembly assembly Cleaning the registration PS PS44 WARNING The interlock which is turned off when the front right or left door opens or closes should never be turned on forcibly with the ADU stand pulled out CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull out
336. tray goes up it turns on and consequently M18 goes off causing the tray to stop going up When PS14 turns off after paper is fed M18 goes on again to move the paper up down plate upward The up down plate in the tray is lowered mechanically by its own weight 86 MFP unit explanation b Paper up drive timing 1 ON timing M18 tray up drive 3 is turned on when loading of a tray is detected by shorting wires at both ends of the drawer connector 2 OFF timing M18 tray up drive 3 is turned off when PS14 tray upper limit 3 is turned on c Remaining paper detection control The level of paper remaining in the tray is detected according to the time that M18 tray up drive 3 requires to lift up the up down plate when the tray is set This lift up time operation time of M18 is saved in the PRCB printer control board After this the remaining paper is detected using the paper feed counter The detected remaining paper level is displayed on the control panel in five steps PS16 remaining paper 3 is used to detect the remaining paper level when it lowers below about 10 percent ENWW 2 Signals a PRCB input signals 1 TIUP_PS PS14 to PRCB Paper upper limit detection signal L Not detected H Detected 2 TIRM_PS PS16 to PRCB Remaining paper detection signal L Not detected H Detected b PRCB output signals 1 T3RISEM_24 PRCB to M18 M18 ON OFF control signal Paper size detection control
337. triction shaft i heater lamp 3 Fuser claw lower Exit roller 3 Fuser roller lower Reverse exit selection gate Decurler roller Mechanisms Mechanism Method Fuser Pressure heat roller Heat source 1 Heater lamp Upper rollers two lower roller one Cleaning 2 Upper roller cleaning web containing silicon oil Upper roller Aluminum Teflon coating Lower roller Silicon rubber PFA tube Separation Separation claws six upper and three lower claws Temperature detection Upper roller noncontact type thermistor for control TH1 contact type thermistor for fault detection TH2 Overheat protection Upper roller noncontact type thermostat for fault detection TS1 Lower roller noncontact type thermostat for fault detection TS2 Neutralizing Neutralizing brush Pressure release Pressure release shaft and spring Exit path selection Reverse exit selection gate Decurler 3 Decurler roller restriction shaft Jam detection 4 Jam detection plate actuator photo sensor ENWW Fuser unit 111 MFP unit explanation 1 Fuser heater lamps Two halogen lamps are used for the fuser upper roller and one halogen lamp is used for the fuser lower roller to reduce the warm up time and ensure reliable fuser 2 Cleaning Cleaning web is used to clean the fuser upper roller The web SD SD2 in the MFP turns on off to dr
338. trol signal L L4 on H L4 off ENWW Fuser unit 115 MFP unit explanation Other kinds of control Parts energized when SW1 main power is off Sw1 ve NN o TRANSFORMER i OPTION I Ij I 1 Operation d Internal heaters If the power cord is plugged in the wall HTR1 heater 1 HTR2 heater 2 and outlet the following parts are energized HTR3 drum heater spare parts are regardless of whether SW1 main power energized irrespective of whether SW1 is on or off main power is on or off a CBR1 2 circuit breaker 1 2 If an excessive current flows due to a short in an internal part or other factors this breaker turns off to cut off the power to the machine b NF noise filter The noise filter is used to reduce the noise arriving through the power line c DCPS DC power supply unit RL2 heater relay is turned on to turn on HTR1 heater 1 HTR2 heater 2 and HTR3 drum heater spare parts 116 MFP unit explanation ENWW Parts that operate when SW1 main power SW2 secondary power is on REM 2 REM 3 AC OFF IN 5VDC 12VDC 12VDC 5VDC 12VDC jog re 5VDC 5VDC 12VDC Print Controller Copy Controller Hard Drive 1 Operation 2 Signals a Operation performed when SW1 main a Output signals power is on When SW1 main power is turned on AC power is supplied to DCPS DC power supply unit As a result DCPS su
339. ttached to opposite direction External section 25 ADF disassembly assembly Original feed conveyance exit section Replacing the pick roller and conveyance roller rubber CAUTION Make sure the power cord of the main unit has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Open the jam access cover 2 Remove three snap rings shift each of the two bearings outward and detach them 3 Remove the pick roller assembly to detach the pick roller 4 Remove the pick roller rubber from the pick roller ge Snap ring C sA Snap ring Bearing a A Pick roller Pick roller rubber Pick roller Jam access _ cover gt 5 Remove four snap rings and shift the gear with a pin and bearing outward 6 Shift the feed roller assembly to the left until it stops and lift it up to remove it 7 Remove the gear with a pin and remove the feed roller 8 Remove the feed roller rubber from the feed roller 26 ADF disassembly assembly Jam access cover Sen Sensor arm Feed roller D cut unit Snap ring Sa Snap N Gear with a pin Iyot Feed roller shaft Feed roller rubber Paint mark 9 Reinstall the above parts following the removal procedure in reverse Make sure that the feed roller is installed in the correct direction CAUTION Install the D cut shaft of the feed roller assembly while inserting it in the receiver side Make sure not to damage the sensor arm during installation
340. ttle motor M13 Agitator plate Toner supply screws Toner supply motor M12 2 Toner bottle When the toner bottle rotates toner is fed to the outlet of the bottle through the spiral groove on the surface of the toner bottle When the outlet of the bottle ENWW faces downward toner flows out of the outlet into the agitation conveyance section of the toner supply unit Outlet nC TTR 90 rotation LALA To agitation conveyance block of toner supply unit Toner level detection control TONER_SIG T_SENSE_CONT 5V P GND TONERM_CONT TONERM_CLK TONERM_CW CCW TONERM_EM MS1 MS2 OO Toner level detection is controlled by the TLD toner level detection sensor and the PRCB printer control board 1 Operation a Toner level detection A piezoelectric device is used as the TLD toner level detection sensor When the level of toner in the hopper becomes low the toner supply signal is output to PRCB printer control board As a result a message is displayed on the LCD connected to OB1 operation board 1 ENWW b Detection timing The detection timing is as follows e Power on When the front door opens or closes During copying c Toner supply to toner supply unit When the no toner state is detected by TLD toner level detection sensor M13 toner bottle is turned on to supply toner from the toner bottle to the toner supply unit d Detection of no toner state in to
341. turned on to transmit the drive force of M5 conveyance to the second pick roller starting the second paper feed Image position correction control Mis centering of the paper fed from each tray is detected by PS70 paper mis centering and the paper leading edge timing is detected by PS43 leading edge and they are corrected at the time of image write A contact image sensor is used as PS70 paper mis centering The paper edge position is detected by paper mis centering sensors Based on the edge position information the image write position is shifted to correct mis centering and leading edge timing at the time of image write PS70 operates after a lapse of the specified time from turning on of PS43 leading edge 2 Signals a Input signals 1 LOOP PS P36 to PRCB Loop formation reference timing detection signal The leading edge or trailing edge of paper is detected L Detected H Not detected 2 LD M5 to ADUDB M5 fault detection signal L Normal H Abnormal 102 MFP unit explanation 3 DEF VIDEO PS70 to ADUDB PS70 paper mis centering sensor output signal 4 2ND PS PS44 to ADUDB Second paper feed reference timing detection signal L Detected H Not detected 5 EDGF PS PS43 to ADUDB Paper leading edge detection signal L Detected H Not detected 6 REG PS ADUDB to PRCB Paper leading edge detection signal L Detected H Not detected b Output signals 1 START ST
342. two screws to remove the bottom plate assembly 3 Remove the spring Screws 2 Bottom plate assembly Spring hole 4 Remove the separation roller assembly from Tray 1 186 MFP disassembly assembly 5 Remove the snap ring to pull out the shaft and remove the separation roller rubber from the separation roller Paint mark Separation roller rubber Separation roller iS 2 gt S Shaft 2 Separation roller assembly Snap ring 6 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION Check that the orientation of the separation roller is correct when installing Check that no grease or the like remains on the separation roller There are three spring holes Insert the spring in the middle hole ENWW Vertical conveyance section Removing and reinstalling the vertical conveyance section CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Remove all right side covers See External section on page 132 2 Disconnect the connector CN880 3 Remove eleven screws to remove the vertical conveyance section ma o Vertical conveyance door HA o HA d o INC LY pl Vertical SY conveyance 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION When installing the vertical conveyance section be sure to secure the screws with the vertical conveyance door closed ENWW
343. ty Do not place the MFP in a place exposed to direct sunlight or near a heat source such as a heater A risk of degradation in MFP performance or deformation exists Do not place the MFP in a place exposed to cool wind Recommended temperature and humidity are as follows Temperature 10 C to 30 C 50 F to 86 F Humidity 10 percent to 80 percent no dew condensation CAUTION Ventilation Do not place the MFP in a place where there is much dust cigarette smoke or ammonia gas Place the MFP in a well ventilated location to prevent MFP problems and image issues 10 Safety ENWW N CAUTION Ventilation The MFP generates ozone gas during operation but it is not sufficient to be harmful to the human body If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases ventilate the room When the MFP is used in a poorly ventilated room e When making a lot of copies When using multiple MFPs at the same time re SUB A o2 I Ms N CAUTION Vibration When installing the MFP read the installation guide thoroughly Be sure to install the MFP on a level and sturdy surface Constant vibration will cause problems e Be sure to lock the caster stoppers In the case of an earthquake and so on the MFP may slide leading to a injury amp Q y JN CAUTION Inspection before servicing e Before conductin
344. ual Manual contents The HP LaserJet 9055mfp 9065mfp Service Manual contains six separate documents Each document provides specific service information for one of the components that make up the HP LaserJet 9055mfp 9065mfp The following are the component documents listed in the order that they appear in the manual eo HP LaserJet 9055mfp 9065mfp main engine Automatic document feeder 4000 sheet high capacity input Post insertion kit Punch kit Stapler stacker and multifunction finisher Manual organization Each separate document contains its own table of contents and index The tabs on the right hand pages help you identify the sections of the manual The tab for the table of contents in each document appears in magenta The tabs for the remaining chapters in each document appear in gray 2 How to use this manual ENWW ENWW Safety Safety and important warning items 2 22 00000 e cece nenn 4 Important NOLES voice bn a 4 Description items for Warning Caution and Note 4 Safety warnings usuan nanana een nennen 5 Modifications not authorized by hp cee eee eee 5 Power Supply cion ota an kab ee 7 Installation requirements 00000 cece eens 10 Measures to take in case of an accident 15 CONCIWSION gis cis etre dd dd a 15 Regulatory statements 0 0000 cee eects 16 Safety information 0 000 00 cee eee 16 Safety Circulo Ke
345. ulleys Next move the up down plate manually to check whether it moves up and down smoothly CAUTION Alter replacing the up down wires make horizontal and centering CAUTION If the up down plate does adjustments of the not move smoothly up down plate Refer to remove the up down wires Adjustment section and install them again 19 Install the up down motor mounting assembly relay connectors remaining paper detection gear gear D and up down gear following the removal steps in reverse 20 Rotate the remaining paper detection gear until the round hole in this gear is aligned with the oblong hole in the up down motor mounting assembly Up down motor mounting assembly Remaining paper detection gear w Ng NG Oblong N e Round hole CAUTION Align them when the up down plate is at the bottom 21 Install gear C 30 HCI disassembly assembly ENWW Index Cc center cross sectional drawing 3 D dimensions machine 2 drive system drawing 4 E environment operating 2 F feed roller rubber 18 first paper feed control 10 H HCI feed MC MC101 20 HCI feed PS PS106 17 HCI first paper feed MC MC102 20 HCI first paper feed PS PS107 17 humidity 2 M maintenance 2 MC101 HCI feed MC 20 MC102 HCI first paper feed MC 20 N no paper detection control 13 O operating environment 2 P paper maximum quantity 2 standard sizes 2 paper dust removing brush 16
346. unit 69 Main tray section 0002 eee 70 Replacing the tray up down motor M703 aa 70 Replacing the up down wire 00 0 cee eee eee 70 Stacker S amp O se na ma GG kA KAGABE NG bale Ge ae dae 74 Removing and reinstalling the stacker unit cover 74 Removing and reinstalling the stacker unit 74 Stapler Section Bah aaa 76 Removing and reinstalling the stapler unit cover 76 Removing and reinstalling the clincher a 77 Removing and reinstalling the stapler a 78 61 Finisher disassembly assembly External section Note Note the following points when you detach the finisher from the MFP Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet The disassembled parts must be reassembled following the disassembly procedure in reverse unless otherwise specified Care should be taken not to lose small parts Care should also be taken not to install small parts in wrong places WARNING Do not operate the MFP before installing all the disassembled parts completely Removal of some screws is prohibited in this section Never loosen them CAUTION For Q3634A the booklet tray must be removed prior to starting the service If the unit is moved with the booklet tray attached the mounting section may be damaged Removing and reinstalling the Removing and reinstalling the top booklet tray Q3634A only c
347. unit Tray 3 179 Trays 2 and 3 173 paper guide plate control 57 paper mis centering PS PS70 189 paper pick roller Tray 1 185 Tray 3 179 Trays 2 and 3 174 paper reverse control 104 paper reverse exit roller 207 paper size detection control Tray 1 bypass tray 91 Tray 2 3 80 Tray 4 87 paper size copy 25 paper up drive control 86 Tray 2 3 79 Tray 4 86 ENWW paper up down control 90 PCL 162 PCL control 62 photosensitive material 25 pick roller rubber Tray 1 185 Tray 3 179 Trays 2 and 3 174 plain paper 26 plunger prevention plate 164 polygon M15 control 53 power consumption 26 power cord warnings 7 power plug warnings 7 power supply 26 power supply warnings 7 powered on warnings 12 pre registration clutches MCs Tray 3 181 Trays 2 and 3 175 pre registration roller 201 pre transfer roller 194 product comparison 224 specifications 25 prohibited actions 5 PS43 leading edge PS 189 PS44 registration PS 192 PS45 ADF paper reverse PS 195 PS46 ADF Reverse Exit PS 195 PS70 paper mis centering PS 189 Ne R registration assembly second paper feed unit 191 registration MC MC1 190 registration PS PS44 192 registration roller 193 regulatory statements 16 S safety checkpoints 12 safety circuits 16 safety information 16 safety items 4 safety labels 19 safety symbols 5 safety warnings 5 scanner M11 control 45 scanner glass 147 scanner motor M11 148 Index 235 Index sca
348. unit is supplied to the developing sleeve by the agitator wheel and maintained at a constant thickness by the developer regulation plate bristle height regulation plate The developer remaining on the developing sleeve is returned to the agitator screws ENWW Splash prevention sheet upper Developing regulation plate Ki Agitator N wheel Agitator screws Developing sleeve M3 developing control Splash prevention sheet upper Developing regulation plate Agitator wheel Agitator screws Developing sleeve 5V P GND DEVM_CONT DEVM_CLK DEVM_CW CCW DEVM_GAIN DEVM_EM PRCB Developing unit 63 MFP unit explanation M3 developing is controlled by PRCB printer control board and the motor drive power is supplied from DCPS DC power supply unit 1 Operation M3 developing is a DC motor driven by 24 V It drives the developing sleeve agitator wheel and agitator screws M3 turns on when the PRINT button is pressed and turns off after lapse of the specified time from turning off of the charging 2 Signals a Input signals 1 DEVM_EM M3 to PRCB M3 developing abnormality detection signal H Abnormal rotation when motor speed changes by 6 5 percent more or less than the motor speed specified value L Normal rotation b Output signals 1 DEVM_CONT PRCB to M3 M3 developing drive control signal L M3 on H M3 o
349. upper tray full turns on and finisher transmits upper tray full information to the MFP When the MFP receives it the message is displayed on the control panel 2 Signals a Finisher CB input signals 1 PS701 IN PS701 to finisher CB Signal indicating the existence of the paper at the location of the sub tray paper exit sensor L paper does not exist H paper exists 2 PS719 IN PS719 to finisher CB Signal indicating the sub tray full L Sub tray full H Sub tray not full b Finisher CB output signals 1 M721 DRVA A finisher CB to M721 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase A of M721 2 M721 DRV B B finisher CB to M721 Pulse signal to drive control the Phase B of M721 ENWW Conveyance section 35 Finisher unit explanation Main tray section Composition Upper up down pulley Up down pulley L Main tray Mechanism Mechanism Method Main tray up down 1 Wire drive paper detection 2 Photo sensor 4 Main tray up down The tray up down motor M703 and the worm gear installed on the motor shaft perform the winding operation of the up down wire The rotation direction of the motor shaft determines the moving direction of the main tray that is the rise or fall If the up down pulley L rotates clockwise seen from the front the main tray rises Otherwise the main tray falls 36 Finisher unit explanation 2 Stapler paper exit upper lim
350. ut signals 1 SD704 DRV finisher CB to SD704 Signal to drive control SD704 L SD704 on H SD704 off M708 paper exit opening control 5V PS712 IN PS712 GND 5V PS729 IN PS725 GND 5V PS729 IN _ PS729 GND 5V MAIN BODY GND LED729 FNS CB In the staple when the length of the paper in the feeding direction is larger than B5R booklet or tri folding mode M708 paper exit opening drives the open close operation of the paper exit opening through the link mechanism The finisher CB finisher control board controls the operation of M708 The related signals are PS712 paper exit opening HP PS725 folding exit and PS729 folding full PS Conveyance section 33 Finisher unit explanation 1 Operation M721 upper tray paper exit a Staple mode for papers whose length control in the feeding direction is larger than B5R The finisher operation signal from the M721 DRVA MFP lets M708 paper exit opening oe a e rotate causing the paper exit opening to M721 DRV B be opened Upon completion of the stapling PS701 IN operation M708 paper exit opening rotates again to start the closing operation of the paper exit opening PS704 IN When PS712 paper exit opening HP detects the closed position M708 stops The steps above are repeated for PS7A9IN each set of the sheets that will be MAIN BODY FNS CB stapled SS b F
351. ve the drum unit See Drum unit on page 152 2 Remove the charging corona unit See Corona unit on page 159 3 Remove the developing unit Developing unit on page 166 4 Remove two screws to remove the cleaner cover Screws 5 Check that the blade fusing component is released If it is not release it referring to Drum unit on page 152 Screw Released position Blade fixing component ENWW 6 Remove the blade support bearing to remove the cleaning blade Cleaning blade Blade support bearing 7 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION After replacing the cleaning blade be sure to perform Blade Setting Mode Adjustment in the 3 6 mode to prevent the blade from peeling ENWW Removing and reinstalling the toner guide roller TGR CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Be sure to replace the following parts at the same time e Cleaning blade e Toner guide roller Do not touch the edges of the cleaning blade with bare hands When reinstalling the cleaning blade apply setting powder to the entire surface of the drum and cleaning blade regardless of whether the parts are new or old When reinstalling the toner guide roller apply setting powder to the toner guide roller evenly Apply with the toner guide roller removed from the drum unit Do not touch the toner guide roller brush with
352. verse The exit conveyance roller and MFP exit roller are driven by M7 paper exit M4 and M7 are controlled by PRCB printer control board directly M8 M9 and SD7 are controlled by PRCB printer control board via ADUDB ADU drive board Related signals are PS30 fuser exit PS37 paper exit and PS42 paper reverse 1 Operation a Reverse exit selection gate control The reverse exit selection gate is driven by SD7 reverse gate Normally the reverse exit selection gate is open to guide paper to the reverse exit section in ADU When paper is ejected straight SD7 is turned on to close the reverse exit selection gate When paper is ejected straight SD7 is turned on when the START button is pressed and it is turned off when PS37 paper exit turns off at detection of the trailing edge of the last sheet of paper b M4 fuser control M4 fuser starts when the START button is pressed and it stops when PS37 paper exit turns off at detection of the training edge of the last sheet of paper 1 Straight paper exit Paper is fed to the paper exit section straight by the paper exit roller driven by M4 fuser because SD7 reverse gate is turned on to close the reverse exit selection gate ENWW 2 Paper reverse exit Because SD7 reverse gate has been turned off to open the reverse exit selection gate paper is fed to the reverse exit section in ADU by the paper exit roller and decurler roller driven by M4
353. ving the tray stand in a proper position so that you do not hurt your back and waist If the tray contains paper remove all paper before removing the tray CAUTION Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet Procedure 1 Pull out paper feed Tray 2 or 3 2 Remove the paper feed unit 3 Remove four screws and remove Tray 2 or 3 by lifting Screws 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse Paper feed units of Trays 2and3 173 MFP disassembly assembly Removing and reinstalling the paper pick roller and pick roller rubber Procedure 1 Remove the paper feed unit 2 Remove the two snap rings and slide the two bearings outward 3 Release the pick roller axis from the holder slit to detach the paper pick roller unit Roller unit n Bearin g Snap ring 4 Remove the two snap rings from the paper pick roller unit to detach the paper pick roller and pick roller 174 MFP disassembly assembly 5 Remove the rubber from each roller Paint mark Feed roller Pick roller Pick roller rubber Snap rings 6 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse CAUTION When reinstalling the rollers pay attention to their orientation Check that no grease or the like remains on each roller Removing and reinstalling the separation roller rubber Procedure 1 Remove the paper feed unit 2 Remove the paper pick roll
354. w E RDH memory capacity Standard 64 MB Maximum 192 MB Applicable copy paper Plain paper High quality paper of 60 g m or 17 Ib to 90 g m or 24 Ib Special paper Tray 1 feed only OHT film Blueprint master paper both Tray 1 tray and stacked trays Tabs Plain paper of 50 g m or 13 Ib to 59 g m or 16 Ib Plain paper of 91 g m or 24 Ib to 200 g m or 45 Ib Options HCI Q3637A Letter A4 Q3638A Ledger A3 Paper exit Tray 100 sheet Q3640A Hard disk Q3642A Finisher Q3633A Q3634A Cover sheet feeder Post inserter Q3636A Puncher Punch Kit 2 hole Q3635A 3 hole Q3689A 4 hole Swedish Q3691A 4 hole Q3690A Print Controller Q3639A Particulars of machine Power supply 230 VAC 14 percent to 10 6 percent 50Hz 60Hz 120 VAC 10 percent 60 Hz 26 MFP overview Power consumption 230 V Machine 2300 W maximum full option 120 V Machine 1920 W maximum full option Weight Approximately 203 kg 447 Ib External dimensions gt 1140 766 mm Maintenance and life Periodic maintenance Every 250 000 copies Machine life 5 000 000 copies or 5 years Environmental conditions Temperature 10 C to 30 C 50 F to 86 F Humidity 10 percent to 80 percent RH Note The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice ENWW Central cross
355. w tighten temporarily Screws tighten temporarily 4 Follow the removal procedure in reverse and install the cable conduit and four relay connectors CN612 to CN615 5 Install two ADF positioning tools in the mounting holes of the original stopper plates left 24 ADF disassembly assembly ENWW 6 Close the ADF to connect the reference holes and ADF positioning tools 7 Install three screws to secure each of the two fixing plates with three screws following the removal procedure in reverse 8 Open the ADF and tighten all of the four screws to secure the two fixing plates Reference hole LA Reference hole oval E 9 Remove the ADF positioning tools and install the original stopper plate left with two screws 10 Remove two screws and uninstall the top cover left 11 Close the ADF and check whether both stopper pieces on the ADF side touch the ADF glass ENWW Stopper piece Screws 2 Top cover left 12 If both stopper pieces do not touch the ADF glass at the same time make adjustments using adjusting screws A and B alternately 13 Perform steps 11 and 12 repeatedly until the two stopper pieces touch the ADF glass at the same time Adjusting screw A Adjusting screw B 14 For further installation follow the removal procedure in reverse 15 The open and close angle of ADF can be changed from 70 degrees to 40 degrees when the stopper is a
356. w upper unit Screws 2 as N x lt SP Screws 2 Fixing unit front cover 5 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse Fuser 209 MFP disassembly assembly Removing and reinstalling the cleaning web Procedure 1 Pull out the ADU stand See Pulling out and reinstalling the ADU stand on page 188 2 Remove the web cover 3 Remove two screws to remove the cleaning web unit Cleaning web unit Screws 2 4 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse 210 MFP disassembly assembly CAUTION When reinstalling make sure the cleaning web does not sag When reinstalling wind it until the red line of the cleaning web is fully wound to the take up shaft After replacing the cleaning web make sure to reset the count value of the fuser cleaning web by Copy count by parts to be replaced fixed parts in the 2 5 mode Replacing the fusing heater lamps L2 L3 CAUTION Do not touch the fusing heater lamp with bare hands Install the heater lamp with the manufacturers mark facing the rear The heater lamp should not touch the inner surface of the upper roller When replacing the heater lamp be sure to insert the lamp end in the lamp terminal securely Also check that the Faston terminals are connected correctly Procedure 1 Remove the fuser 2 Remove the fuser front cover 3 Remove the screw at the front to remove the lamp
357. yance The operation performed from the moment PS30 fuser exit turns off at detection of the trailing edge of paper to the moment M8 reverse exit and M9 ADU reverse start rotating in the forward direction at a high speed is the same as reverse exit When PS46 reverse exit turns off at detection of the trailing edge of paper M8 starts rotating in the forward direction at a high speed proceeding to feed the next sheet of paper After a lapse of the specified time from detection of the trailing edge of paper by PS46 M9 starts rotating in the opposite direction at a low speed feeding paper to the ADU conveyance section When PS45 ADU paper reverse detects the trailing edge of paper and consequently turns off M9 starts rotating in the forward direction at a low speed proceeding to feed the next sheet of paper d M7 paper exit control M7 paper exit turns on when the START button is pressed The OFF timing is different between paper straight exit and reverse exit 1 Paper straight exit The paper fed from the fuser unit by the exit roller is ejected by the MFP exit roller driven by M7 paper exit M7 is always rotating at a constant speed and it is turned off when PS37 paper exit turns off at detection of the trailing edge of the last sheet of paper 2 Paper reverse exit The paper fed from the reverse exit section in ADU with it reversed is 106 MFP unit explanation ejected by the exit conveyance

hp LaserJet 9055mfp/9065mfp service manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents